Devices and method for the production of sheet material

ABSTRACT

The invention relates to sheet material having an electrical circuit and to apparatuses and methods for processing said sheet material. The present invention describes sheet material having an electrical circuit as well as apparatuses and methods for processing same, which reduce the effort required for processing the sheet material and/or facilitate processing and/or improve it and/or make it more reliable. For this purpose, the sheet material has at least one electrical circuit, with energy and/or data being transmitted from the apparatus to the electrical circuit and/or from the electrical circuit to the apparatus and at least part of the transmitted data being used for processing.

The invention relates to sheet material with an electrical circuit andapparatuses and methods for producing and processing such sheetmaterial.

Elaborate processing using sensory means is required when processing,such as counting and/or sorting prior art sheet material such asbanknotes.

It is thus the object of the present invention to specify sheet materialwith an electrical circuit and apparatuses and methods for producing orprocessing, as the case may be, same that reduce the expenses and timerequired to produce or process, as the case may be, the sheet materialand/or facilitate and/or improve such production or processing, as thecase may be, and/or render same more reliable.

This object is solved by the features of the independent claims. Thedependent claims describe preferred embodiments.

Among other things, the object is thus solved by an apparatus and amethod for processing sheet material with at least one electricalcircuit, where energy and/or data are transmitted from the apparatus tothe electrical circuit and/or from the electrical circuit to theapparatus and at least part of the transmitted energy or data, as thecase may be, is used for the processing.

A checking device is used for this purpose. Such checking device,hereinafter also referred to as a testing, reading, transmission deviceor unit, as the case may be, can be designed not only for thetransmission of energy and/or data, but rather for the analysis of suchdata as well. The checking device within the meaning of the presentinvention can thus be used both for receiving energy and/or data and/oremitting energy and/or data and/or for testing in dependence on theenergies or data, as the case may be, that are emitted or received, asthe case may be.

According to the general definition, the term “data” can refer both toinformation that, in particular, is transmitted unilaterally orbilaterally between the sheet material circuit and the processingapparatus, i.e. including information e.g. in the form of processingcommands or control commands, as the case may be, that specify what issupposed to happen to the other transmitting information. Here, the“energy” serves in particular to enable such data transmission by havingthe processing apparatus supply the sheet material circuit with energyfor example. In this context, the term “electrical circuit” can refer tothe circuit itself, i.e., for example, a chip as an integrated circuit,as well as its coupling elements such as its contact surfaces, couplingantennas or coupling photodiodes, etc..

Special embodiments of the invention relate to sheet material with acircuit and one or more transmission devices for transmitting energy forthe supplying of voltage into the circuit and/or one or moretransmission devices for transmitting data into the circuit and/or oneor more transmission devices for transmitting data out of the circuit.Here, it is possible to base each of these transmission units on diversephysical modes of action. For example, galvanic coupling via contacts,coupling by an electric field, coupling by a magnetic field, opticalcoupling by electromagnetic waves such as coupling by light, coupling bydeformation, coupling by electromechanical elements, coupling by soundand coupling by heat can take place alone or in combination. Within themeaning of the present application, light refers to all kinds ofelectromagnetic radiation, although it preferably refers to visiblelight, but also refers to UV light, infrared light, radio waves ormicrowaves.

Other methods such as data transmission by means of changingcoefficients of optical transmission, reflection and/or absorption suchas with so-called electronic paper and/or transmission of theinformation by load modulation of the energy that is transmitted intothe circuit via a transmission device can also be used to transmit datafrom within the circuit.

An embodiment of the invention relates to apparatuses and methods wheresheet material with an electrical circuit is made available as a stackand where one or more properties of the sheet material is determinedand/or captured by communication between the electrical circuit of thesheet material and the apparatus and/or where information and/or dataare transmitted to the electrical circuit by the communication andstored in a memory of a banknote chip, for example. There are the twocategories of measurement in stack measurement in particular with onebeing with a stationary stack and the other one with a moving stack.

Here, a “stationary” stack or a “moving” stack, as the case may be, canbe understood to refer to the cases where both the stack as a whole isstationary or moving, as the case may be, and/or individual sheets orall of the sheets of the stack are stationary or moving, as the case maybe, with reference to one another.

Another embodiment of the invention relates to apparatuses and methodsfor processing, preferably in the stationary state, sheet materialhaving at least one electrical circuit, where an informational exchangebetween the electrical circuit and the apparatus of the particular sheetmaterial to be separated next occurs prior to separation of such sheetmaterial. The problem of jumbled talk/crosstalk can be solved e.g. byoptical enabling. Additional authenticity sensors in the singler make itpossible to build banknote processing machines without a measurementpath.

Moreover, the object is solved by sheet material having an electricalcircuit and a transmission device for the transmission of energy and/ordata to or from the electrical circuit, as well as apparatuses andmethods for this informational exchange. It must also be emphasizedthat, with reference to banknotes, the sheet material according to theinvention refers to both unprinted banknote paper and banknote paperthat has already been printed.

In another embodiment of the invention, the electrical circuit of thesheet material has at least one memory with a plurality of separatememory areas that are writable and/or readable while the sheet materialis in circulation. Furthermore, the invention can provide for particularusage data to be recorded in a memory and/or read from same.

Another embodiment of the invention relates to sheet material with anelectrical circuit with a memory as well as apparatuses and methods forthe exchange of information with the electrical circuit where PKI(Public Key Infrastructure) methods are used to secure the exchange ofinformation and authenticate certain properties (e.g. the nominal valueof a banknote). This makes simple realization of the apparatus possiblesince no security electronics are required.

Another preferred embodiment of the invention relates to apparatuses forthe exchange of information with an electrical circuit of the sheetmaterial, with the sheet material being transported past the apparatusin order to exchange information and the exchange of information beingindependent of the transport and the orientation of the sheet material.

According to the other main claims, the object is also achieved bycontainers such as a safe or a cassette or a band for the storage and/ortransport of sheet material, an intermediate product, such as a transferelement for use in the production of a sheet material, a method for theproduction of sheet material or an intermediate product for use in theproduction of sheet material and by an apparatus for use in theproduction of sheet material or an intermediate product for use in theproduction of sheet material.

It must be emphasized in particular that the individual features of thedependent claims and the embodiments cited in the description may beused advantageously in combination or also completely or at leastpartially independently of one another and of the subject matter of themain claims.

The invention is described on the basis of exemplary embodiments in thefollowing,

which show:

FIG. 1 A simplified, schematicized representation of the circulation ofmoney;

FIG. 2 An embodiment of the security paper in the form of a banknoteaccording to the invention;

FIG. 3 A top view of a further embodiment of the security paper in theform of a banknote according to the invention;

FIG. 4 A top view of a further embodiment of the security paper in theform of a banknote according to the invention;

FIG. 5 An intaglio printing plate for the incorporation of electricalcircuits according to the invention in cross-section;

FIG. 6 A cross-section of a document that was printed with a printingplate according to FIG. 5;

FIG. 7 A schematic view of a rotary press apparatus with pre-stage andprint stage;

FIG. 8 An embossed foil for the self-alignment method in cross-section;

FIG. 9 A cross-section of an embossed foil according to FIG. 8 with achip stored in it;

FIG. 10 A further embodiment of an embossed foil for the self-alignmentmethod in cross-section;

FIG. 11 A schematic top view of the position and location of the contactsurfaces of a chip of a banknote;

FIG. 12 A further embodiment of the self-alignment method;

FIG. 13 A cross-section of an embossing and printing form for the methodaccording to FIG. 12 a;

FIG. 14 Transfer of a multilayered printed circuit onto a substrate;

FIG. 15 A top view of a further embodiment of the security paperaccording to the invention in the form of a banknote;

FIG. 16 A top view of a further embodiment of the security paperaccording to the invention in the form of a banknote;

FIG. 17 A section of a banknote according to FIG. 16 along A-A;

FIG. 18 A schematic cross-section through a banknote with aferromagnetic core;

FIG. 19 A schematic cross-section through an apparatus for the creationof locally-defined ferromagnetic areas in a paper web;

FIG. 20 A schematic view of a sieve for the creation of locally-definedferromagnetic areas in a paper web;

FIG. 21 A schematic representation of a banknote with a chip and twoantennas;

FIG. 22 A top view of a further embodiment of the security paperaccording to the invention in the form of a banknote with coil-on-chiptechnology;

FIG. 23 An embodiment of a banknote with inductive coupling elements andoptical coupling elements;

FIG. 24 A schematic representation of the functional principle of aphotodiode with fluorescent dyes (LISA);

FIG. 25 A schematic representation of a banknote with a LISA photodiode;

FIG. 26 A schematic representation of a further banknote with a LISAphotodiode;

FIG. 27 A magnetostrictive-piezoelectric compound material;

FIG. 28 A banknote with such a magnetostrictive-piezoelectric compoundmaterial;

FIG. 29 An equivalent circuit diagram of an electrical oscillatingcircuit permanently integrated in the banknote paper as an electronicsecurity element;

FIG. 30 An initial embodiment of a banknote with a capacitative couplingelement;

FIG. 31 A second embodiment of a banknote with a capacitative couplingelement;

FIG. 32 A top view of a further embodiment of the security paper in theform of a banknote according to the invention;

FIG. 33 A schematic perspective representation of a portion of theproduction method of the banknote according to FIG. 22;

FIG. 34 An embodiment of a banknote with galvanic contacts;

FIG. 35 A further embodiment of a banknote with galvanic contacts;

FIG. 36 A block circuit diagram of an inductively coupled transponderconsisting of logic portion and HF interface;

FIG. 37 A schematic representation of a stack of banknotes with opticalenergy supply;

FIG. 38 A schematic representation of a cassette with a reading devicefor banknotes with a chip;

FIG. 39 An example of a small packet of banknotes enclosed by a band;

FIG. 40 A side view of the example depicted in FIG. 39;

FIG. 41 A further example of a small packet of banknotes enclosed by aband;

FIG. 42 An embodiment of the band holding the small packet of banknotestogether;

FIG. 43 A side view of the example depicted in FIG. 42;

FIG. 44 An example of a stack measuring device with opticalcommunication in top view;

FIG. 45 An example of a stack measuring device with opticalcommunication in side view;

FIG. 46 An example of a stack measuring device with opticalcommunication and inductive communication in side view;

FIG. 47 In schematic view, a reading device for reading out inductivelycoupled banknotes with magnetic paper in a stack;

FIG. 48 An example of a stack measuring device with capacitivecommunication in side view;

FIG. 49 An equivalent circuit diagram of a stack of banknotes accordingto FIG. 30;

FIG. 50 An equivalent circuit diagram of a stack of banknotes modifiedin comparison with FIG. 30;

FIG. 51 A further example of a stack measuring device with capacitivecommunication in schematic, perspective view;

FIG. 52 Two reading devices for banknotes according to FIG. 28;

FIG. 53 An alternative to the banknote according to FIG. 27 with part ofan associated reading device;

FIG. 54 A schematic representation of an example of a check forduplicates with several databases;

FIG. 55 A schematic representation of a further example of a check forduplicates with several databases;

FIG. 56 A schematic representation of yet another example of a check forduplicates with several databases;

FIG. 57 An initial embodiment of a banknote processing machine, forsorting banknotes in particular;

FIG. 58 Embodiments of banknotes with an electrical circuit and antenna;

FIG. 59 An initial embodiment of a data exchange device for a banknoteprocessing machine according to the invention, for processing banknoteswith an electrical circuit;

FIG. 60 A second embodiment of a data exchange device for a banknoteprocessing machine according to the invention, for processing banknoteswith an electrical circuit;

FIG. 61 A third embodiment of a data exchange device for a banknoteprocessing machine according to the invention, for processing banknoteswith an electrical circuit;

FIG. 62 An embodiment of an input unit for banknotes used with abanknote processing machine according to the invention;

FIG. 63 A second embodiment of a banknote processing machine, forcounting and/or evaluating banknotes in particular;

FIG. 64 A third embodiment of a banknote processing machine, forcounting and/or evaluating banknotes in particular;

FIG. 65 A schematic representation of an example of a spindle counterfor banknotes;

FIG. 66 An example of a money-deposit machine; and

FIG. 67 A further example of a money depositing machine.

Although the present invention relates to sheet material of any kind andcan also be used e.g. for sheet-shaped documents of value, such aschecks or tickets, it is particularly advantageous for banknotes. Thatis why the special problems associated with banknotes and the processingof such banknotes are dealt with in particular in the following.

The idea according to the invention, as it can be realized in theembodiments referred to in the above and further described in thefollowing, permits substantial improvement and reorganization ofprocedures in the entire money cycle as well as the banknote processingapparatuses used therein.

Therefore, the various embodiments of the invention can best beexplained and understood with reference to their particular significancein the money cycle as shown by means of its fundamental characteristicsin FIG. 1.

The Money Cycle

When paper is produced in a paper mill 20, security paper that issuitable for banknotes is produced and provided with security featuressuch as watermarks and/or security threads. The security paper isprinted with security ink during subsequent banknote printing at thebanknote printing works 21 and provided with additional securityfeatures if necessary.

After banknote printing 22 and other potential production steps, thebanknotes are subjected to quality assurance 23, during which theirquality is checked. Faulty banknotes or banknotes that do not meetcertain quality standards or only do so partially are generallydestroyed immediately by being fed into a destruction device 24, ashredder in particular.

The completed and checked banknotes are brought into circulation by acentral bank 25, with the bank delivering them to individual commercialbanks where the banknotes are either passed on to customers 34 directlyat a cash counter 35 at the bank or via a money dispensing machine 27.

In shops 30, the individual customers' 34 banknotes presented duringpayment are placed in a portable cash register 33, or they can be placedinto an automatic money input device 32 that checks the banknotes thatare deposited, recognizes their particular denominations and totals themif necessary. At least part of the cash obtained is then returned to thecommercial banks 26, where it is credited to the particular shop'saccount 30. The banknotes can be deposited directly at the counter 35 orthey can be deposited into a cash deposit machine 28. Combined moneydepositing and money dispensing machines 29, so-called recyclers, whichcommercial bank customers can use both for depositing and dispensingcash, are intended for smaller amounts in particular.

The banknotes deposited at a commercial bank 26 are generally returnedto the central bank 25 where automatic banknote processing machines 31are used to check them for authenticity and further fitness forcirculation in particular, which depends on the banknotes' degree ofwear and soiling. Unfit banknotes that are no longer fit for circulationare fed into a destruction device 24, in particular a shredder, whereasbanknotes rated authentic and still fit for circulation can bedistributed to the commercial banks 26 again and recirculated.

In the following, a number of examples are described in-more detail, andthe diverse aspects of the present invention are illustrated atdifferent stages of the money cycle by way of example.

The production and design of a banknote with an electrical circuit

When paper is produced at the paper mill 20 or when banknotes areproduced at the banknote printing works 21, the security paper isprovided with an electrical circuit e.g. an integrated circuit.

When paper is produced at the paper mill 20, the integrated circuit canalready be embedded in the security paper or applied to same. At thebanknote printing works, the circuit is not applied to the banknote orincorporated into same, as the case may be, until the security paper isprocessed further. This can preferentially be effected by mixing it inwith the printing ink during the printing operation and transferring itonto the document with same. Alternatively, the circuit is prepared onor in a carrier layer that is applied to the banknote or incorporatedinto same, as the case may be. Likewise, several electrical circuits canbe produced both at the paper mill 20 and at the banknote printing works21, or the production of one or more electrical circuits can be dividedup between the paper mill 20 and the banknote printing works 21.

Advantageously, the electrical circuit is produced by printingtechnology on the base layer, i.e. on the security paper or carrierlayer, as the case may be, with two of the production steps that arenormally performed separately, namely production of the circuit andsubsequent application of same onto a base layer, being combined in asingle step. Altogether, this procedure significantly reduces productioncosts. Moreover, the electrical circuit printed on the security paper orthe carrier layer, as the case may be, can only be removed from thefinished banknote with great difficulty, or potentially onlyself-destructively, so that any further use for purposes of manipulationis made significantly more difficult or impossible, as the case may be.

Advantageously, the position of the electrical circuit varies slightlyin every document at least, in banknotes in particular, so that theelectrical circuits do not end up lying directly above one other whenthe documents are stacked, thereby preventing both a thickening of thestack in the region of the electrical circuits, as well as a reciprocalhigh-frequency-based disturbance of the individual circuits in thestack.

The sheet material as security paper according to the inventionpreferentially consists of paper in the narrower sense, i.e. out ofcotton or cellulose fibers. However, it can principally also be producedfrom any other kind of material containing natural fibers and/orsynthetic fibers. Furthermore, the security paper can be comprised ofone or more plastic foils that can optionally form a bond with a layerof the security paper consisting of fibers.

Here, the electrical circuit within the meaning of the invention cancomprise only a single electrical module in the simplest case or acomplex electrical circuit, in particular, an integrated circuit, thatcomprises a few or many electrical modules. All known passive modulessuch as resistors, capacitors and semiconductor diodes, or activemodules such as transistors and thyristors, as well as transducers, suchas photodiodes and light-emitting diodes, are principally suitable aselectrical modules.

Preferentially used integrated circuits, so-called chips, have typicaldimensions of less than I millimeter x 1 millimeter at thicknesses ofbetween 20 and 100 microns and exhibit at least one memory for storingdata among other things. However, smaller chips with an edge length of0.3 millimeters and a thickness of less than 20 microns, for example,can also be used. The memories that are typically used can be RAM, ROM,PROM, FRAM, MRAM, EPROM, EEPROM or FIFO memories. Additionally, thecircuit can be provided with a processing unit, a microprocessor inparticular, for processing data.

For certain applications, it is advantageous for the memories in theintegrated circuit to be designed as nonvolatile and writable memories,PROM, EPROM and/or EEPROM in particular, with several separate memoryareas that are writable during circulation of the banknote. Theindividual memory areas can be provided with different access privilegesfor writing and/or reading operations so that certain actions may onlybe allowed for certain people or devices.

At least one memory area can also be configured such that severaldifferent groups of persons or entities such as commercial banks 26,money dispensing machines 27, money depositing machines 28, combinedinput and output machines 29, automatic money input devices 32, cashcenter and/or individual customers 34, have access to the memory area.Here, the memory in the circuit is segmented such that the individualmemory areas remain reserved for the particular groups of persons, evenif no data has yet been written to it.

The memory of the circuit preferentially comprises an authenticationsystem that contains data on different access authorizations for readingand/or modifying the contents of the memory.

Preferentially, information is registered in the memory indicating bywhom, when, where or by means of which apparatus or device, as the casemay be, data were written into and/or read from the memory.

If there is a relatively high risk of the chips being damaged and notfunctioning as a result during one of the possible incorporationprocedures, several chips may also be incorporated. Following completionof the document, the chips may be checked for operability, and surpluschips may be removed or deactivated, as the case may be. If the chipsare introduced into the document in an uncontrolled fashion, e.g. ifthey are added to the paper pulp and each document is equipped with astatistically fluctuating number of chips, the number of chips actuallypresent in the document can be determined and potentially verifiablydocumented.

Finally, stored data and/or the result of the processing of data may beused when the particular security paper's authenticity, life history orintended use is being checked, for example. In this context, the lifehistory may comprise data on production, such as individual productionsteps, and/or the circulation of the sheet material, data on a priorprocessing operation, such as prior test results and/or data on asubsequent processing operation, such as on the issuance of the sheetmaterial from the processing apparatus and/or the transport of the sheetmaterial.

As the chips used according to the invention are very small, there is arisk of a chip being removed from an authentic document, e.g. by beingpunched out, and then being inserted into a forged document as anauthentic chip. In order to avoid this, it can be expedient to removeindividual functions from the chip and to place them on or in theremaining surface of the document in the form of electric componentsdistributed over a large surface. In this case, the total unit, i.e. thecircuit plus additional components, preferentially takes up a surface of5 to 95% of the document, with 50 to 90% or 70 to 90% being particularlypreferred. This information can refer to the entire surface of thecircuits and/or also e.g. to the size of the region of the banknotesurface that is enclosed by the unit such as its coil. Distribution overa large surface has the big advantage that it prevents forged documentsmade by cutting banknotes up and putting them together again in aslightly shorter form, by e.g. putting 20 original banknotes backtogether as 21 slightly smaller banknotes.

In this context, circuit distribution over a large surface may inprinciple constitute an operable circuit that can be addressedinductively, capacitively or also by direct contacting.

The production of large-surface circuits is facilitated by the factthat, in terms of printing technology, components like transistors,diodes, etc. can also be produced by means of conducting polymers orconductive polymers, as the case may be, or on the basis of thinamorphous or polycrystalline silicon layers (α-Si, p-Si).

In principle, it is also conceivable to represent the entire circuitwith the aid of conductive polymers. Since the polymers are usuallyimprinted, it may be necessary to smooth out the rough subsurface of thesecurity paper when the security paper is printed on directly or, as thecase may be, when a separately prepared printed circuit is transferred.This can occur by means of calendering, painting or by applying a primercoat on the corresponding surface. However, measures of that kind canalso be used advantageously with other embodiments of the documentaccording to the invention.

In order to be able to also produce circuits with very fine structures,such as transistor gates, by means of typographical methods, it may beadvantageous to suitably engrave the region of the circuits by means oftypographical methods such as steel gravure printing. This can either beperformed prior to application of the organic polymer components of thecircuit (pre-processing) or subsequent to the application(post-processing). With this method, one attains less stringent demandson the precision of the printing process and is thus less dependent ontolerances of the application technology.

Likewise, the densely packed circuits of the silicon technology can bedivided into functional units and then connected to one another viasuitable lines, possibly by including simple logical elements, such asamplifiers, signal shapers or antennas. Here, both the lines and theadditional elements may be produced with the aid of polymer technology.Therefore, when using this solution, a fully integrated circuit is nolonger designed, but rather functional units with different tasks.Accordingly, a RAM memory element, a CPU element, a ROM memory, driverelements for the peripheral devices, sensory elements for the input ofparameters, etc. might each be realized on an individual piece ofsilicon, for example, and the elements subsequently connected to oneanother. This method makes it possible to produce standard units thatcan be combined with another, thereby obviating the costly constantdevelopment of new chips.

For certain applications, it is advantageous to provide transmissiondevices such as optical transmission devices, via which data and/orenergy can be exchanged with the circuit. Among others, this solutionachieves the advantage that an additional or alternative form oftransmission besides the typically used transmission of data and energyvia high-frequency fields can be created. For example, energy can besupplied via high-frequency fields, while the actual communication, i.e.the exchange of data or information, as the case may be, takes place viathe circuit, e.g. by optical means.

Concrete examples of the layer structure and the production of documentsaccording to the invention are described in the following. The measuresdescribed in individual examples for reasons of clarity can be combinedwith one another at will. The examples only serve to illustrateparticular individual aspects of the invention.

EXAMPLE 01

FIG. 2 shows an embodiment of the security paper according to theinvention. Parts a) and b) of the figure show sectional views parallelto the plane of the security paper or perpendicular to it, as the casemay be, along the A-B line.

The security paper, here a banknote 1, is provided with a circuit 3applied to a carrier layer 10. Circuit 3 - only shown schematically inthe form of a square—may be a circuit consisting of discrete modules oran integrated circuit, for example. In both cases provision is made thatcircuit 3 is addressable from the outside, i.e. information can betransmitted to circuit 3 from the outside or circuit 3 can transmitinformation to the outside, such as, for example, to a correspondingreader.

Transmission devices are provided for such information exchange. In somepreferred embodiments, the transmission devices are in the form ofantennas, e.g. coils or dipolar antennas, via which energy and/or datamay be transmitted.

In the example shown, the transmission devices allow optical datatransmission. Circuit 3 is equipped with an optical transmitter 4, inparticular a light-emitting diode, such as a thin-film light-emittingdiode (OLED or the like), and an optical receiver 5, in particular aphotodiode, for this purpose. A photodiode element 6 is coupled tooptical transmitter 4 or receiver 5, as the case may be, in each case.Photodiode elements 6 direct the light produced by optical transmitter 4to the edge of banknote 1 or, as the case may be, guide the lightirradiated into the area of the edge of banknote 1 to optical receiver5.

The exchange of information e.g. takes place such that the spectralcomposition of the light that is emitted or received, as the case maybe, depends on the data to be transmitted. Preferentially, the timecourse, in particular pulse duration, pulse magnitude, pulse separationand/or pulse sequence of the light signals emitted or received, as thecase may be, may also depend on the data to be transmitted.

In the simplest case, transmission devices 4, 5 and 6 only act as an“optical switch” which, upon reception of an external light signal,switches the circuit on or enables it and/or emits a certain lightsignal for a certain operational state of the circuit. Further detailson the possible transmission methods are described in more detail in thefollowing.

Suitable glass fibers or plastic fibers that are applied to carrierlayer 10 may be used as photodiode elements 6. Alternatively, photodiodeelements 6 may also be produced on carrier layer 10 by printingtechnology in analogy to circuit 3, for example, by applying a suitabletransparent plastic by means of a printing method such as screenprinting.

Optical transmitter 4 or optical receiver 5, as the case may be, mayalso be produced by printing technology, in particular by usingsemiconductive and/or light-emitting organic compounds, e.g.corresponding polymers, or by applying thin amorphous or polycrystallinesilicon layers (α-Si, p-Si).

As may be seen in FIG. 2 b, circuit 3 including transmission devices 4,5 and 6 is applied to carrier layer 10. Application of carrier layer 10to banknote 1 is preferentially effected by bonding, for which purposeadhesive layer 12 is provided between carrier layer 10 on the one sideand banknote 1 on the other side.

It is also possible to produce circuit 3 including transmission devices4, 5 and 6, which are also referred to as coupling devices or couplingelements, as the case may be, directly on a banknote 1 by printingtechnology or to place same in the banknote 1 between two partial layers(not shown).

A cover layer 11 that, in particular, protects circuit 3 againstmanipulation, moisture and/or soiling may be provided additionally inthe area of circuit 3 and/or transmission devices 4, 5 and 6. Coverlayer 11 and/or carrier layer 10 are preferentially designed as securityelements that produce a desired optical effect. Here, carrier layer 10or cover layer 11 itself, as the case may be, may even be constructedwith several individual layers that, for example, also produce aholographic effect. Photodiode element 6 may also be formed directly bycover layer 11.

Alternatively or in addition to the foregoing, carrier layer 10 and/orcover layer 11 contain special pigments that produce an opticallyvariable effect. Liquid crystal pigments or other pigments that, forexample, make use of interference effects may preferentially be used forthis purpose. In this fashion, additional security features are appliedto banknote 1 in addition to the electrical circuit, thereby furtherimproving its resistance to forgery and tampering.

As already explained above, an exchange of optical data and/or energywith circuit 3 may be combined with an exchange of data and/or energyvia a high-frequency field. In this case, corresponding transmissiondevices, in particular dipolar antennas or coil-like antennas (notshown) are provided in addition to optical transmission devices 4,to 6.

It is also possible to supply circuit 3 with energy by means ofphotovoltaic devices, in particular one or more solar cells, or paperbatteries or piezoelectric elements in or on the banknote paper, whiche.g. induce electrical voltage when compressing that may be used tosupply energy. This may already be used to operate the circuit throughthe presence of natural light or artificial light, as the case may be,such that further and potentially expensive apparatuses for supplyingenergy may be eliminated.

EXAMPLE 02

According to a further embodiment, a small, thin chip having an edge,length of approx. 0.3 millimeters and a thickness of less than 80microns, particularly less than 20 microns, may be arranged on asecurity thread. Such security thread is, at least partially, completelyembedded in the security paper. FIG. 3 shows an embodiment of a banknotewherein the security thread 50 is more or less woven into the securitypaper and comes directly to the surface of banknote 1 in certain areascalled “windows” 5 1. The parts of the security thread that arecompletely surrounded by security paper are shown by dashed lines inFIG. 3. Here, security thread 50 may have an electroconductive coatingthat is designed as a dipole and serves in the chip's transmission ofenergy and/or data. As a security thread of this kind is practicallyimpossible to separate from the security paper without destroying same,the chip is well protected from abusive removal in this embodiment.

A further protective effect may be achieved via the information that isstored in the chip. It is therefore advantageous to store a so-called“unique feature” of the particular banknote in the chip's memory area asan identification criterion. In this context, the information isindividual and characteristic of the particular banknote. For example,it may constitute the serial number or a parameter derived from same, orit may also constitute the x, y coordinate of the chip in the banknote.As the thread is never embedded at the same place relative to thebanknote, the x, y coordinate is a good assignment criterion.Measurement is effected on the finished banknote by means of threadgeometry and is stored on the chip in one of the final processing steps.The relation between the chip and the banknote may be structured evenmore clearly by storing further data such as the serial number in thechip in addition to the x, y coordinate.

Additional protection against manipulation or removal of the thread, asthe case may be, is provided by measurement and storage of the chip'sresonance frequency. Namely, should someone succeed in fully pulling thethread out of the paper, this would lead to a stretching of the threadin any case and thus to an alteration of the resonance frequency.

EXAMPLE 03

The chip or the electrical circuit, as the case may be, may also betransferred onto banknote 1 or the security paper, as the case may be,with the help of the transfer method. This type of embodiment is shownin FIG. 4. Here, the transfer element is in the shape of a strip 53 thatruns parallel to the short edge of the banknote 1. In top view, onerecognizes a metallic surface with recesses 54 in the shape of marks inthe example shown. The integrated circuit is contained in the layerstructure of this transfer element 53. Special embodiments relating tothe foregoing are described in WO 02/02350, to which express referenceis hereby made.

Here, transfer element 53 must be anchored so well on banknote 1 thatsecurity element 53 cannot be torn off across the whole surface. Thismay, for example, be achieved by having transfer element 53 so thin thatmechanical stability is not sufficient to tear it off completely.Further, it must be ensured that penetration of the adhesive into thepaper and durability of the adhesive are so good that no mechanicaland/or chemical removal is possible. Cross-linking adhesive systems maybe used for this purpose, for example. The background may be smoothed byapplying a primer to the paper in the area of transfer element 53. Inthis case, the adhesive to be used for the transfer of transfer element53 may be selected such that it reacts with the primer, so that chemicalprotection is effected by the cross-linking.

Additionally, the transfer element may be partially provided withintaglio printing, which results in strong local anchoring anddeformation of transfer element 53. If an attempt is made to removetransfer element 53 mechanically, rated breakage will result in the areaof the intaglio printing.

As also shown in the prior example, additional protection may beeffected via measurement of the resonance frequency and storage of samein the chip. A resetting by punching out and contacting to a counterfeitcoupling surface may thus be demonstrated.

Attention is drawn to the fact that transfer elements may refer to bothelements such as transfer element 53 according to FIG. 4 described inthe above, which serves as a security foil that is permanently affixedto the banknote paper in production, and other elements such as carrierfoils 78 according to FIG. 14 that are described in more detail in thefollowing and which are pulled off of the banknote paper after thecircuits have been connected with the paper.

EXAMPLE 04

FIG. 5 shows a schematic representation of another possibility forincorporating a chip into a document.

In this example, the chip is transferred onto the banknote during theprinting operation. This may occur both in the prepress stage, i.e. whenthe paper sheets are on the way to the press cylinder, during theprinting operation or also when the printing sheets are beingtransported away after the printing operation. The basic idea of thisprocedure is to provide all of the individual copies of a printing sheetwith the chips either one after the other or in a complete step. Diverseembodiments that may be used in both sheet feed printing and continuousprinting are described in the following.

FIG. 5 shows an intaglio printing plate 84 with the usual depressions 85that the printing ink is filled into in exemplary fashion. One or moreof these depressions 85 is formed such that chips 87 may be incorporatedinto the depression. In the example shown, one of the depressions has anopening 86, through which a chip may be supplied by means of compressedair from the back of the printing plate. This may be effected before orafter the depressions 85 are filled with printing ink. Preferentially,the chips are incorporated after the depressions have been filled withprinting ink so that the chip comes to lie in the volume of the printingink and is protected by it. The document material, preferentially paper,is pressed into the depressions 85 during the printing operation and theink is transferred onto the document as a raised application of ink.

The printed document 88 is shown in FIG. 6. Chip 87 may be recognized inink application 89, which is completely surrounded by printing ink 89.

The portrayal in FIG. 5 is only intended to illustrate the basicprinciple. Additional measures such as the closure of opening 86 duringthe printing operation, the provision of measures ensuring thatprecisely one chip is separated in the ink cell of the printing plateeach time, cleansing of the printing plate, including the area where thechips are fed, etc. are needed when it is translated into practice. Asall of the copies of a printing sheet are to be equipped with chipsduring the printing process, the feed device is preferentially providedin multiple form, i.e. at least once per individual copy. Chip elements87 are preferentially provided as transponder chips, i.e. they areequipped with an antenna and all of the functional elements and arefully operable on their own with no additional measures. Prior arttransponder chips, for example, already exhibit an edge length of just0.3 millimeters at a thickness of approx. 50 microns.

When the transponders are transferred onto the banknote during theprinting operation as described, this process step may be incorporatedinto the production process very well and, in addition, the chip isoptimally camouflaged in the ink and well protected from chemicalinfluences.

EXAMPLE 05

With the procedure cited, the possibility to readily arrange the chipsin different locations per individual copy in the printing sheetpresents itself. If a printing sheet has e.g. 54 individual copies, oneobtains a variational potential of 54 different sites for embedding. Anadditional variational potential results from each additional printingline or additional printing works, as the case may be.

This proves to be especially advantageous for currencies that are issuedin high piece counts and that are produced on a large number of printinglines and, potentially, at several printing works. For these currencies,the positions where chips 87 are incorporated may be varied so greatlythat the likelihood of finding chips 87 arranged directly above oneother in a packet of used banknotes is relatively small. Sincereciprocal interference of the chips is extremely reduced, banknotepackets of this type are distinctly easier to check with respect toindividual banknotes 1.

EXAMPLE 06

Should the unit price of transponder chips 87 permit, one may alsoconsider embedding more than one chip 87 in a banknote. Then, theparticular positions of these chips with reference to one another mayalso be varied by means of printing plate arrangement, thereby making itpossible to switch to the other chips in case two chips should come tolie directly on top of one another or too close to one another. Thatmeans that the chips that have the least interference or are arrangedmost favorably, as the case may be, may always be addressed.

EXAMPLE 07

The printing sheets or the particular individual copies of the printingsheets, as the case may be, may now be equipped with chips 87 in highlydiverse ways.

As described with regard to FIG. 5, one idea consists of incorporatingthe chips into the printing plate through boreholes. However, thisprocedure is not just limited to flat printing plates. For example, whenusing rotary printing, the boreholes may also originate from theinterior space of the cylinder, e.g. of the press cylinder, so that thechips may be transferred from the inside of the cylinder to thecorresponding depressions.

EXAMPLE 08

Furthermore, it is possible to deviate from the procedure alreadydescribed and already send the individual printing sheets through aninsertion apparatus consisting e.g. of two cylinders that already helpto affix the chips on the unprinted sheets prior to the actual printingprocess. FIG. 7 shows an associated rotary printing apparatus 440 fromprepress stage 441 and printing stage 442 in exemplary fashion.Insertion cylinders 443 preferentially have the same diameter as presscylinder 444 and counter-pressure cylinder 445. Insertion cylinders 443have the task of separating chips 3, transferring them to printingsheets 446 and affixing them there by means of an adhesive or the like.Subsequently, printing sheets 446 are transported into the actualprinting station 442 and provided with the printed image 447,preferentially with steel gravure printing.

In prepress stage 441, chips 3 are to be arranged on the printing sheets446 such that they may be subsequently superimposed with elements of theprinted image 447. In this context, the details of the printed image areto be rendered large enough to ensure that chips 3 are reliably coveredwith printing ink and that they are not damaged either. The tolerancesoccurring during printing are to be taken into account for thesemeasures.

Separation of chips 3 on cylinders 443 of prepress stage 441 and fromthese onto printed sheets 446 may either be effected through boreholesin at least one of cylinders 443 from the inside of the cylinder, or itmay also be effected by additional elements that are used to apply chips3 to the surface of the cylinder first and then transmit them toprinting sheets 446 while printing sheet 446 is moved through rotatingcylinders 443. The application may also be effected by means of e.g. atransfer strip with applied chips that is pressed on the surface of thecylinder for transfer of the chips.

EXAMPLE 09

Another possibility results if the press cylinders are supplied withchips from the outside via the insertion cylinder rather than throughdrilled holes in the press plates from the inside of the press cylinder.In this case, insertion cylinder 443 is arranged at the circumference ofpress cylinder 444, i.e. in printing step 442 according to FIG. 7,similar to the counter-pressure cylinder or the inking cylinder. Ittransfers the chips to the areas of the individual copies that are to beequipped with the chips before or after the printing plate has beeninked.

The final embodiment cited makes use of several advantages of the twomethods described previously. Accordingly, the chips are transferredduring the printing operation, thereby achieving very effectiveintegration in the production process of the banknotes. With thismethod, the chips are also positioned in the ink-containing depressionsof the printing plate, preferentially in the vicinity of the surface, sothat the chips are arranged in the area of the paper surface, i.e.encased in ink and well protected, following transfer to the printingsheet. As singling of the chips from the inside of the press cylindermay be quite problematic from a technical standpoint, transfer via theinsertion cylinder from the outside onto the press plate is a goodalternative.

EXAMPLE 10

For communication with the chips arranged in the document, it isnecessary to connect them to suitable contact surfaces. This normallytakes place by wirebonding, i.e. the connection is produced via thinwires, preferentially made of gold, or through flip-chip technology,with the contact surfaces of the chip being applied to the externalcontact surfaces in the opposite fashion and connected by means of, forexample, conductive adhesive or isoplanar contacting, so-called “wedgebonding”. The so-called “fluid self assembly” process, e.g. as describedin U.S. Pat. No. 6,417,025 or WO 01/33621, where chips are “swept into”small depressions of a foil with the contacts facing upwards, offers analternative technology. Contacting is subsequently effected on the upperside of the chip by means of lithographic methods. Within the scope ofthe invention, this technology may be used very advantageously for theproduction of security threads or transfer elements, as the case may be,for banknotes. However, any other desired foil elements may be equippedwith a chip in this way as well.

The method according to the invention is explained using the example ofthe production of a security thread with a chip in the following. First,a carrier foil in endless form is provided with depressions havingroughly the same size as the chip to be embedded. A carrier foil 60 isshown schematically in FIG. 8. Here, carrier foil 60 is provided withtrapezoidal depressions 61 that are produced by embossing, for example.In this context, depressions 61 are distributed throughout the endlessfoil such that the desired number of chips is contained in the securityelement when the foil 60 is divided into individual security elementslater on.

In the next step, the foil 60 thus prepared is flooded with a liquidcontaining the chips 62. In this context, the chips 62 are swept intothe depressions 61 and self-orient in this way. FIG. 9 shows foil 60after the chips 62 have been swept in. The chip exhibits contactsurfaces 63 that still need to be contacted with the correspondingconductive paths on foil 60 by means of lithographic methods now.However, isoplanar contacting, so-called “wedge bonding”, or contactingvia ink jet methods is also feasible.

EXAMPLE 11

Instead of the contacting methods normally used for the chip 62incorporated the way explained above—namely bonding, i.e.soldering/welding of contact wires, and contacting by lithographicmethods, another technology can also be used that is likewise based onthe principle of self alignment. The method avoids the relatively highdemands on exact positioning or the high printing precision, as they areneeded in the other methods, since the chips 62 to be used can have edgelengths of down to 1/10 mm. Beyond that, more or less continuousprocessing of the banknotes that are to be contacted is made possible.

For this purpose, foil 60 is provided not only with depressions 61 forchips 62, but additionally with depressions 65 that are indicated bydashed lines in FIG. 10. After that, as already explained, chips 62 arewashed in first, and then contact surfaces 64. These contact surfaces 64preferentially consist of thin metal foils. They guide the small contactsurfaces 63 on washed-in chips 62 further outward and act as distinctlylarger contact surfaces, the contacting by means of lithographic methodsof which does not pose any problems. An especially expedient embodimentof contact surfaces 64 is shown in FIG. 11. They have a relatively thincontact wire 64A, which has a contacting surface 64 b on one end, thesurface of which is larger compared to contact surfaces 63.Large-surface contacting surface 64 b permits low contact resistance tothe conductive paths applied by printing, in spite of the relativelypoorer conductivity of the conductive printing inks used.

In this context, production of the additional depressions does not leadto increased efforts for positioning, since the same tool can be usedfor the simultaneous production of both the depressions for chips 62 andthe depressions for the contact surfaces. To ensure reliable contactingof chips 62 with the contact surfaces 64, contact surfaces 64 can bewelded to chip 62 at its contact surfaces 63 with the aid of a laser, oradhesives that become conductive in the direction of the compressiononly after having been compressed can be used.

During preparation of contact surfaces 64, care must be taken that theyare formed in such a way that they can, on the one hand, be washed in atevery necessary location, but that, on the other hand, no faultycontacting can occur that is caused by contact surfaces 64 washed inwrong orientation. In FIG. 11, possible wrong positions of contactsurfaces are indicated by contours 64*.

It is expressly noted that this method is not only restricted to theproduction of foil elements with chips for banknotes, or, as the casemay be, to the banknotes having chips themselves, but rather that it canbe used with any other desired process wherein chips that are fixed to asubstrate must be contacted. This method especially lends itself to allelectronic components incorporated into a carrier material by means ofself alignment.

EXAMPLE 12

As an alternative to or in addition to the method of self alignment bywashing in chips and/or contact surfaces, a self alignment method basedon vibration can also be used. This means e.g. that foil 60 and/or astorage reservoir of chips 62 and/or contact surfaces 64, where foil 60is moved past, are vibrated in order to facilitate incorporation intothe depressions 61 or 65. This method can also be executed withoutliquid-based washing in.

EXAMPLE 13

In accordance with another variation, before the chips are washed in, acarrier foil used as a transmission element is already provided with ametallization upon which the chips are subsequently applied in apositioned fashion. This method will be explained in more detail withreference to FIG. 12A to 12 d.

In FIG. 12A, foil 60 with depressions 61 is shown, where a printing ink66 that is removable by washing has been printed register-containinginto depressions 61. Subsequently the entire foil is metallizedpreferentially by means of the vacuum vapor deposition method. FIG. 12 bshows the foil 60 metallized over its entire surface, with metal layer67 covering both foil 60 and the soluble printing ink 66. Subsequently,the foil is treated for printing ink 66 with a solvent, preferentiallywater. Thereby, printing ink 66 is dissolved and removed together withthe metal layer 67 lying on top of it. In this fashion, a recess 68 iscreated in metal layer 67, as shown in FIG. 12 c. Subsequently, thechips 62 are washed in. In this case, the chips must be designed suchthat contact surfaces 63 are disposed on the surface of chip 62 thatfaces metallization 67. Here, the connection between metal layer 67 andthe contact surfaces of chip 62 is effected, for example, by means ofanisotropically conductive adhesives or so called ACF foils.

Here, the dimensioning of printing ink 66 must be selected in such a waythat no short circuits between the metallized areas are possible. At thesame time, the overlapping surface with the contacts of the chip must besufficiently large.

Apart from the recesses 68 shown in FIG. 12d, further demetallized areasin metal layer 67 can be produced in the same way. These demetallizedand therefore transparent areas can, for example, serve as planes ofsections and separation of the metallization of the individual threadsduring further processing. Recesses in the form of signs or any otherpattern that serve as an additional visual authenticity feature inconnection with the subsequent security element can likewise be producedin this way. Furthermore, metal layer 67 can be structured such that itserves as an antenna for the contactless transmission of data. Likewise,it is possible to connect the ends of metal layer 67 to an antennastructure already existing elsewhere.

A special embossing die, with which both the depression 61 and theprinting ink 66 are transmitted in one processing step, can be used forthe production of depressions 61 and application of soluble printing ink66. Such an embossing die 70 is shown schematically in FIG. 13. Thisembossing die 70 has a prominence 71 in the form of depression 61. Inthe plateau area of this prominence 71, a depression 72 is provided,into which printing ink 66 for the printing and embossing process isbrought in. In the example shown, embossing die 70 is shown in the formof an embossing plate. The embossing die can of course also be designedin the form of a cylinder with several embossing dies designed in thatway, in order to ensure continuous embossing and printing of foil 60.

This embodiment has the advantage that the printing ink can be disposedin the area of depression 61 in a positioned fashion without mucheffort.

EXAMPLE 14

Regardless of whether using the method described above or any othermethods for applying the chip, contacting of the small chips usedaccording to the invention poses a considerable problem. One solution tothis problem according to the invention is based on the finding thatdifferent metals or also oxidic surfaces have different affinities forprinting inks. Therefore, contacting occurs by means of fluid,electrically conductive printing inks that wet the contact surfaces, butdo not wet noncontacting surfaces and withdraw from them. I.e. if thecontacts of the chip, for example, are made from copper, while theremaining surface of the chip, for example, consists of silicon dioxideor aluminum, a suitable printing ink will only wet the copper surfaces,while it does not wet the silicon oxide or the aluminum and willtherefore withdraw from this portion of the surface. Numerous possiblematerials and corresponding printing inks are known from the field ofoffset-printing, which can also be used with great benefit in thesolution according to the invention.

Thus, it is achieved that during printing of the conductive paths, thereis no need to take account of the register accuracy of the printing withthe interruption between the contacts. One can simply print onecontinuous trace over both contacts. As long as the printing ink isstill liquid, it will withdraw from the interruption between theprinting inks and produce two paths not connected with each other.

This method therefore allows for the contacting of chips without beinghindered by the low tolerance for the contacting of the contactsurfaces. The necessary register accuracy thus corresponds only toroughly the size of the circuit and therefore only has to be in theorder of magnitude of 150 μm or larger.

This method can also be applied to chips that have already been fixed ona carrier material. It can, however, also be applied to a semifinishedproduct, the components of which are subsequently transferred to abanknote by a processing step. In this case, by suitable design of thecontacts and corresponding selection of the foils and their surfacequality, one can even achieve that the printed contacts or, as the casemay be, conductive paths are transferred together with the circuits.

EXAMPLE 15

In FIG. 14 an embodiment of a document of value according to theinvention is shown, wherein the rough surface of the document of valueor security paper is smoothed by additional measures. In the exampleshown, the circuit element 77 is prepared on a separate carrier foil 78.For this purpose, a network of organic conductive material 79, thatrepresents the source and drain electrodes of field effect transistors,is printed onto carrier foil 78 that can have a thickness of 23 μm forexample and consists of PET for example. Electrodes 79 are printed on insuch a way that they are spaced 20 μm apart. The electrodes can beexecuted in the form of an interlocked comb-like structure for example.In a second printing operation, a layer of a semiconductive organicmaterial is applied over electrodes 79. It extends over both theelectrodes and the intermediate areas as well. An extremely thincontinuous insulator layer 81 is applied onto this layer. It has athickness of 100 nanometers for example and is advantageously producedby means of a curtain coater or by any other suitable method. Finally, anetwork of gate electrodes 82 which is also produced by printing anorganic conductive substance is produced on top of insulator layer 81.

This final layer can also be manufactured by vapor deposition ofconductive metal layers (e.g. aluminum, copper or similar); the layercan then be structured by means of etching, washing methods or otherlithographic methods. The carrier foil 78 thus prepared has a series offield effect transistors that can further be connected to each other bymeans of suitable conductive paths. Finally, an adhesive layer 83 isapplied onto this layer. Here, the adhesive can be comprised of ionomerePE dispersions which should have about 15 grams per square meter intheir dry state.

In the area of the circuit element 77 to be applied, security paper 75has a primer coating 76, the extension of which is larger than thecircuit element 77 to be transferred. Carrier foil 78 with circuitelement layer structure 77 is laid upon this primer coating 76 overadhesive layer 83. Adhesive 83 binds with primer layer 76 by the actionof heat. Subsequently, carrier foil 78 is stripped off, as also shown inFIG. 14. The circuit is now fully operable on the paper.

When designing the printing cycles, one must consider which side theelectrodes should be contacted from. In the method shown, the source anddrain are always free on the surface, while the gate electrode liesbeneath the circuit. If contacting should be performed from the surface,the semiconductive and insulating layers must be interrupted at thelocations of the gate electrode in order to permit contacting.

In the case that the circuit element is prepared on the smooth surfaceof carrier foil 78, it is potentially possible to dispense with primerlayer 76 as well, since adhesive layer 83 sufficiently compensates forthe surface roughness of the document of value or security paper 75.

According to another embodiment, carrier foil 78 can additionally beprovided with a separation layer to permit good separation of circuitelement 77 from carrier layer 78. This can be comprised of a polyvinylacetate layer having a thickness of approx. 5 μm for example.

Alternatively it is also possible to produce electrodes 79 with the aidof metal layers that can be structured with any suitable methods. Thiscan comprise etching methods, laser ablation methods, washing methods orsimilar. For example, a printing ink or a brushing paint normally usedin paper finishing can be used as primer coating. Inks with high solidscontent that lead to good filling of the paper pores are suitable. Forexample, cross-linkable acryl dispersions can be used. After coating,security paper 75 is brought to a roughness of less than 150milliliter/min (according to the Bendtsen measuring method) on theprimer side by means of calendering.

According to another embodiment, carrier foil 78 can also be embossed ina first step by means of a suitable embossing die, in order to achieve asequence of depressions. An embossing die as shown in FIG. 13 can beused for that purpose. Chips with the desired structure are theninserted into these depressions. Subsequently, element layer structure77 already shown in FIG. 14 is applied onto thus prepared carrier foil78. Here, the microchips are contacted and connected to the printedcircuit.

EXAMPLE 16

In FIG. 15, a security element 90 is shown that consists of a pluralityof cooperating electrical components. It has a chip 94 that is connectedto a diode 93 via a conductive path 95. This in turn is connected withan antenna 92. A high-frequency alternating electric field, which isconverted into DC voltage for the energy supply of the chip 94 by meansof the diode 93, is fed in via antenna 92. Here, diode 93 can beproduced by printing by using a combination of organic semiconductivecompounds. In addition, it preferentially has a surface area of approx.1 to 15 square centimeters, such as 3 centimeters×4 centimeters.Further, a thin-film diode based on α-Si or p-Si is conceivable.

A security element 90 of this kind can either be transferred onto thedocument to be secured via the transfer method or embedded as a foilelement between two further document layer materials, for example paperlayers.

Such a security element has the advantage that it covers a large part ofthe surface of the document of value and thus cannot be removed withoutdestroying the entire document.

According to an alternative embodiment, chip 94 can consist of aplurality of components. In the simplest case, electrical circuit 94consists of a chip that comprises only a working memory and a CPU, whilethe second component comprises the ROM memory. The individual componentsare of course connected with each other via printed conductive paths.This variation has the advantage that standard components can be puttogether according to the particular application without having todevelop a new chip.

EXAMPLE 17

Instead of chip 94 shown in FIG. 15, an oscillating circuit consistinge.g. of a large surface transistor, a resistance and a capacitance canalso be imprinted.

Since the entire security element is produced by printing technology inthis case, it can of course also be produced directly on the document.

EXAMPLE 18

According to another alternative embodiment, foil 91 shown in FIG. 15can be a pigmented white foil upon which only a memory is printed bymeans of semiconductive organic polymers. An information is now appliedin customary fashion on top of this memory, possibly after an opaquewhite or colored intermediate layer. This information can be a portrait,any printed image, logos, signs or for example individualizingnumbering.

If one tries to alter these data by mechanical or chemical means, theeffect of falsifying means will not only change the written content butwill also destroy the function of the circuit hidden below.

EXAMPLE 19

According to another variation, a circuit is used that receives theenergy for the production of the supply voltage for the system and/orinformation fed in from a transmission device and/or deliversinformation to the transmission device. For each of these transmissions,the couplings described above can be used, such as coupling byelectrical, magnetic, electromagnetic fields or coupling by deformationor, as the case may be, sound. This circuit is executed over a largesurface and preferentially consists of organic materials that are e.g.printed on or embedded in the banknote material. The voltage and/orinformation produced by this circuit can be led directly onto a chip andcan be used for the operation of same. The chip itself preferentiallydoes not have any device to produce the supply voltage and/or for directcommunication with the transmission device. If the large-surface circuitis damaged by deceitful manipulation, the entire circuit is damaged, tothe effect that no supply voltage or information can be fed into theconventional chip or, as the case may be, removed from same, so that thechip is thus no longer able to function.

EXAMPLE 20

The electrical circuit shown in FIG. 15 can be designed in such a waythat it outputs a signal in response to an external frequency, whichsignal represents individualizing information of the document. Theindividualizing information can be recorded in a file on a host computertogether with any other data. In this way, when the document is checked,it is possible to fetch not only the individualizing information storedon the document but rather also the information stored in the file ofthe host computer.

EXAMPLE 21

Another embodiment of the document according to the invention is shownin FIGS. 16 and 17. In FIG. 16, a banknote 96 that carries astrip-shaped, optically variable element 97 is shown in a top view. InFIG. 17, this document is shown in cross-section along the line A-A.Here, it becomes clear that a printed electronic circuit 98 is disposedunder the optically variable element 97.

Optically variable element 97 can be any optically variable element,such as an imprint, a transmission element or also a label.Preferentially, an optical diffraction structure is used. In this case,the optically variable element 97 does not comprise only a single layer,but rather has several layers.

In an attempt to remove the optically variable element, for example, inorder to reuse it in a deceitful manner, printed circuit 98 is alsodamaged. Since same is used for machine recognition of authenticity,there is a direct connection between optical recognition and machinerecognition of authenticity. Thus it is no longer possible to useoptically variable element 97 to pretend authenticity, whereas theremaining document without the optically variable element could stillpass the automatic authenticity check in a machine. It goes withoutsaying that this effect can be further reinforced by interrupting theprinted circuit at some locations, which are then connected by parts ofthe metallized hologram. Even if the circuit is not damaged duringremoval of the hologram, the connection between its parts would,however, be damaged.

EXAMPLE 22

A circuit, which outputs a key (signature, serial number or similar) inresponse to an external field, is printed onto the banknote on 90% ofits surface. However, the circuit is executed such that it consists ofseveral parts that are connected by thin conductive connections. If suchbanknote/document is led through a machine suited for checking, itchecks the number emitted by the document. Its agreement with a setpointdecides on the admission of the owner. At the same time, however, one ormore of the weak conductive connections are destroyed, e.g. by punchingor by an electric shock of sufficient power. With that, the banknote iscanceled.

It is also possible to store the state of a banknote by providing aplurality of connections to be canceled, which, together with fixedconnections (which represent the key), form a partially writeablecircuit. This circuit can receive different status values by theconnections that can be canceled being changed. This e.g. is alsoadvantageous for tickets that are valid for an event that lasts severaldays and that can be successively invalidated on a day-by-day basis.

EXAMPLE 23

An additional embodiment that is expedient in the production of such abanknote consists in manufacturing and checking the chip and thebanknote paper independently of one another and only combining them withone another in a later production step.

Thus, the chip or, as the case may be, the chips is/are mounted e.g. ona transfer foil and/or security film of the banknote and can thusalready be tested for their functionality before the chips arepermanently mounted on the banknote paper, e.g. with the security film.The paper will also have been produced and tested already beforeconnection with the chip. Thus, the print on the banknote willpreferentially be applied to the paper before the chips are applied. Ifthe transmitting and/or receiving antennas for the optical and/orinductive and/or capacitive coupling of the chip are also applied to thebanknote paper itself, this step can also be executed e.g. beforeapplication of the chip. This modular manufacturing method makes itpossible not to have to discard the banknote paper e.g. when a chip isdefective. This reduces scrap.

EXAMPLE 24

It is also possible to apply the chip with suitable electrodes of largersurfaces on a transfer foil, to test the chip there if necessary andsubsequently, to connect it conductively on suitably prepared areas ofthe banknote. This can e.g. occur by means of a conductive adhesive thathas been applied to corresponding locations of the banknote or thetransfer foil beforehand. The conductive connection is also [made]possible by exerting pressure during subsequent printing processes.

EXAMPLE 25

According to another idea of the present invention provision can bemade, in particular in the case of an inductive coupling, as will bedescribed in more detail in the following, to equip the paper intendedfor the production of banknotes 1 having a chip 3 with a magneticpermeability that is significantly greater than the relativepermeability of paper. In this way, inductance of the imprinted coil canbe significantly increased. For this purpose, soft magnetic materialsare preferentially admixed to the banknote paper. According to theinvention, this is preferentially effected by adding soft magneticpowder, so-called magnetic powder, to the fiber suspension used in paperproduction. In this context, the soft magnetic powder can consist of orcomprise ferrite powder, amorphous or nanocrystalline metal powder,carbonyl iron powder, or any other powdered magnetic material, whichshould have highly permeable properties.

Another possibility also consists in printing magnetic material onto thesurface of the banknote as magnetic ink.

Still another possibility consists in impregnating the cotton fibers ina solution that contains magnetic powder with an especially small grainsize, so that the soft magnetic material is taken up, i.e. soaked up, bythe cotton fibers themselves. Compared to imprinting, this variation hasthe advantage that a larger share of volume of the magnetic material inthe banknote stack can be achieved. Furthermore, the magnetic material,which is normally dark, is advantageously less visible through thedifferently colored or lighter colored envelope.

The magnetic material is preferentially applied to the banknote paper orincorporated in same homogenously and/or over a large surface, inparticular over the whole surface. Since, in this case, the incorporatedmagnetic material does not necessarily serve as a separate securityelement, but only serves to achieve improved inductive coupling, e.g. adifferent denomination-specific application is not necessary either.

EXAMPLE 26

If the banknote with a chip is to be coupled to the energy supply and/orif the banknote with a chip is to communicate with the reading devicevia an inductive coupling to an alternating magnetic field, it can beexpedient to provide the banknote with a coil having an iron core. As aresult, the necessary number of coil turns on the banknote having a chipcan be reduced on the one hand and the currents on the exciter side ofthe transformer for the energy supply are not as high on the other hand,since the relative permeability μr and thus the flux in the magneticfield increases.

Possibilities shall now be described for altering the magneticproperties of plastic foils or paper in general and those of banknotepaper in particular in such a way that they exhibit behavior similar tothat of an iron core.

A fundamental problem in the use of iron cores for coils applied topaper that generate or, as the case may be, receive a flow perpendicularto the paper plane consists in the fact that the thickness of the paperis normally small in relation to the coil area.

In actual practice, an iron core used in this way will tend to reducethe flow flowing through the coil rather than increase it, since itcorresponds to a lying dipole that can easily be magnetized in itslongitudinal direction, but is relatively hard to magnetize in adirection perpendicular to the paper plane.

One embodiment of the magnetic banknote paper can be achieved byincorporating unordered braids of ferromagnetic materials with longfibers into the paper. In this unordered braid, a large number of fiberswill always connect the upper side and the lower side of the banknotepaper with one another and thereby achieve a magnetic “short circuit”,i.e. increase the permeability μr to the desired extent. Here, fiberslying crosswise in the plane of the banknote paper do not block themagnetic flow.

Accordingly, an especially favorable embodiment of the magnetic banknotepaper according to the invention is achieved if the material used as aniron core exhibits magnetic behavior that is dependent on direction. Apaper designed in that way can also be used as an independentauthenticity feature, besides its expedient use in connection withbanknotes having a chip.

An associated checking device can e.g. let two magnetic fields that areperpendicular to one other act successively on the paper and measure themagnetic flow flowing through the paper in these two situations.

Whereas, for an application of that kind, it appears expedient to placethe preferred direction, in which the material can be magnetized morereadily, in the paper plane, in the case of application as an iron corefor coils mounted on the paper plane, it is also expedient to disposethe preferred direction perpendicular to the coil plane. In thefollowing, the preferred direction is assumed to be perpendicular to thecoil plane, if not explicitly stated otherwise.

A magnetic paper with directional magnetic behavior can e.g. be producedby embedding ferromagnetic fibers into the paper. If the preferreddirection is to lie in the paper plane, the incorporation can beachieved well conventionally by e.g. coating the individual fibers withnonmagnetic materials and then applying them to the screen in paperproduction.

If, however, the preferred direction is to lie perpendicular to thepaper plane, it is preferential to incorporate ferromagnetic fibershaving a length lying in the order of magnitude of the paper thickness,the diameter of which, however, is significantly less. Individual fibersare then formed, which can readily be magnetized in the directionperpendicular to the paper plane, but which are relatively hard tomagnetize in a direction lying in the paper plane.

EXAMPLE 27

The incorporation of such fibers in an ordered manner is not conceivablein the conventional manner, since the individual fibers are very thin,to the effect that they are very hard to handle, although, on the otherhand, their numbers are extremely high.

One possibility for incorporating the fibers consists in performing amachining metal-processing process over the screen in the paperproduction that produces suitably short shavings that are slung in adefined direction at a very high speed. The removal of iron by means ofa grinding tool would be an example. If these shavings are additionallyshot onto the paper pulp at suitable locations by means of suitabletemplates, this results in the possibility of incorporating the specialmagnetic properties into the paper at the selected locations only.

Another possibility for producing paper with the desired magneticproperties consists in producing a suitable semifinished productbeforehand, which is then either applied to the screen during paperproduction or is applied to same or inserted into a hole or into adepression in the banknote only after production of the banknote.

EXAMPLE 28

In order to impede forgery, it is especially expedient to apply aso-called patch to the banknote on one or both sides, which protects thedesired semifinished product for one and bears additional securityfeatures, such as, for example, a hologram, for the other.

In connection with the banknote having a chip, this patch can, at thesame time, be used to protect the coil, the antenna and the chip appliedto the banknote against aggressive environmental influences.

FIG. 18 shows in cross-section a banknote 1 having a magnetic core 431made of ferromagnetic material 436 that has been inserted into a hole429 of the banknote paper web 430 and is protectedly placed between twopatches 432, 433 together with a coil 434. As shown in FIG. 18, it canbe advantageous to design the core as thick as the combined thickness ofthe banknote paper and the applied coil 434. When several of suchbanknotes are stacked, core 431 effects a significant increase in themagnetic flux through the individual banknotes.

The semifinished product described above, which can e.g. comprise core431 and optionally coil 434 and patch 432, can now be produced indifferent ways.

One possibility, for example, consists in joining longer ferromagneticfibers in the form of a rope and filling this up and holding it togetherwith a material having properties similar to that of paper pulp, i.e.,in particular, it is permeable to water. This rope is then cut, e.g.with a laser, into slices that are somewhat thinner than the banknote.

An alternative possibility for the production of such slices consists inthe use of several layers of ferromagnetic braids, which are welded oneon top of the other in a first processing step and cut into slices inthe desired manner in a second processing step.

These slices can now either be inserted-into holes 429 in banknote 1, asshown in FIG. 18, or already applied to the screen during paperproduction. Then, paper pulp will also accumulate on theindividual-slices, i.e. the slices are embedded in the paper and can nolonger be readily removed from same.

EXAMPLE 29

An especially advantageous possibility for the production of paper withthe above-described directional magnetic properties consists in usingthe method of self-organization. For this purpose, use is made of priorart knowledge that individual small ferromagnetic particles alignthemselves along the magnetic field lines when a sufficiently strongmagnetic field is set up. In the same way, the ferromagnetic shavingsincorporated into the paper pulp align themselves in a magnetic fieldacting on the paper pulp as long as the paper pulp is still sufficientlywet and the shavings are still mobile within the paper pulp. In thefinished dry state of the banknote paper, the shavings are no longermobile, so that the desired direction-dependent magnetic properties ofthe paper have been “learned”.

FIG. 19 shows a schematic representation of the expected locallystructured alignment of ferromagnetic particles 436 that appears when,by means of a magnet 435, a sufficiently strong magnetic field acts onpaper web 430 lying between same. Here it can be especially advantageousif the shavings 436 incorporated into the paper pulp already have arod-like form and can themselves readily act as magnetic dipoles. Then,a translatory movement of the shavings 436 does not have to occur in thepaper pulp in all cases, but rather, it is sufficient for the shavings436 present in paper 430 to rotate in the suitable direction.

The effect occurring here within paper 430 is comparable to thatoccurring when the Weiss domains reverse in ferromagnetic material: Themore shavings 436 have already aligned in a correct, i.e. energeticallyfavorable direction, the greater the magnetic forces acting on theremaining shavings, which force them to align as well, will become.

A particular advantage of the method described here for impressing thedesired magnetic properties consists in the fact that it is relativelysimple to perform this process locally, in which process the property isnot only simultaneously applied to the paper, but rather cansimultaneously be present in the entire paper layer at the desiredlocation. Thus, it is not possible to readily transfer this propertyfrom one piece of paper to another.

EXAMPLE 30

Two methods seem to be especially advantageous for application in theproduction of banknotes, application at the screen itself or after thepaper web has left the screen. Potentially, a combination of bothmethods can also lead to even better embossing.

In the application on paper web 430 that is still moist, strong magnets435, which provide for the magnetization and thus the orientation ofparticles 436, are mounted above and below paper web 430. Paper web 430thus only exhibits the desired magnetic properties at locations wheremagnets 435 are situated. Here, the use of solenoids is especiallyadvantageous, since they can be switched on and off in clocked cycles,thereby permitting zones to be created, which have the desired magneticproperties in an order of magnitude defined in the desired directions.

FIG. 20 shows an alternative arrangement, wherein a screen 437 is dippedinto a non-depicted container out of paper pulp with sprinkled-inferrite shavings 436. Magnets 435 are mounted on the inner face of thecylinder wall for the production of locally defined ferromagnetic areas436 in a paper web 430. For the purpose of simplicity, strong permanentmagnets 435 are preferentially used. Application on screen 437 isespecially advantageous for several reasons.

For one, the ferromagnetic particles 436 sprinkled into the paperpreferentially settle at the places in screen 437 where magnets 435 arelocated, and for the other, shavings 436 are aligned evenly with thedeposition. The frequent feeding of energy during paper production inthe form of stirring, blowing in of air or similar promotes theefficiency of the settling and aligning process, since it furtherincreases the mobility of the ferromagnetic shavings 436.

The paper with the directional magnetic properties produced in this waycan also be used to produce the semifinished product described abovethat is incorporated into the paper pulp or applied to the screen.

EXAMPLE 31

The method of self organization can also be used very advantageously forthe production of plastics, more specifically for foils with the desireddirection-dependent magnetic properties, wherein the plastic goesthrough the learning process while it is still in a liquid state and isthen stimulated to undergo polymerization while the magnetic field isstill set up. In the polymerized state, the ferromagnetic shavings areno longer mobile, and the desired property has been remembered.

EXAMPLE 32

A further idea for the present invention consists in the couplingfrequency for inductive and/or capacitive coupling of an antenna of thebanknote, which is coupled to the banknote chip having a value that isdifferent from the banknote chip's own transponder frequency. This isparticularly advantageous when each banknote has two different antennaswith different resonance behaviors, with one antenna being coupleddirectly with the chip and the other antenna serving as an externalcoupling and being able to interact with the chip antenna.

FIG. 21 shows an example of an associated banknote 1. In this example,chip 3 is on a security strip, such as a metallized foil strip 295 ofbanknote 1. Chip 3 is executed as a transponder chip and has a couplingelement 296, via which e.g. communication at the frequency of f1=2.45GHz can take place. Basically, the coupling element could also berealized externally, although the illustrated variant of a transponderwith “coil-on-chip” is used particularly preferentially, whereincoupling element 296 is mounted on or, as the case may be, in the chiphousing. The metallized foil strip 295 has a circuit unit 297, which isconnected with two further coupling elements 298, 299. The transponderchip 3 is disposed in coupling element 299 such that it can communicatewith circuit unit 297 via coupling elements 296/299. Furthermore,circuit unit 297 is in a position to communicate with an externalapparatus, such as a banknote checker at a frequency of f2=13.56 MHz,via coupling elements 298. The unit consisting of transponder chip 3,circuit unit 297 and foil strip 295 is now structured such thatcommunication is possible between a banknote checker (not shown) andchip 3 via coupling elements 298 and circuit unit 297 as well ascoupling elements 299 and 296 at the frequency of f2=13.45 MHz, whereaschip 3 communicates with circuit unit 297 at the frequency of f1=2.45GHz.

Transponder chip 3 with communication frequency f1 is supplied by thechip manufacturer. Foil strip 295 is configured by the system operatoror, as the case may be, by the banknote manufacturer. As couplingelement 298 defines the communication frequency between the banknote andthe checking device, fraudulent use of transponder chip 3 understandablywill not be successful, because the checking device does not respond toits frequency. Chips 3 that have been removed from valid banknotes orstolen on the way from the chip manufacturer to the banknotemanufacturer can thus not be utilized without elaborate additionalmeasures. If foil 295 is mounted on the banknote surface such thatremoval without damage is excluded, a valid foil cannot be transferredoperatively to other substrates.

Further functionalities that are not readily accessible to an outsider,but that can be mandatory for the check, are contained in circuit unit297, which e.g. can be produced in polymer semiconductor technology.Imitation of a foil element according to the invention or transfer ofsame to another substrate can thus largely be excluded.

Further improvement in forgery-proofness can be achieved if metallizedfoil 295, on which the coil turn, antenna elements, connecting lines,etc. are “exposed” by etching technology or other means, is additionallyequipped with diffractive structures or other feature materials that arenot available on the market, but which likewise permit uniqueidentification.

By providing two different communication frequencies f1 and f2, thefrequency predetermined by the chip manufacturer can thus be redefined.In principle, different frequencies can thus be allocated to differentcurrencies or different denominations of a currency, on the basis ofwhich, of course, automatic differentiation is also possible. If thegeometry of coupling element 298 is frequency-dependent, this means thatthe resonance frequency of the elements can be defined sharply only to alimited extent by simple, printing technology measures. Thus, adeviation within a certain bandwidth must be tolerated in these cases.

If, on the other hand, the resonance frequency as well is to be used asan authenticity criterion, it is possible to trim the geometry ofcoupling elements 298, which for example can be formed as antennadipoles, to such an extent that the security width is dimensionedextremely narrowly. Trimming procedures of that type are known and arecarried out by means of laser technology, for example.

As mentioned, the foil element shown in FIG. 21 offers the possibilityof addressing a transponder chip 3 that is set to frequency f1, viafrequency f2. In case communication by machine with a banknote viafrequency f2 is not possible for a banknote, different case scenariosare conceivable in principle, e.g.

-   -   the transponder chip is defective,    -   there is a defect in one of functional elements 297, 298, 299,    -   the chip or the foil element is completely missing.

In order to be able to further limit these possibilities for thechecking device, it is conceivable for a second check with a switch tofrequency f1 to be connected in series following an initial unsuccessfulcheck of the banknote using frequency f2. If the result of the check isnow positive, at least it has been proven that an authentic transponderchip is present. In case the security concept used links the transponderchip to the associated banknote through specific data stored in thechip, in which individual information provided on or in the banknote isstored in the chip (e.g. by additional storage of the serial numberprinted on same), the authenticity of the banknote can be established bymachine nevertheless in case of a positive check of this connection.

The first-described banknote check via frequency f2 is certainly thatused in more simple checking devices. In case this check produces noresult, the authenticity check is normally performed visually, byinspecting the authenticity features intended for the number check, suchas intaglio printing, guilloche printing, watermarks, windowed securitythreads, holograms, etc..

The second check via frequency f2 will certainly only take place in moreelaborate checking devices, wherein further authenticity features aswell are recorded or, as the case may be, checked by machine anyways.This is the case in every case in automatic banknote sorting or banknotedeposit apparatuses.

If, as a result of this second check, it becomes possible to query thetransponder and if, as a result of the assignment of the memory contentsto the banknote serial number (or other individual data), theauthenticity is confirmed, the banknote can be destroyed as authentic,but no longer fit for circulation, without manual access.

EXAMPLE 33

Provided that the banknote has different coupling frequencies, e.g. byseveral different antennae being present, as was described above,according to a further variant, these can also be checked by anassociated checking device, as described in even more detail by way ofexample in the following. Thus, for example, it may be that a checkingdevice addresses banknotes 1 on frequencies f1 and/or f2 for purposes ofreading and/or writing, in order to, for example, to check theauthenticity of the banknote. This can also be used if chip 3 itself ofa banknote 1 is directly coupled to two different antennas and if,consequently, the chip can be addressed directly on two differentfrequencies.

EXAMPLE 34

In the above-described banknotes 1 with several antennas, as depicted byway of example in FIG. 21, the following idea is also particularlyadvantageous. As was mentioned, antenna 296 of chip 3, referred to asinternal antenna 296 for short, and antenna 298 can also be coupledcontactlessly, such as capacitively and/or inductively, for externalcoupling, referred to a external antenna 298 for short. In this case inparticular, several external antennas 298 of that type can also bepresent on the banknote paper of each individual banknote 1 andpreferentially be disposed spaced-apart on the paper. This variant hasthe advantage, that even when part of the external antennas 298 of abanknote 1 fail, chip 3 can still be addressed from externally.

Moreover, in stacking measurements, as they are described in even moredetail in the following, the particular advantage results, that ifantennas of individual banknotes fail, functioning external antennas ofadjacent banknotes can take over the task of the antennas that havefailed, since communication with chip 3, i.e. with its internal antenna296, takes place contactlessly here. This is also advantageous, shouldonly one antenna be present on the banknote for contactless coupling tochip 3.

EXAMPLE 35

In the following, an example is described for a banknote, the chip ofwhich can be coupled contactlessly. As has already been mentioned, atransponder circuit of a banknote can have a transponder chip and acoupling coil, which acts as an antenna and via which the electricalenergy from the field of a reading device can be coupled into the chipof the banknote or, as the case may be, data can be transmittedbidirectionally or unidirectionally. The term contactless connection isunderstood to mean that the chip of the banknote can be coupledcontactlessly to the antenna of the banknote that is responsible forenergy and/or data transmission to an external (reading) device.

Now, it proves to be very advantageous, within the scope of the presentinvention, to use so called transponders with coil-on-chip, where e.g.galvanically deposited antenna coils are applied to the chip itself. Aparticularly preferred example of this has already been described indetail in connection with FIG. 21. The coil-on-chip coil willpreferentially communicate contactlessly with the coupling coil of thebanknote. This significantly reduces the requirements for registeraccuracy of the incorporation or, as the case may be, application of thecoupling coil on or, as the case may be, in the banknote. In addition,the production throughput can e.g. be significantly increased comparedto contact-type contactings, such as wire bonding, wedge bonding orflip-chip bonding.

FIG. 22 shows a further example of such a banknote 1. This [banknote]shows a coupling coil 410 that is disposed as dipole antenna 410, by wayof example, although, of course, other forms of antennas as well areconceivable. This dipole antenna 410 can withdraw electrical energy fromthe field of an external nondepicted reading device through inductivecoupling. Through this, voltage is produced in dipole antenna 410, whichin turn irradiates an electromagnetic field itself. As an example, afurther transmitter 411 can also be mounted on or, as the case may be,in dipole antenna 410, the energy supply of which is ensured by dipoleantenna 410. As already mentioned in another example above, transmitter411 can e.g. also irradiate at another frequency f2 in this case.However, this is not mandatory, since, for example, time scaling, whichpermits sequential radiation, can also be introduced.

Furthermore, on banknote 1 is located a chip 3, on which a furthercoupling antenna 412 is mounted, by way of example, in the form of coil412 as a coil-on-coil chip. This chip 3 then communicates advantageouslywith coupling antenna 410, which itself in turn then exchanges dataand/or energy with the external reading device. It hereby becomespossible to achieve that data transmission and the Chip 3's supplying ofvoltage do not take place by means of galvanic contacts.

EXAMPLE 36

As already mentioned, the electrical circuits need not necessarily havea rewritable memory. Provided that it is desired to provide an“anonymous” banknote, wherein no data can be stored, which providesinformation about the current or previous owners of the banknote, thebanknote's chip will not be made rewritable.

This occurs by providing possibilities in the chip that prevent datafrom being written into the memory area as of a point in time in thebanknote's life history.

A suitable point in time can be completion of the banknote at themanufacturer's. The time of issue at the state central banks' e.g. isequally conceivable.

To serve this purpose, it is important that no personal data of the enduser be able to be stored in the chip's memory during circulation of thebanknote.

Technically, this task can be solved in different ways, e.g. byproviding data lines in the chip, which can be interrupted deliberatelyat the selected time, so that, although the memory contents can still beread, it will no longer be possible to “write” into the memory cells(hardware inhibit). The same result can be achieved by placing aninhibit bit in the chip operating unit that prevents write access as ofthis point in time (software inhibit).

It is plausible, that a memory inhibited by a hardware inhibit orsoftware inhibit can be supplemented by another memory that can befurnished with data during circulation of the banknote.

It is important that such a memory can both be read and deleted oroverwritten by the end user. The memory areas associated with“transparent banknotes” can by definition only be used by authorizedpositions, i.e. these write/ read operations can not be used by the enduser. The write locks mentioned at the onset are provided to avoid theproblems resulting therefrom.

In case doubts arise that a banknote with a chip, wherein the officialmemory exhibits a write disable during circulation of the banknote, iseven expedient, these can be countered by pointing out that the datapertaining to the manufacturing process, i.e. the banknote's serialnumber as well as information on currency, denomination, date ofmanufacture, manufacturer, etc. are already very valuable for generalstatistical inquiries for the system operators, in particular thenational banks. Personal data going beyond that are not necessary forsystem support.

The “anonymity” of a banknote, though, can not just be disturbed by therecording of personal data. The possibility, as well, of being able todetermine the possession of such banknotes without the consent of theparticular holder of the banknote can already massively disturb the enduser's interests.

Imagine that the existence of a banknote can be detected at a greaterdistance via “direction-finding transmitters”. This would not only givepickpockets an excellent “working aid”.

Thus, if one wishes to also prevent bearings to be determined forbanknotes from a larger distance, one must make sure that the range ofthe transponder's transmitting unit is selected through skilledselection of the system parameters such that it is smaller than would benecessary for purposes of determining bearing.

In passive radio frequency transponders (RFID), which gain theirtransmitting energy from the energy received, the transponder'stransmitting power, and thus the transponder's range as well, can thusbe increased via an increase in the transmitting power of the checkingdevice. In order to not exceed the desired range of the transponderchip, measures can be provided in the transponder, through which thetransponder's transmitting power is deliberately limited.

It is also possible to alternatively or additionally adjust the range asdesired through skillful selection of the transmitting frequency(gigahertz range) or, also, through specific designing of the couplingelements. In this spirit, it can also be necessary to provide capacitivecoupling elements or other coupling elements, which only allowcommunication upon direct contact, instead of dipole antennas oroscillating circuit coils.

If a banknote with a chip must be such that its bearings can not bedetermined, a maximum range of a few cm, preferentially of a few mm, ofthe Chip's RFID transmitter appears expedient.

For certain applications, it can also be advantageous to providetransmission apparatuses, via which data and/or energy can be exchangedwith the circuit, with the transmission occurring by optical means.Through this, one can achieve, among others, the advantage that anadditional or alternative type of transmission is created besides thetransmission of data and energy that typically takes place viahigh-frequency fields. For example, the supply of energy can then beeffected via high-frequency fields, while the actual communication, i.e.the exchange of data or, as the case may be, information, with thecircuit, takes place by optical means.

Understandably, a communication performed by this means is extremelydependent on optimal boundary conditions. A determination of bearingsor, as the case may be, unintentional monitoring must be fully excludedin this context.

EXAMPLE 37

A further example for producing a banknote 1 with optical coupling isshown in FIG. 23. Such a banknote 1 can transmit data from its chip 3 toan external reading device via optical photodiodes 226 a, 227 a. In thiscontext, photodiodes 226 a, 227 a can have e.g. exhibit a transparentlight-conducting plastic, such as polycarbonate (PC) orpolymethylmethacrylate (PMMA), or consist of same. To improve couplingin and relaying of an optical signal produced by chip 3, according tothe invention, a product can be used that contains fluorescent dyes.Such materials are based e.g. on cumarin compounds or perylene compoundsand are known as LISA (light collecting) plastics and are described e.g.in DE 40 29 167 A1.

Within the meaning of the present invention, a dyed light-collecting andlight-conducting polycarbonate-based foil, for example, is a LISAplastic of the kind referred to. The foil contains fluorescent dyes,which convert the light falling in into light of a longer wavelength.Although attention is especially given to the preferred variant withfluorescent dyes, phosphorescent dyes are also conceivable as analternative. The major part of the light is reflected within the foil inaccordance with the laws of reflection (total reflection) and exitsagain only through the edges. That is why foils made of LISA distinguishthemselves by clearly visible lightness of edges.

FIG. 24 shows the functional principle of this kind of photodiode madeof LISA plastic. Photodiode 284, which is available in the form of aLISA foil 284 by way of example, has dye molecules 286 inside, which canbe present in all or just a part of its volume. Irradiation of lightfrom a light source 287 causes the dye molecules 286 to be stimulated toemit fluorescent radiation 288, a large share of which exits fromphotodiode 284 at lateral edge 289 after total reflection on thephotodiode wall 285. Total reflection always occurs at the transition ofLISA to air, when the sine of the angle of incidence is greater than thequotient 1/n, with n being the refractive index of the LISA plastic andnair being equal to 1.

The total reflection can be unfavorable when the surface of the lightconducting element is scratched or moistened with liquids. In the firstcase, part of the light present in LISA foil 284 will exit at manyscratched places, thereby reducing the efficiency of the radiation atthe desired edges of the foil.

Therefore, if necessary, it can be advantageous to produce LISA foil 284from several, particularly preferentially from at least three orprecisely three partial layers having different refractive indexes. Inthis context, materials with high refractive indexes are used inside,and these are covered on top and below by a foil having a low refractiveindex

Due to the different refractive indexes, part of the total reflectionalready occurs in the spacer between the two optical media inside thefoil. Only the share that is not reflected by the inner layer transitionreaches the outer layer transition and can likewise be reflected there,if the critical angle is exceeded. In this context, the critical anglecalculated back to the inner layer transition is as large at thetransition of the outer foil layer as the direct critical angle at thetransition of the denser medium to the ambient air.

The advantage of this variant has an effect when a surface is scratchedand roughened. These significantly worsen the share of total reflection.However, since only a small share of maximum approx. 25% of the lightrays produced in LISA foil 284 are reflected at the outer boundarysurface, the foil's efficiency rises on the whole.

The whole foil e.g. can first be manufactured with a greater thicknessand brought to the desired thickness through stretching if directmanufacture becomes problematic.

Further, it can be advantageous, if the LISA foil 284 is provided with areflecting coating 290 on one side or both sides. In the second-citedcase, the LISA foil 284 will, however, preferentially have a recess inthe area of the LED to allow the irradiation of the stimulating light toenter. To increase efficiency, depicted photodiode 284 thus specificallyhas e.g. reflecting backside metallization 290 in the area ofirradiation as a minimum.

The use of several layers with different refractive indexes also offersadvantages with reference to LISA foils that are metallized for thepurpose of improved light utilization on the outer side. For one, thetotal reflection is better in terms of efficiency than the reflection ona metallized surface, for the other, scratches on metal surface 290 onlyaffect the efficiency of LISA foil 284 to a slight degree for the samereasons as those described above.

Technically, foils 284 of this type can be produced through extrusionmethods or calendering methods, with the LISA dye being added at the erequired concentration. In order to ensure that banknote 1 can alsostill communicate via photodiode 226 a, 227, the plastics should becorrespondingly provided with additives. For example, the plasticizercontent of the foil can be increased such that the foil becomes lesssensitive to banknote 1 being crumpled up by the user.

An additional reflective layer can be created by incorporating and/orapplying metallic layers, e.g. metallic foils. If this layer or otherlayers are e.g. so-called shape memory alloys, then, as a result of thememory effect, the possibility of freeing the plastic foil fromdeformations caused by use by means of short-term temperature increasesto e.g. approx. 80° C. shall continue to exist. Polymers exhibiting theso-called shape memory effect can also be used for this purpose. It isparticularly advantageous when foils that exhibit this effect areadditionally provided with LISA dye. The surface of the foils should besufficiently smooth so as to minimize scattering loss. Further, thethickness of the foil is to be adjusted to the manufacture and thicknessof banknote 1. Normally, foil thicknesses of less than 50 μm are used.

The LISA pigment can not just be integrated in the banknote in the formof a dyed foil, but rather, it is also possible to coat and/or print onundyed foils, such as PET foils, with LISA lacquers. It is particularlyadvantageous, when the security thread present in the banknote and/oranother foil to be incorporated in or applied to the banknote is printedon with LISA lacquer. Application of the lacquer to the foil can alsooccur by using knife-coating or spin coating on individual parts of thefoil.

EXAMPLE 38

As shown in FIG. 25, according to one embodiment, a LISA photodiode 227′of this type is irradiated in a banknote, analogously to photodiode 284according to FIG. 24, by a light source present on Chip 3, such as alight-emitting diode (LED) 235. In this context, the wavelength producedby light-emitting diode 235 of the light is preferentially selected suchthat it corresponds to the absorption maximums of the plastic used, i.e.to the fluorescent dyes contained therein.

In this context, in accordance with the representation of FIG. 25, thelight exit opening of light-emitting diode 235 can be mounted on theupper side or, as the case may be, on the underside of Chip 3, but alsoon the narrow side of Chip 3. In order to achieve optimal lightcoupling, photodiode 227′ is led past light diode 235. Thus, there is asignificant difference between the photodiode variant according to FIG.25 compared to those of FIGS. 44, 45 and 23, 46, consisting in thatthere is not a plurality of individual photodiodes or, as the case maybe, photodiode sections 226, 227, 226 a, 227 a, but rather, that thereis only a single photodiode 227′, which preferentially extends from anedge. 289 to an opposing edge 290 of banknote 1. As a result, a largetolerance window with reference to the positioning accuracy of Chip 3results from this arrangement according to FIG. 25, since light-emittingdiode 235 merely has to be positioned within the width of the photodiode227′ that is used.

Moreover, an essential advantage of using LISA foils compared toconventional photodiodes consists in that no in-phase coupling of thelight from light-emitting diode 235 into photodiode 227′ is necessary,since this is a process wherein the irradiated light is merelyfrequency-shifted with reference to the emitted light through theabsorption by the LISA molecules.

It is possible for the LISA pigments to be distributed homogeneously inthe photodiode. In the variants indicated, in order to achieve thehighest possible efficiency, it is will be advantageous if LED 235 ismounted over an area of photodiode 227′, which contains a higherconcentration of LISA pigments. This can e.g. be translated intopractice through layers of varying thickness of the LISA foil or, as thecase may of the LISA lacquer or through generation of a concentrationgradient of the LISA pigments within the LISA foil or, as the case maybe, of the LISA lacquer.

Another possibility consists in the use of a laser diode as light source235, with e.g. an organic thin-film laser diode being particularlyadvantageous. In this context, a higher intensity of light is achieved,than is possible when using a conventional LED. Likewise, the use oftwo-dimensional LEDs is preferred, which e.g. are produced by means ofthin-film technology, such as

-   -   vacuum deposition, etc. To this end, e.g. LEDs with a        perpendicular aperture or, as the case may be, with a square        aperture can be used. This can lead to better luminous        efficiency compared to point-shaped emitting LEDs.

EXAMPLE 39

Another even more efficient possibility for generating light is shown inFIG. 26. In this context, a luminous surface 291 is used to generate aprimary optical signal. This luminous surface 291 can e.g. be a coating.In this context, it is e.g. an organic LED (=OLED), which preferentiallycan be printed on, or have electroluminescent inorganic substances suchas doped transition metal chalconides (sulfides such as ZnS, CdS, etc.).By applying photodiode 227′ to luminous surface 291. the optical signal,which is primarily being irradiated perpendicular to the surface ofluminous surface 291, can be directed at edges 289, 290 of banknote 1for radiation.

The emission wave length of luminous surface 291 and the absorption wavelength of fluorescent dye molecules 286 is adapted to an absorptionmaximum of the dye molecules, so that the fluorescent luminous intensitypreferentially corresponds to a maximum of the dye molecules.

EXAMPLE 40

In a further development that offers particular advantages in theprocessing of stacked banknotes, as will be described in the following,a piezoelectrical element, which is likewise a component of thebanknote, is provided for the supply of an electrical circuit of abanknote. In this context, it can be a piezoelectric monocrystal (e.g.BaTiO3, PbTiO3), a piezoelectric foil (e.g. polyvinylidenefluoride—PVDF) or any other piezoelectric material (e.g. copolymertransducer of trifluoroethylene).

If, for example, the piezoelectric element is present as a foil ofpiezoelectric material, it can e.g. be constructed as a security thread,OVD foil (optically variable element), etc.. However, it can also be acomponent of a compound material consisting of a foil and paper or ofseveral foils. The two sides of the foil are at least partially vacuummetallized for the formation of electrodes. If one applies voltage tothe two metallic electrodes, the thread bends itself in the rhythm ofthe electrical voltage. As described in greater detail in the following,for decoupling of the energy supply and response of the piezo foil, anintegrated circuit in the vicinity of the foil or preferentially on thefoil itself can be used, which [circuit] is conductively connected tothe electrodes of the piezo foil.

In one advantageous embodiment of a banknote, provision is made to mountthe circuits between two uninterrupted, vacuum metallized piezo foilssuch that the two piezo foils are brought into association with thecontacts of the electrical circuit. This can occur through a particulardesign of the metal layers, e.g. through use of the so-called “cleartext” method. When a conductive laminated adhesive is used, it ispossible to bring the contacts, which as a rule lie on one side of theelectrical circuit, into contact with the two metallized piezo foils.Other similar embodiments are conceivable. In case, for example, thereis an electrical circuit is available, which exhibits contacts ondifferent sides. Through corresponding structuring of the metal layers,electrical circuits with more than two contacts can also be used.

EXAMPLE 41

The electrical circuit can be operated by means of irradiated energy inthe form of ultrasound, with electrical voltage being generated that isalso used—potentially after temporary storage—to operate the piezo foiland optionally to communicate with a reading device. However, thecircuit can also be supplied with energy by means of a photo cell andirradiated light, with electrical voltage being generated,which—potentially after intermediate storage—is also used to operate theelectric circuit and the piezo foil and optionally to communication witha reading device.

The electrical circuit can also be operated through the introduction ofdeformational work on the banknote, i.e. e.g. of elements with apiezoelectrical effect. The energy brought in can then beused—potentially after temporary storage—to operate the chip situated onthe banknote and potentially to operate communication with the readingdevice.

Precisely in conjunction with a display or an optical out-coupling ofinformation out of the banknotes in the range of visible light, the useof deformational energy results in the advantage that even the normaluser of the banknote sees a security feature in the chip of the banknotethat he can discern. Slight crimping of the banknote then e.g. leads tolight effects on the LISA strip[,] the blinking of LEDs or a display onthe display of the banknote.

EXAMPLE 42

One further idea of the present invention consists in using themagnetostrictive effect in place of the effect of magnetic induction. Asis known, when a ferromagnetic crystal is magnetized a change in shapeof the magnetic crystal then appears as field strength increases. Thisphenomenon is known as the magnetostrictive effect. The Joule effect isthe most important component of magnetostriction. It is based on thefact that the so-called Weiss regions rotate in the direction ofmagnetization and displace their boundaries. Through this, a change inshape of the ferromagnetic core occurs, with its volume remainingconstant.

The magnetostrictive effect, which causes expansions in the range of 10to 30 μm/m in the case of alloys with the components of iron, nickel orcobalt, achieves values of up to 2000 μm/m in highly magnetostrictivematerials of rare-earth metal-iron alloys. Thus, the compoundTb0,3Dy0,7Fe2, which is also known as Terfenol-D©, has an energy densitythat is many times higher than piezoelectrical materials.

Aside from metals and their alloys, molecular magnets also possessmagnetostrictive properties. Molecular magnets are understood to meanlarger molecules or clusters, the magnetic properties of which aredetermined by the coupling of metal ions usually, which [coupling] isanti-ferromagnetic as a rule. The best known representative of themagnetic clusters, which demonstrate macroscopic quanta tunneling inmagnetization, is [Mn12O12(CH3COO)16(H2O)4].2CH3COOH.4H2O (abbreviatedas Mn12—acetate or simply Mn12), which is of mixed valence.

As described above, a magnetostrictive material experiences alongitudinal change in length upon application of a magnetic field, i.e.the direction of field and the direction of expansion run parallel. Asimilar effect is also known for piezoelectrical materials. When anelectrical field is applied, it effects a longitudinal or alsotransversal change in the spatial expansion of the lattice structure. Inparticular, it is also known that the piezoelectric effect can bereversed, i.e. in the case of the reciprocal piezoelectric effect, anelectrical voltage that can be captured can be generated on the surfacethrough expansion or bending of a piezoelectric material. In thiscontext, the amounts of energy that can be generated by means of apiezoelectric material can be sufficient for the operation of a chip.

EXAMPLE 43

Although not limited to this, FIG. 27 shows an exemplary embodimentwhere a piezoelectric material is used, too, in addition to amagnetostrictive material. The materials are integrated into a composite360 for the generation of an electrical supply voltage from a magneticfield. Here, a layer of magnetostrictive material 361 is coated with alayer of piezoelectrical material 362, which e.g. is applied in the formof a strip onto a banknote paper. An alternating magnetic field 363flowing through the magnetostrictive material 361 causes a periodicchange in length dL of the composite material 360, with the frequency ofthe change in length dL corresponds to the frequency of the alternatingmagnetic field.

Preferentially, for the construction of the composite material 360, amagnetostrictive material 361 with longitudinal sensitivity ispreferred, in the case of which there is a change in length parallel tothe applied magnetic field, which [change], in particular, is greaterthan the one in the direction perpendicular to it should be. Inaddition, a piezoelectrical material with a lateral sensitivity ispreferred, in the case of which the tapped voltage at right angles tothe change in length is particularly preferentially greater than that inthe direction perpendicular thereto.

The electrical voltage evoked through the periodic change in length ofcomposite 360 in piezoelectrical material 362 can be tapped atelectrodes 364 at the surface of the material, which are mounted on thematerial. Although a separate electrode layer is also conceivable as acounterelectrode, the magnetostrictive material 361 will preferentiallybe used as the counterelectrode, provided this [material] exhibitssufficient electrical conductivity, like e.g. that associated withnanocrystalline metal or, as the case may be, amorphous metal. Thevoltage captured by means of electrodes 364 or, as the case may be, 361can then be tapped at connections 365. In the case of use in a banknote,connections 365 will consequently be electrically connected with chip 3of a banknote 1.

The construction of the material composite according to the inventionthus serves to generate an electrical alternating current, proportionalto an externally applied alternating magnetic field, under avoidance ofelectrical conduction by means of a coil.

EXAMPLE 44

FIG. 28 shows a further example where a magnetostrictive-piezoelectricalcompound material 360, corresponding e.g. to that of FIG. 27, is in turnintegrated in a banknote 1 and connected, in this context, with chip 3of banknote 1 via lines 366. Here, a preferred variation is depicted,where a strip of a LISA foil 227′ can likewise be present besidesmagnetostrictive-piezoelectrical strip 360, as will be explained indetail within the scope of this invention. In a particularly preferredmanner, there can be a single strip that comprises both LISA foil 227 aswell as compound material 360 and e.g. is applied onto the banknotepaper as a prefabricated unit.

EXAMPLE 45

In this context, it can also already be expedient to provide anelectronic security feature without the use of a chip or any otherstorage element for the storage of data. By dispensing with such storageelements, an associated banknote can be manufactured particularly simplyand inexpensively.

A further possible variation consists in the design of an electricaloscillating circuit in or, as the case may be, on the banknote paper.

FIG. 29 shows an equivalent circuit diagram of such a simply-constructedelectronic security feature in idealized form, where an optional opticaldisplay is also present additionally. In this context, oscillatingcircuit 230 specifically exhibits an inductance 231 and a capacitance232 and is preferentially connected with a rectifying element 233 and anelectrooptical reproduction device, such as an emitting diode LED orOLED 234. In principle, the equivalent circuit diagram can also exhibitstill further components.

A banknote with such an equivalent circuit diagram can be manufacturedas was described previously in the section “Banknote with an electricalcircuit”. Preferentially, the electronic components are applied to thebanknote paper as a substrate typographically, such as through screenprinting, ink jet printing or engraved printing by means of silverconductive paste, graphite paints or conductive polymers. Alternatively,vacuum metallized foil elements can also be used. The inductance 231e.g. is applied onto the paper in the form of a conductor loop and thecapacitance 232 is applied in the form of an electrically-conductingsurface. The capacitance 232 can thus be adjusted to a predeterminedvalue during fabrication such that a conductive surface is likewiseimprinted onto the other side of the banknote paper or a metallic layer,e.g. in the form of a strip or a label form, is applied to it.

Rectifying element 233 and LED 234 are likewise preferentially realizedon the banknote paper typographically, in particular on the basis ofsemi-conductive polymers. Alternatively, Si- and/orIII/V-semiconductor-thin-layer technology can also be used for thegeneration of the components. A different display can also be realizedin place of an LED.

If a banknote equipped with an integrated oscillating circuit in thismanner is brought into an electronic alternating field, preferentiallyin the radio frequency range, such as particularly preferentially e.g.125 KHz or 13.56 MHz, emitting diode 234 is stimulated to illuminate inthe visible spectral range by the energy absorbed in the oscillatingcircuit. This represents an authenticity feature with a very high rateof tamperproofness. The transmitter for the radio frequency field can berealized simply and inexpensively and e.g. integrated into a manualdevice or tabletop device, such as a register, for the testing of banknotes. Preferentially, the performance of the transmitter is dimensionedsuch that it can still stimulate banknotes to illuminate within acoverage range of some 10 to 30 cm.

EXAMPLE 46

FIG. 23 shows a further example of a banknote 1 according to theinvention. It is distinguished in that it exhibits both an optical aswell as an inductive coupling device.

Specifically, chip 3, or a separate region of the banknote 1 connectedto it, exhibits a device for sending out an optical signal, such as anLED 235. The optical signal can be led via one or more photodiodesections 226 a and 227 a, to the outside edge of banknote 1 andout-coupled there. Further, banknote 1 also has an inductive couplingdevice 250 in the form of a coil 250. Coil 250 is connected with chip 3,and in this context, the banknote is designed as a noncontacting RFIDTransponder. Alternatively, banknote 1 can also exhibit a capacitivecoupling device in place of or in addition to the inductive one, as willbe described in the following by way of example.

In that an inductive and/or capacitive coupling is also possible inaddition to the optical coupling in the case of an individual banknote1, measurements in a stack can be conducted significantly more reliably,as is described in more detail in the section “Stack measurement”.

In addition to the inductively coupled transponders, as were describedby way of example with reference to FIG. 23 in connection with anoptical coupling, banknotes with a capacitively coupled transponders arealso conceivable.

EXAMPLE 47

The preferential construction of such a banknote 1 is depicted in FIG.30. Here, chip 3 is conductively connected with two large-surfaced,conductive capacitive coupling surfaces 256 as electrodes 256 via twolines 255.

The surface of capacitive coupling surfaces 256 is an important factorfor the functional capability of capacitively coupled transponders in astack. Coupling surfaces 256 can in fact also be integrated in the paperduring paper manufacture, but they are preferentially applied onto thebanknote paper. One manufacturing option, which is also of particularadvantage in the manufacture of banknotes, consists in the printingtechnology application of such conductive surfaces 256. In this context,they can be applied over the entire surface of the carrier medium, inthis case the banknote paper. They will at least take up at least 50%share of surface, preferentially at least 70% share of surface of abanknote side. As will be described more precisely, this has theadvantage that the individual surfaces always overlap to form acapacitance arrangement, even in the case of a stack of banknotes withdifferent dimensions, e.g. correspondingly different denominations.

E.g. conductive lacquers, which are advantageously largely invisiblevisually, can be used as printing ink. Coupling surfaces 256 of graphitematerials, which can likewise be applied typographically, are alsoconceivable as an alternative to this—at least in the case of smallshares of surface.

EXAMPLE 48

FIG. 31 shows a second example of a banknote 1 with a capacitivelycoupled transponder. In analogy to FIG. 46, it has two conductive layers256 as capacitive coupling surfaces 256. By way of example, the banknoteexhibits a hologram strip 258 with a metallic reflecting layer 257. Thereflecting layer exhibits two areas 257 a, 257 b that are spaced-apartand galvanically decoupled from one another. Transponder chip 3, whichis electrically connected with the two areas 257 a, 257 b via electricallines 255, is affixed in the space between them.

In certain cases in the manufacture of banknotes, metallic layers 257,such as the exemplary hologram strip 258 with metallic reflecting layer257 in the present case, can be applied onto the banknote paper througha transfer method. It is now possible to conductively connect chip 3with metallic layer 257 of such a hologram strip 258 in a separateworking step prior to application onto the banknote paper. Here, areas257 a, 257 b of metallic layer 257 are connected with chip 3 viaelectrical lines 255.

Coupling surfaces 256 are now imprinted onto the banknote paper first.Hologram strip 258 is then applied such that an electrical connection isproduced between coupling surfaces 256 printed on previously and metalcoating 257 of the hologram strip 258.

An alternative consists in first applying hologram strip 258 with chip 3onto the banknote paper, in order to then print coupling surfaces 256over hologram strip 258.

These variations solve the problem that conductive dyes can not becontacted with a chip 3 by simple means using conventional procedures,such as bonding, soldering, flip-chip. It is to be emphasized that, inthe above, the capacitive coupling surfaces were in fact only appliedonto one side, but that they can, in principle, also be applied ontoboth sides of the banknote paper, which, in particular in the case ofbanknote stacks that have not been sorted according to their position,leads to more defined coupling relationships.

EXAMPLE 49

To prevent the destruction or detachment of optically, inductively orcapacitively coupling structures that are not embedded in but ratherapplied onto the paper, as they were described by way of example in theabove, the banknotes can be provided with an uppermost cover layer toprotect these structures.

EXAMPLE 50

As was mentioned, a further idea consists in that a banknote exhibits apassive electrical, magnetic and/or electromagnetic structure, such as apassive oscillating circuit, which was described with reference to FIG.29 by way of example. This passive oscillating circuit can have e.g.characteristic data, such as a resonance frequency, which is specificfor the individual group of banknotes or at least for a certain group ofbanknotes. Thus, these oscillating circuit data can be specific e.g. forthe country issuing the banknotes and/or for the denomination ofbanknote 1. These data can be used as an authenticity feature, in thate.g. the named resonance frequency is measured in an associated testdevice and compared with the expected values. In this context, provisioncan be made e.g. that the measured resonance frequency can only deviatevery minimally, i.e. by a certain amount (e.g. ±10 Hz), from the ideallyexpected resonance frequency in order to be recognized as authentic.This makes falsification of the oscillating circuit more difficult.

If the banknote also exhibits a chip in addition to the passivestructure, an authenticity check can take place e.g. through acomparison of the measured resonance frequency with the ideally expectedvalue, which is stored in the chip.

EXAMPLE 51

Particularly in the aforementioned example as well, it is essential tobe able to adjust the properties of the oscillating circuit in atargeted and selective fashion. Several methods are presented by way ofexample, which permit scalable detuning both during paper manufacture aswell as during printing/processing of the sheet material. This can e.g.take place in that, for different banknotes, there is an oscillatingcircuit, which is actually manufactured uniformly in principle, theresonance frequency of which is detuned in defined fashion such thatdifferent banknotes have different resonance frequencies.

As is commonly known, the resonance frequency of an oscillating circuitis directly dependent upon the total capacitance and the totalinductance of same. Approximated, the resonance frequency fres of atransponder circuit can be represented through Thomson's oscillationequation for an ohmicly attenuated oscillating circuit:$f_{res} = {\frac{1}{2\pi} \cdot \sqrt{\frac{1}{LC} - \frac{R^{2}}{4L^{2}}}}$

Here, L is the inductance, C is the capacitance and R is the ohmicresistance of the oscillating circuit. In the HF range, the frequencydependency of the inductive and capacitive resistance per se is actuallyno longer negligible, but Thompson's equation for an ohmicly attenuatedparallel resonant circuit as here portrayed represents an acceptableapproximation for illustration of the applied principles. One recognizesfrom the equation that the resonance frequency fres is directlydependent on the square root of inductance L, capacitance C and alsoohmic load resistance R of the oscillating circuit, all of which, exceptR, are frequency-dependent. Thus, if one succeeds in influencing thesevariables in a targeted fashion, one then has a direct influence on theresonance frequency of the transponder.

As depicted by way of example in FIG. 32, a banknote 1 exhibits anintegrated circuit, specifically a chip 3, which can consist of a(n)Si-chip, a polymer electronic circuit, a polycrystalline chip circuit(a-Si, p-Si) and/or also of combinations. Chip 3 is connected with aregion on banknote 1, wherein the targeted detuning of the resonancefrequency takes place, by means of electrically conductive connectionpieces 413.

In this context, the region exhibits a layer 414 of thickness d1. Thislayer 414 can be embedded in the paper, but it can also be subsequentlyapplied by means of transfer methods and can thus e.g. consist of ametallized foil strip 414 as well as out of a layer 414 of particularlyconductive printing ink. Layer 414 must also not necessarily have theform of a strip. The following examples of application are nowconceivable:

EXAMPLE 52

Detuning of the resonance frequency of foil strip 414 can take placethrough the incorporation into the paper suspension of a definedquantity of electrically conductive substances, such as electricallyconductive fibers, preferentially corresponding cellulose filaments.They can e.g. be treated with conductive carbon black and canpotentially be spun fibers. Alternatively or additionally, magneticsubstances can also be incorporated into the paper mass. E.g. particlessuch as iron shavings, but also ferrite powder, are conceivable asmagnetic substances.

The electrically conductive substances or, as the case may be, magneticsubstances are incorporated in the paper web in a targeted fashion. Thiscan e.g. take place through spraying onto the still-wet paper web beingtransported past, as a result of which corresponding strips 414 in paper1 are formed. Here, a variation in the geometric dimensions, e.g. thewidth d1 of the strip 414 for the case named, can be used to vary thespecific resistance (electrically conductive substances) or, as the casemay be, the inductance (magnetic substances) and thus achieve targeteddetuning of the resonance frequency. Thus, corresponding, scalabledetuning can be produced e.g. through adjustment of the width d1 independence on the denomination of banknote 1.

Since sheet material, e.g. security paper is generally smoothed and/orcalendared during manufacture, it is conceivable that a galvanic contactdoes not automatically always exist between detuning strips 414 andcontact lines 413. It is therefore conceivable to “lasers away” thenon-conductive layer on detuning strip 414 with a laser, e.g. an excimerlaser, so that the connection stretches 413 to be printed then restorethe galvanic contact.

EXAMPLE 53

A further example provides that the detuning is elicited through acorrespondingly prepared strip 414. This is to be a thin sheet 414,which can be metallized, e.g. with aluminum; also copper or similarmetals with a high vapor pressure are realizable. If this strip 414 isnow applied onto the banknote paper by means of a transfer method, thisthus takes place e.g. by means of a hot-seal adhesive. These lacquersand adhesives are non-conductive as a rule, which results in a galvanicinterruption of the oscillating circuit. According to one variation ofthe invention it is therefore contemplated to first apply connectionstretches 413 e.g. by imprinting with conductive printing ink andapplying the strips afterwards, thus e.g. metallized foil strip 414, ina transfer method. That way, a galvanic connection is produced betweenconnection stretches 413 and detuning strip 414.

As an alternative to the hot-seal adhesives mentioned, conductiveadhesives can also be used, also conductive anisotropic adhesives inparticular.

EXAMPLE 54

FIG. 33 shows yet a further variation, where a conductive ink or a metalare imprinted as a strip 414. This strip 414 can in turn also have e.g.a width d1 that is dependent on the denomination. If a non-conductivetransfer strip 415 is now glued on, by way of example, provision can bemade to provide two or more recesses 416 in transfer strip 415, whichcome to lie on the banknote paper in exact register after applicationover corresponding surfaces 417 in the printing surface, i.e. strip 414.Subsequently, e.g. a contact over recesses 416 with recesses 417 lyingbelow can be established by imprinting with conductive ink in order toestablish the galvanic contact to circuit 3, which is not depicted inFIG. 33. In this context, scaling of the specific longitudinalresistance is made possible through suitable selection of form,specifically of the width d1 of printing surface 414 and also ofrecesses 416. This leads to the desired detuning.

EXAMPLE 55

In the following an example for a banknote with a chip is explained thatcan not be addressed inductively or capacitively, but rather through agalvanic, i.e. direct electrical contact. In this context, the galvaniccontacting will serve the current supply of the chip 3 in particular.Above all, such banknotes are suited to stack measurement, as is furtherexplained in the associated section.

FIG. 34 shows such a banknote 1 with chip 3 that exhibits anelectrically conductive layer 380 (shaded in the illustration) as acontact surface along each of its short sides. The layers 380 are thuselectrically connected with the chip 3 over lines 381 that are in or onthe banknote paper. The layer 380 is formed such that a conductivity ofthe banknote 1 across its cross section is ensured. That means that atleast two contact surfaces 380 are incorporated on the upper and lowerside of the banknote paper to supply the chips 3 with energy, which[surfaces] are conductively connected throughout the cross section ofthe banknotes and which can be connected with the voltage source throughexternal contact clamps.

To this end, the layer 380 can, by way of example be designed as aconductive track 380 that is applied on the banknote paper around theside edges such that a direct electrical contact exists between theupper and the lower side of the banknote 1. Alternatively, the layeralso can not only be applied and/or incorporated on the surface of thebanknote, but rather e.g. take up the entire volume of the side edge.Here, such banknotes 1 can be manufactured e.g. through the scatteringin of conductive fibers, e.g. in the form of steel strips along theedges of the banknotes 1. It is likewise possible, e.g. to applyelectrically conductive polymers or, as the case may be, to imprint themas conductive printing inks such that they penetrate the cross sectionof the paper and thus establish the desired galvanic contact.

The track 380 is preferentially realized on □two opposite sides of thebanknote 1, e.g. in the form of a track that surrounds the entire edgeof the note 1 on the two short sides, as depicted in FIG. 34. Thegalvanically conductive layers 380 need not encompass the entire edge ofthe banknote 1. Even the execution of the contacts in the form ofrelatively small layers 380 already suffices if it is only ensured thatthese layers 380 can come in contact conductively across the entirestack. Likewise, the two layers 380 as contacts of the galvanic circuit,can also be executed on only one side of the banknote 1 in thisembodiment.

EXAMPLE 56

FIG. 35 shows an alternative embodiment of FIG. 34, where, in additionto the conductive contact layers 380 for energy supply, the banknotes 1are provided with at least a third contact 382 that is only active inthe surface of the banknote paper and was created e.g. throughimprinting. It is augmented by a fourth contact 382 on the back side ofthe banknote, where the third and fourth contact 382 are notgalvanically connected with one another. These contacts 382 are againconnected with chip 3 via electrical conductors 383 and serve to permitchips 3 in a stack to be able to also individually reciprocally activateor, as the case may be, address themselves, as explained more closely inthe section “Stack measurement”. To this end, contacts 382, just likecontact layers 380, are positioned such that they lie above one anotherduring appropriate stacking and thus establish the galvanic contactbetween every two bank notes that lie above one another. This can alsobe reinforced through ordered stacking.

By way of example, the geometry of the third and fourth contacts 382 canbe executed such that each surface for itself lies roughly in the middleof the element and is executed e.g. in the form of a ring or a circle.The contacts 382 can, however, also be executed as polygons or inanother form. To the extent that the contacts 382 overlap with theconductors 381, an intermediately placed electrical insulation isnecessary.

EXAMPLE 57

In addition, it is also conceivable that one or more chips per banknoteare incorporated or applied without any contacting. The chips then donot necessarily have the functionality for data transmission, thuspotentially do not even need to function. The presence and/or the formand/or a surface structure, e.g. a surface pattern, and/or the positionand/or the distribution of several such chips in or, as the case may be,on the banknote paper alone can serve as an authenticity feature. Thesechips can be very small i.e. e.g. invisible to the naked eye and opticalor electrical test methods can, for example, be employed for testing.

Semiconductor Technology with Polymer Electronics

A further idea of the present invention consists of manufacturingtransponder circuits based on a combination of procedures fromsemiconductor technology and polymer electronics. These ideas can beadvantageously applied to all types of transponder substrates, be theyrigid chip cards or also flexible substrates made of paper, polymers ormetal films, etc. such as the sheet-shaped documents of value accordingto the invention.

In this context, semiconductor technology is understood to mean allprocesses belonging to silicon technology or the like, which work viaelementary semiconductors or compound semiconductors. Thin layertechnologies in particular find application in this context. In currentsemiconductor circuitry technology, nearly exclusive use is made ofintegrated circuits of elementary semiconductors (silicon, germanium),which have been superior in the points of production technology andprice thus far. Nearly all components available on the market consist ofmonocrystalline, doped elementary semiconductors (essentially silicon),that have been sawn out of wafers. In that context, the doping (n- orp-) is needed to maintain the electronic carrier surpluses, upon whichelectrical conduction in semiconductors is based. Aside from theconventional element semiconductors, there also exist so-called compoundsemiconductors, which are composed of elements from different maingroups within the periodic system. Examples of these are GaAs, InP, InSband others. The mobilities of these “composite semiconductors” are, inpart, clearly greater than for Si or Ge.

If these semiconductors are applied by means of thin-layer technology, arequired bending resistance for flexible substrates can also beachieved, as is necessary for use in banknotes, etc.

Passive and active components produced from these materials distinguishthemselves by stability with reference to carrier frequencies up intothe high GHz range.

However, the disadvantage of known semiconductor technology in thiscontext is the thickness of the monocrystals (wafer), which continue toexhibit a thickness of multiple 10 μm even after thinning, e.g. byabrading the non-active side with diamond paste, thus hampering useon/in substrates/carriers of comparable thickness, such as, e.g. paper.Moreover, the high piece counts that are required for applications inthe area of security papers/smart labels are difficult to realize duringapplication and bonding of the chips (e.g. by means of the flip-chipprocess).

As a rule, transponder systems consist of a coil, which is applied tothe substrate in several turns either typographically or by etching, forexample. In the current state of the art, the transponder chips arestill too thick (even after thinning) to be applied to thin substrateswith thicknesses in the μm range, as is usually necessary for use in thedocuments of value according to the invention.

In contrast, the manufacture of electronic circuits produced via polymertechnology, so-called IPCs (integrated plastic circuits) of conductivepolymers, proves to be advantageous in the present invention. Here, thepolymers can be conductive (polyaniline) or also semiconductive(poly-3-alkylthiophene). The possibility of being able to apply thecircuits required for this purpose typographically, even at minimalthicknesses in the Am range, is advantageous versus classicsemiconductor technology. The big advantage of IPC lies furthermore inthe possibility of applying the necessary structures to a carriermaterial typographically. The carrier material can be a plastic film oralso a particularly smooth-surfaced paper instead.

As already mentioned in another location of the present invention, allsemiconductor components known from semiconductor technology, such as,e.g. diodes, transistors, etc., can also be produced from conductivepolymers via polymer electronics. It then also becomes possible toproduce more complicated logic circuits such as AND gates, OR gates,NAND gates or similar with these polymer electronic (polytronic forshort) base elements. The critical aspect, however, is that maximumlimit frequencies reach only some 100 kHz on account of the ratherlimited electronic carrier mobility achieved in polymer semiconductorsto date.

However, such frequency behavior is unsuitable for current RFIDtransponders according to ISO-14443 or, as the case may be, ISO-15693,which are triggered by external reading devices with frequencies of13.56 MHz.

Normally, the interface between the analog, high-frequency transmissionchannel of a reading device to a transponder and its digital componentsis realized via a high-frequency interface, also known as an HFinterface, which corresponds to the classical modulator-demodulatorsystem of a modem and is described in greater detail in the“RFID-Handbuch”, Finkenzeller, Klaus, 2nd Ed., pp. 242 ff.,Hanser-Verlag, Munich, 1999. The HF-interface can serve to facilitatecommunication of the transponder with the reading device and the energysupply of the transponder via the high-frequency, or HF-signal forshort, of the reading device, and in particular when the transpondersare passive, it can do so with no energy supply of its own.

In the above, the reading device's modulated HF-signal of e.g. 13.56 MHzis demodulated in the HF-interface. At the same time, the system clockof the data carrier is derived from the carrier frequency of theHF-field. As a rule, the interface disposes of a load regulator forsending the data back to the reading device. The critical aspect in thisregard is that the carrier frequencies lie in the range of MHz andabove. In other words, the associated circuits must then also be able towork with these frequencies.

EXAMPLE 58

FIG. 36 shows a block circuit diagram of an inductively-coupledtransponder 3 consisting of a logic portion 391 and HF interface 391with a load modulator 392. In this context, the HF interface 391 isessentially formed by the analog input oscillating circuit 393 withtransponder coil L and trimming capacitor C. Connected to this inseries, is a rectifier 398, consisting, e.g. of a Graetz bridge 398 anda voltage stabilizer 399, preferentially a Zener diode 399. Parallel tothe transponder oscillating circuit 393, a circuit 395 supplies thesystem clock for the data carrier. This circuit portion supplies thestabilized, equidirectional voltage Vcc, which provides the logicportion 391 with energy. Furthermore, a demodulation circuit 396supplies a serial data stream to the logic portion 391 for furtherprocessing, as well as e.g. a load modulator 393, which sends back datato the external reading device. In this context, the logic portion 391exhibits digital circuits 394 e.g. for control of the transponder,storage or encryption of data.

According to the invention, semiconductor elements from semiconductortechnology are now utilized for the high-frequency range, and polytronicelements are now utilized for the digital, low frequency range of thetransponder circuit. This makes it possible to work with sufficientlyhigh frequencies at the necessary circuit locations when using thin andflexible substrates, thereby enabling the use of transponders inbanknotes and the like in a more simple manner. As a result of this,transponder circuits can be realized for RFID systems in whichlimitation of the clock rate to the kHz range in the polymer electronicis circumvented by the additional incorporation of conventionalsemiconductor circuits which have no frequency limitation, such thatthese transponders can also be used in the HF range (mHz and higher).

Specifically, the high-frequency components of the HF interface arepreferentially applied as element semiconductors or compoundsemiconductors, e.g. by printing, precipitation, vapor deposit orsimilar methods, whereas the low frequency components, such as thedigital circuits of the logic portion 391, are produced by means ofpolymer electronics.

By way of example, oscillating circuit L and C, as well as rectifier398, and, optionally, all further components of HF interface 390 aswell, are thus operated at high-frequency, i.e. e.g. at 13.56 mHz orhigher. In particular, however, stabilizer 399 can also be a componentof logic portion 391 and then likewise be manufactured polymerelectronically and only work at frequencies in the kHz range like itsremaining components 394.

Likewise conceivable are designs in which both the high-frequencyportion and the low frequency portion of the transponder circuit 3 are acombination of polymer electronic and conventional components. By way ofexample, thin-layer diodes can thus be integrated into the IPCs of loadmodulator 392 as well, just as polymer components can be integrated intorectifier and stabilizer circuits 398, 399.

Optical and/or Acoustic Playback Devices

As was described by way of the example above, a further essentialembodiment of banknotes with electrical circuits can consist in theprovision of one or more electrooptical and/or acoustic playback devicesfirmly integrated into the paper of the banknote. Aside fromauthenticity recognition, such devices can also serve further purposes,which are described in particular below and in even greater detail inthe sections “Stack Processing” and “Commerce”. By way of example, theplayback devices can have the following properties.

An electrooptical display can exhibit individually or in combinatione.g. a self-luminous optical display that radiates in the visible,infrared and/or UV spectral range and/or a non-self-luminous opticaldisplay and/or a display made of electronic paper and/or an LCD and/oran LED. In this context, the electrooptical display can exhibit atwo-dimensional display surface, e.g. in the form of an LCD or also anapproximately punctiform light source, such as a single LED.

In this context, electronic paper can, be understood to mean in knownfashion, for example, a flexible substrate with rotationally or slidablycontrollable microcapsules embedded between electrodes. The manufacturefrom electronic paper has the advantage that the flexibility of thebanknotes, which are mostly made of paper, is not impaired. Moreover,electronic paper exists for which the display remains intact evenwithout external energy supply. This is particularly suitable for manyapplications involving banknotes. In order to recognize an externalmanipulation of the displayed text in this case, it is advantageous foradditional information concerning the intactness of the information,e.g. in the form of a check sum or similar to be displayed or, as thecase may be, for a digital signature or the like to be stored in thechip of the banknote in addition to the text to be displayed.

The display will preferentially be produced typographically inparticular, e.g. by printing on the banknote with electronic ink, i.e.e.g. with printing ink that exhibits microencapsulated pearls. Thisprovides a high degree of compatibility with the already known printingmethod for banknote production.

Alternatively, an acoustic playback device such as an electroopticalsonic transmitter and/or a reciprocal piezoelectrical sonic transmitterand/or a magnetostrictive sonic transmitter can also be used in place ofthe electrooptical display.

An advantage of such electrooptical and/or acoustical playback devicesis that they constitute an authenticity feature readily verifiable byhumans, which in addition can also not be deceptively imitated withcopying technology. Moreover, these playback devices can alsopreferentially be incorporated as machine-readable security, i.e.authenticity features.

Thus e.g. an associated banknote processing machine can comprise asensor device that captures, potentially in response to stimulus of theplayback device by the machine, the optical or acoustical signalsemitted by the banknote, as the case may be, and compares them withthose measurement signals expected for authentic banknotes.

Associated banknotes will then be able to be recognized in particularlysecure fashion, either automatically or by humans without theutilization of further aids, if the playback status of the playbackdevice changes temporally.

EXAMPLE 59

In the simplest case, this can consist in playback that occurs onlyperiodically. This can occur by having the playback device supplied withcurrent, particularly by an energy source, for example by means of aphotocell, a thin-layer battery e.g. paper-based or by an inductivecoupling, and having it only light up or, as the case may be, send outsonic signals when supplied with energy. The variation is particularlypreferred in which playback only occurs when energy is supplied from theoutside, i.e. no energy sources or energy stores are present in or onthe banknote itself.

In contrast to this termination of playback upon interruption ofexternal energy supply, the case can also be advantageous in which theplayback device exhibits an interface for the playback device's signaltriggering, in particular along optical and/or electronic paths, whichis particularly preferentially connected or connectable via a signalline to a control device integrated in the document of value or at leastpartially or completely external to it, which alters or can alter theplayback status of the playback device in a temporally-predeterminedmanner.

In this case, the playback status can also be changed in a predeterminedmanner independent of energy supply. In this context, the time until achange can e.g. be set randomly or at one or more specific points intime or set to occur at defined time intervals.

EXAMPLE 60

A particularly simple example of this is a flashing display, e.g. aflashing, punctiform LED that lights up at predetermined intervals. Inthis context, the associated control data are preferentially stored in amemory of the control device.

In addition, not only can the playback status be changed by altering thebrightness or volume, as the case may be, of the playback device forexample, but the information content played back can itself be changedtemporally.

EXAMPLE 61

In addition, a banknote can be designed such that it exhibits aphotocell for energy supply on at least one side and a light-emittingelement on at least the other side, each of which is connected to a chipin the banknote.

In this context, as FIG. 37 shows, the banknotes 1 according to onevariation can have a thin-layer photocell 400 on the one side, which isconnected with the banknote's 1 chip 3 for energy supply of the chip 3.This [chip] in turn is connected to a light-emitting diode located onthe other side of the banknote, such as a laser diode 401. Theconnections are preferentially made by way of typographically appliedcontact lines 403.

This variation has the advantage that energy can be transmitted betweenadjacent banknotes in the stack, as subsequently described in detailwith regard to FIG. 37 in the section “Stack Processing”.

EXAMPLE 62

This can e.g. mean that the sonic transmitter plays through differentplayback frequencies or frequency sequences, or that different displaypatterns, such as signs or symbols, are played back in the case of atwo-dimensional display surface. In order to facilitate the optical oracoustical differentiation of banknotes of different denominations,provision can be made for the playback statuses for differentdenominations to differ, e.g. through different tones, sonic frequenciesor light signals.

EXAMPLE 63

An alternative possibility for transmitting information out of thebanknote into its surroundings consists in the use of thermal radiationgenerated in the banknote.

To this end, in accordance with the information predetermined by thebanknote's electrical circuit and slated for transmission, current isdirected in the banknote through a number of electrical elements thatact as resistors, which are embedded in or applied onto the banknotematerial, preferentially the banknote paper. It is hereby noted thatthis can also involve active electronic components such as transistors.Since they act as resistors for the physical principle of action, theywill be designated using the term “resistors” in the following, if noexplicit reference to electronic components is made.

The resistors heat up through the electrical power brought into them.The temperature change evoked can then occur either directly, e.g.through the use of a thermal image camera in an optical sensor, orinstead indirectly through an indicator reaction. The latter usuallycreates the potential for optical demonstration of the heat brought in.Even though other indicator reactions, such as alteration of theconductivity of conductive elements that are likewise incorporated in orupon the banknote paper, are supposed to be explicitly possible in theregion of the demonstration according to the invention of incorporatedheat according to the invention, “displays” will be spoken of in thefollowing for the sake of simplicity.

In contrast to the method described there, the display according to theinvention does not, however, consist of simple LCR oscillating circuitslike those according to DE 100 46 710 A1, for instance, which are causedto resonate by electromagnetic waves, but rather of active elements thatrepresent an alterable condition of the banknote's oscillating circuit.In particular, display of the information available in the potentiallypresent non-volatile memory of the electric circuit is provided for hereas well. The current to be transmitted can also explicitly be anequidirectional current that is sent through the resistors.

As stated, the voltage supply of the banknote is also explicitly notlimited to the reception of electromagnetic radiation. Very interestingapplications result from the use of electromagnetic transducers inparticular that convert deformational energy into the electrical energyneeded for the voltage supply of the banknote; these will be describedin detail in the following.

The resistors, through which current to heat the banknote is directed,can be arranged in various ways to display the information. Thus it ispossible to arrange the resistors in simple barcode-like structures,bar-code-structures are realizable, segmental displays can be realizedby way of the resistors, or it is even possible to realize pixel-baseddisplays. The methods commonly used to trigger and realize the displayof LCD notebook displays are to be used preferentially for pixel-baseddisplays of this type.

In contrast to known methods, however, for the displays described hereit is also possible to produce the entire display not from conventionalwafer-based electronic components, but rather from components made ofother materials, such as amorphous silicon or multicrystalline silicon.

Such pixel-based displays are however preferentially manufacturedthrough the use of printable semiconductors such as organic polymers. Ina printing process, a display of this type with the control lines andthe transistors, as well as any potentially necessary additionalresistors, which are, however, preferentially formed by the transistorsthemselves, can be printed and any printing ink to be potentially used,which contains the indicator material, can be applied over itsubsequently. It is expedient for an indicator dye used in this way tosimultaneously constitute a protective layer for the electroniccomponents lying below it.

A banknote designed in this manner can also exhibit the feature that aportion of the electrical circuit on the banknote necessary for theoverall functionality stretches across a large areal portion of thebanknote. As a result, manipulations on the banknote quickly lead to acircuit on the banknote that is no longer capable of functioning.

Particular advantages then result for the displays on the banknotedescribed above if the indicator substance contains features visible tothe human eye, the information is rendered on the banknote in readableform, and the energy supply takes place by way of an energy carrier thatis readily available to the general population, such as thedeformational energy mentioned above, radio wave energy in the frequencyrange of mobile telephones or, however, solar energy. In this case,important information, such as the validity of a banknote or the like,can be portrayed in generally readable form on the banknote.

Quality Control during the Manufacture of Paper and Banknotes

An interesting area of application for the security papers or banknotesprovided with a circuit lies in quality assurance 23 in the manufactureof paper or banknotes.

According to the invention, provision is made to follow the path and/orthe particularly occurring processing steps of the security paper orbanknotes within the paper factory 20 or banknote printing works 21 insimple fashion by reading data from or writing data to the circuit atarbitrary locations or production stages without contact, particularlyby means of high-frequency electromagnetic fields or optically.

The data stored in the circuit preferentially consist of dataidentifying the particular sheet of paper or the particular banknote,such as serial number, denomination, issuing country, currency and/orproduction dates. By reading out these data, the particular sheet ofpaper or banknote can then be identified.

Among other things, this plays an important role in controlling thedestruction of paper sheets or individual banknotes that have not beenmanufactured properly and which are routed to a destruction device 24,particularly a shredder, subsequent to quality inspection. Theindividual sheets or banknotes slated for destruction can be identifiedby simple, noncontacting readout of data from the circuit right up tobefore the cutting tools of the shredder and can thus be traced inessentially uninterrupted fashion. In this manner, a nonauthorizedremoval of the security papers or banknotes slated for destruction canbe particularly reliably monitored. Alternatively or in addition, thebanknotes intended for destruction can be cancelled during theinspection or just before the shredder by writing the correspondinginformation into the memory of the banknote as already explained above.Alternatively, the entire contents of the memory can be deleted, e.g. byirradiating light from a UV flashlamp.

In addition, data relating to the processing or finishing steps that arebeing performed or will be performed on the security paper or on thebanknote can be stored in the circuit. In this case, particularly in thecontext of the quality assurance 23, one can, by reading out the storeddata, check whether the paper or the banknote has completed all requiredfinishing steps and whether they were executed in an orderly manner or afaulty manner.

During production, it can be particularly advantageous to use larger or,as the case may be, more or all of the memory portions of the chip, evenif, for a later application, only portions of the memory can be used andthese portions, in turn, can only be used by different user groups orfor different application purposes. In this case, the limited accessprivileges for the memory regions are not able to be permanentlyintroduced until after the chip has been successfully produced, by thecorresponding memory regions, for example, being permanently, e.g. bysevering fuses through burning, and appropriately designed such thatthey are protected against writing.

The invention can also be utilized to advantageous effect in thebanknote processing machines provided for quality assurance 23. In thesemachines, the finished banknotes are provided in stacks, drawn inindividually, transported along a transport path and inspected forvarious properties and security features. Undesirable malfunctions inwhich several banknotes are pulled in simultaneously and transportedfurther and/or a jam of banknotes arises, can occur repeatedly duringtransport through a machine such as this, however. In these cases, it isadvantageous if data, particularly the serial numbers, of the bank notesbeing drawn in each case are read out and stored in the machine controlduring their separation. These [data] can then be queried again uponcorrection of the malfunction and renewed set-up of the banknotes, whichhave been multiply drawn off or jammed, for renewed inspection, so thatany unauthorized removal of banknotes during the correction of themalfunction can be readily demonstrated.

Transport of Banknotes

A further important area of application for the invention lies in thearea of banknote transport.

By noncontacting readout of the circuit located on the particularbanknote using the apparatuses and methods described in greater detailbelow, banknotes can be identified simply and rapidly at arbitrarystages in their circulation. Data on the identity of the banknotes areregistered in a central monitoring device as applicable. These dataallow the path taken by a banknote during its circulation to bereconstructed.

The identification and, if need be, registration of the banknotes canalready take place during their manufacture, i.e. in the paper factory20 of FIG. 1 and/or in the banknote printing works 21, or not untiltheir circulation in the area of a central bank 25, a commercial bank26, and/or a business 30 in various apparatuses, such as processingmachines 31, money dispensing machines 27, money depositing machines 28,combined money depositing and money dispensing machines 29 or automaticmoney input devices 32. In general, it is also possible to installcorresponding scanning apparatuses in transport vehicles, whichapparatuses register the incoming and outgoing lots of banknotes.

As will be explained in detail in the section, “Disabling and Enablingof Banknotes”, a further advantage of the invention is achieved in thatthe circuit located on the paper or, as the case may be, on thebanknotes can be switched or written to in such a manner that the paperor the banknotes can be temporarily blocked from any use in machines,particularly from payment at machines. Release of the banknotes forfurther use in machines can first be undertaken by a central bank 25 orcommercial bank 26, preferentially by entering a secret password or bytriggering a particular operation in the circuit, shortly before thebanknotes are once again put into circulation.

Thefts or holdups in the area of paper and banknote manufacture or, asthe case may be, during the transport of finished banknotes from thebanknote printing works 21 to a central bank 25, and, as applicable,from it to a commercial bank 26, are thereby rendered unattractive,since disabled banknotes will be recognized as such at registers ormachines equipped with the corresponding reading devices, such that apayment or deposit will be refused. Should these banknotes again be putinto circulation again at another location, i.e. at locations at whichno communication with the circuit is possible, at least it will bepossible at a later time to recognize that the money was stolen, thuspotentially allowing valuable conclusions to be drawn.

The disabling of the banknotes described above is of particularadvantage for the automatic dispensing machines 27, automatic depositmachines 28, combined automatic deposit and dispensing machines 29 andcontainers described in greater detail below, and/or also for thebanknotes stored in transport vehicles, since any banknotes withdrawnillegally by break-in or sabotage and thus disabled will be readilyrecognized with the corresponding scanning apparatuses upon an attemptto place them in circulation.

Altogether, this variation of the invention is utilizable in variousapplications and case scenarios.

EXAMPLE 64

By way of a temporary cancellation and/or marking, it is thus alsopossible for the money stored in the particular devices to beacknowledged as non-interest-bearing property of the central bank 25,the so-called minimum reserve. Moreover, the registration of banknotesallows money flows of black money, stolen money or extorted money to bemonitored in simple fashion. For this purpose, e.g. when money is beingdisbursed, the identity of the banknotes disbursed, in particular theirserial numbers, together with data on the recipient, can be stored.Other applications are described more closely in the section “Disablingand Enabling of Banknotes”.

Containers for the Transport of Banknotes

In order to be able to utilize the invention in particularlyadvantageous manner during the transport of banknotes, specialcontainers for the transport of banknotes are provided. In this context,containers in the broader sense of the word are understood to mean alldevices in which banknotes can be brought together and transported. Thisincludes in particular safes, cassettes made of metal, plastic orcardboard, paper packagings, small sacks or bags made of paper orplastic, as well as bands. These containers are usually characterized inthat they can be closed in such a manner so as to render impossible anunrecognized external access without manipulation to the container.

The containers, particularly cassettes, can, for example, be providedwith an antenna and/or a reading, writing and/or checking unit, which isparticularly able to read, alter and/or check the stored contents of thecircuits of the banknotes located in the container.

The necessary apparatuses and methods, explained in exemplary detail inconjunction with the testing of banknotes in stacks further below, canalso be employed in such containers.

In this way, data which identify the banknotes, such as the serialnumber, can first be read in the container, such that—depending on theparticular application case - an identification of the banknotes slatedfor transport by means of an external inspection device can be omitted.The contents of the container are preferentially registered by thecontainer itself and, as necessary, checked so that monitoring of thecontents, in particular during transport, upon storage, upon handingover or upon transmission of the banknotes can be recognized by thecontainer itself without the need of having to open it for this purpose.This also applies particularly to automatic tellers, where banknotes canbe dispensed from cassettes and/or fed into these cassettes or othercassettes.

As a result of the fact that the contents of the cassettes can always bedetermined completely, correct taking of inventory can even be effectedduring a jam or a temporary error or, as applicable, failure of checkingand/or evaluation devices of the machine, without the need for thecassettes to be opened.

EXAMPLE 65

Moreover, provision can be made that data, for example relating to thecourse of transport, are written into the memories of the circuits bythe container's writing unit. In this manner, the transport route can berecorded in the banknotes.

In particular, the container can exhibit walls, e.g. ofelectrically-insulating material such as plastic, which, at least inpart, do not screen out electromagnetic fields, so that the circuits ofthe banknotes located in the container can also be read from, written toand/or checked from the outside by means of high-frequency alternatingfields.

Altogether, containers of this type allow the value, i.e. in particularthe total value and/or the denomination of all the individual banknoteslocated in the container, to be determined at any time. Duringtransmissions, uncertainty over the contents being handed over ortime-consuming recounting is eliminated. In this way, money transfers,the handling of money and the control of money flow are madefundamentally simpler, faster and, above all, more secure. In this way,the entire monetary cycle can be monitored in an effective fashion.

EXAMPLE 66

It is principally possible for the container itself, by means of itswriting device, to input this information, the data referring to thevalue and other data concerning the banknotes, such as transactionaland/or transport data, into some or all of the banknotes contained inthe container. However, additional or alternative provision can also bemade for the container itself to likewise store e.g. the total value ofthe banknotes stored in the container in a nonvolatile memory. If bothpossibilities are realized, a check for manipulation of the containercontents can also be conducted e.g. by a comparison of the indicationsof total value that are stored in the banknotes with those that arestored in the container.

EXAMPLE 67

For instance, in the case where the memory of the chip in the banknotesexhibits a write-only memory area that cannot be read out againdirectly, an examination of security against manipulation canconsequently occur such that the total value present in the memory ofthe container is sent to the banknote for examination. If this value isthe same as the value recorded in the banknote, it will be assumed thatthe contents of the container were not manipulated.

EXAMPLE 68

Security against undetected manipulation of the container contents canbe increased by using an asymmetrical PKI encryption method. For thispurpose, the banknote processing machine, by which the container isfilled, can, for example, write the total value of the containercontents into the banknotes and/or into the container. In the above, thetotal value prior to input is encrypted with a private key from thefilling location and can be decrypted with the public key of thebanknote processing machine performing the filling after receipt of thecontainer and, as applicable, any legally-occurring removal of thebanknotes contained therein. If the total value is written into both thebanknote and the container, it even becomes expedient to utilize twodifferent private keys for the encryption of the two numbers for thetotal value.

For instance, in the case where the chip exhibits a write-only memoryarea that cannot be read out again directly, but instead only respondsto a query as to whether a second transmitted value is identical to avalue written in initially, a check for manipulation can occur in thatthe potentially unencrypted total value present in the memory of thecontainer is sent to the banknote for examination. If this value is thesame as the potentially unencrypted value written into the banknote, thebanknote will report this fact to the emptying banknote processingmachine and the assumption will be that the contents of the containerwas not manipulated.

This method already constitutes a certain security against undetectedmanipulations, since, for an undetected removal, the data for thefalsified total value are written into both the container and to one ormore, preferentially all, of the banknotes. Nonetheless, security can beraised even further through the use of encryption. To accomplish this,the total value of the container is written into the banknotes in a)encrypted or b) unencrypted form, and to the containers in encryptedform. On the one hand, the recipient can now decrypt the total valuecontained in the container with the public key from the filling locationand thus determine the total value of the container at the time offilling. On the other hand, he can determine manipulations of the numberwritten into the container by comparison of the a) decrypted or b)still-encrypted number with the contents of the banknotes.

An attacker of the contents of the banknote transport containers willnot succeed by combinatorial means in removing a number of banknotes anddetermining values for the numbers in the banknotes and the containerwhich produce a positive comparative result subsequent to encryption.The only means with a promise of success for a thief would be to readout the encrypted numbers for the total value of a container of knowncontents and to empty another container with a higher total value suchthat its contents corresponded to that of the first one and to write thecorresponding data into all the banknotes as well as into the memory ofthe container.

EXAMPLE 69

Therefore, security here can be raised even further yet, by storingadditional information in the container and/or the banknotes, whichinformation also differs for two filled containers that have contents oflike value, and by likewise encrypting this information in the waydescribed above. For example, a combination of a portion or all of theserial numbers of the banknotes contained in the container can be usedfor such information.

EXAMPLE 70

A further form of container for the transport of banknotes then resultswhen a non-volatile memory of the container contains the data for aportion or all of the banknotes contained therein. For this purpose, forexample, the data of all of the banknotes that are slated to betransmitted to the container are sent to the container before, during orafter filling, either from the device filling the container or from thebanknotes themselves.

Upon inquiry by the device processing it, the container can now supplythe data of the banknotes which it contains and/or data written into thebanknotes which it contains. The container can, however, also be formedsuch that it accepts the data intended for writing into the banknotes,holds them in its memory and that the intermediately-stored data are notwritten into the corresponding banknotes until removal of the banknotescontained in the container.

The communication with the container can take place via a transmissionmethod that is different from the communication with the banknote; inthis context, e.g. considerably higher transmission speeds can beachieved than by direct communication with the banknote.

Additionally or alternatively, the container can also exhibit anidentical transmission method, such as communication with the banknote;however provision can then preferentially be made to reliably preventdirect communication with the banknotes located in the container inorder to unequivocally clarify responsibility for the sending andreceiving of information. In this case, a reading device can communicatewith a banknote, a stack of banknotes or a container in the same way.

For two reasons, this makes possible communication with a significantlylarger number of banknotes than is possible in unpacked form. On the onehand, because the capabilities and the reliability of anti-collisionmethods limit the number of banknotes that are reliably addressablewithout collision in a given time period.

However, the container, which knows the relevant data of the banknotesit contains, can transmit these data to a readout device in a suitableform precluding all forms of collision. On the other hand, because thetransport of energy for generating the supply voltage in very largequantities of banknotes is significantly more difficult to manage thanthe transport of energy for operating the container.

EXAMPLE 71

FIG. 38 shows an example of a container 350 according to the invention.Specifically, cassette 350 has a housing 351 of known type with anoptional lockable opening 352 for the insertion of banknotes 1. In thiscontext, the banknotes can be placed upon a base plate 353. It can e.g.be designed to be adjustable in height within the cassette. According tothe invention, cassette 350 contains at least one test unit 354 foroptical and/or inductive and/or capacitive reading and/or writing ofdata from or to the electrical circuits of the banknotes 1.

In this context, this checking unit 350 can be designed as indicated inthe aforementioned examples and in the chapter on stack processing. Itcan exhibit a row of inductive coupling antennas in the direction ofheight H, for example, that can read data from or write it into thebanknote chips. Alternatively or additionally, the floor of the cassettehousing 351 or the base plate 353 can also exhibit a further test unit,for example.

Band with an Electrical Circuit

The properties of the containers for transport of banknotes according tothe invention can also be applied in particular to the disposablecontainers, so-called safe bags, used in the transport of valuables.Explicit reference is also made to the meaningful application of theaforementioned properties to containers as separating agents, i.e. theuse as separator cards, such as header cards during the processing ofdeposits.

As an alternative to the variations described above, e.g. the band arealso preferentially provided with an integrated electrical circuit, i.e.a chip.

EXAMPLE 72

An exemplary embodiment of such a band is shown in top view in FIG. 39and in side view in FIG. 40. Individual banknotes 1 are enclosed by theband 40 and thus held together as a small packet 43. Band 40 is designedas a strip made of flexible material, e.g. made of paper or a plasticfoil, which adapts to the shape of small packet 43 and surrounds it.Band 40 is provided with a circuit 3, preferentially a chip. Beyondthat, a transmission device 42 for energy transmission and/or exchangeof information with circuit 3 is incorporated on band 40.

Circuit 3 can already be integrated into or applied to band 40 duringmanufacture. Alternatively, circuit 3 can also first be applied duringthe banding process, during which a small prepared packet 43 is providedwith the band 40, or else applied to band 40 subsequently. In thisvariation of the invention, circuit 3 is preferentially applied onto abacking film 41, which is applied, preferentially glued, to band 40. Theband can also exhibit another arbitrary form, e.g. at least represent anenvelopment of the small packet that is so full that no banknotes can beremoved from the banded small packet.

Transmitting unit 42, in this case an antenna coil, can likewise beapplied onto backing film 41 and applied onto band 40 along with circuit3. Preferentially, backing films that exhibit no stability of their ownare used, so that they are inevitably destroyed upon removal. In thiscase, unauthorized removal of backing film 42 provided with circuit 3or, as the case may be, transmitting unit 42, leads to theirdestruction, such that very good protection against manipulations isprovided.

As already mentioned, circuit 3 and/or transmitting unit 42 can bedirectly printed onto the band 40 in an alternative embodiment. Verygood protection against manipulations is also given in this variation,since circuit 3 or the transmitting unit 42 can practically only beremoved from band 40 with self destruction.

EXAMPLE 73

A further embodiment of the invention is depicted in FIG. 41. In thisexample, the two terminal regions 44 and 45 of band 40 are gluedtogether with a backing film 41, upon which circuit 3 and transmissionunit 42 are located. Unauthorized opening of band 40 by removal ofbacking film 41 would have as a consequence the destruction of same,including circuit 3 and transmitting unit 42. Any manipulations aretherefore readily visible and can, in addition, be easily demonstratedby checking the functionality of the circuit.

EXAMPLE 74

FIGS. 42 and 43 show a further embodiment of the band 40 according tothe invention in top view or side view, as the case may be. Circuit 3,situated on band 40, is provided with a transmitting unit 42, which runsalong band 40 and extends over several sides of the banded small packet43. In the example shown, transmitting unit 42, designed as a closedcoil antenna, extends across four sides of the small packet, in that itsurrounds said packet like a closed loop.

In principle, provision can be made for chip 3 on the band 40 toexchange data with banknotes 1 in small packet 43, which likewiseexhibit a chip. The resultant advantages correspond to those which werealready described above in connection with containers for the transportof banknotes.

Analogous to the integrated circuits in or on banknotes, chip 3 on band40 is designed for the storage and/or processing of data. In particular,information about small packet 43 and/or individual banknotes 1 in smallpacket 43 are stored in chip 3 of band 40. In particular, thisinformation concerns the transport course of a small packet, e.g. thetime at which small packet 43 was at a particular location. Areconstruction of the transport can be performed from the data stored inchip 3.

The data for the banknotes assigned to the band can also be contained inchip 3 of band 40. As long as the small packet is enclosed by the band,the data exchange can also preferentially only occur via chip 3 of band40, which has great simplification and an increased read-security as aconsequence, since now, each individual chip on the banknotes in thesmall packet no longer needs to be queried separately. The data of theindividual banknotes are preferentially made available in a storagedevice, if necessary, after each individual banknote has been separatedand checked. In this process, banknotes with a defective chip can alsobe captured and taken into account in the band's information.

A band with an electrical circuit can be particularly advantageouslyemployed if the data storage and transmission described in the sectionon containers for the transport of banknotes are incorporated into saidband and communication takes place exclusively via the band's chip. Inbanded small packets of e.g. 100 banknotes, the number of banknotesaddressable in one process step could be increased by a factor of up to100, without generating additional time, effort and costs for moresophisticated anti-collision algorithms.

In a further variation of application, the serial number of chip 3situated on the band is brought in as a unique feature for establishingor checking the identity of the band.

Before going into the preferred embodiments of processing apparatuses,etc., a plurality of concepts according to the invention shall now bedescribed, which can be applied to great advantage in said apparatuses,but also in the other apparatuses described in this application.

Stack Processing

As already mentioned repeatedly in the above, a particular advantage ofusing banknotes with a chip or an electrical circuit is that stackprocessing is made possible. In this context, stack processing isunderstood to mean that a stack of banknotes is processed. However,stack processing also makes it possible to process a “stack” consistingof just one individual banknote as well. This means that one or morebanknotes are made available in a stack and e.g. one or more propertiesof the banknotes are preferentially measured and/or determined in astack. In particular, such properties also concern the total number ofbanknotes, the value of the individual banknotes and/or the total valueof all banknotes and/or their serial numbers or other individual datathat are specific and unique to the particular banknote. This methodthus makes possible particularly simple determination of total value inthe stack, even for banknotes of differing denominations.

In comparison to the known methods, in which e.g. to determine the valueof a stack of banknotes, the banknotes must first be separated andsubsequently individually assessed with respect to their denomination,the method according to the invention brings enormous simplification andtime-savings to stack measurements.

In particular, stack processing is understood to mean the case that, inorder to measure and/or then consequently determine the properties ofthe banknotes, measurement signals are obtained, and, as applicable,subsequently evaluated via communication with the banknotes in thestack. In this context, communication is understood to mean a signaltransmission from the banknote, in particular the banknote's chip, to anexternal measurement or evaluation device, as the case may be and/or asignal transmission from the measurement or evaluation device, as thecase may be, to the banknote, in particular the banknote's chip.Therefore, aside from the determination of banknote properties, the casecan also be meant where signals are transmitted to the banknotes in thestack in order e.g. to write data to the storage area of the chips ofthe individual banknotes.

In this context, the communication will preferentially be noncontacting.This can e.g. be achieved by inductive and/or capacitive and/or opticaland/or acoustical and/or microwave coupling. By way of example, thephotodiodes named above can be used in the banknote for an opticalcoupling. As already portrayed above, transponders, such as a coilcoupled to the chip, capacitive surfaces or antenna arrangements forinductive coupling or capacitive coupling, as the case may be, inbanknote paper are incorporated in and/or applied to the banknote forinductive or capacitive coupling, as the case may be. By way of example,banknotes with a capacitively coupled transponder chip can thus exhibitconductive regions on the front and/or back side, such as in the form ofhologram strips containing metallic layers. The stacking of several suchbanknotes leads to a serial connection of capacitors, which, by way ofexample, can also be used for simultaneous energy supply to theindividual banknotes during measurement. If e.g. each banknote exhibitsan electrically conductive region, the distance between the conductiveregions of two adjacent banknotes will thus be largely independent ofthe position in which the banknotes find themselves. This makes possibleparticularly readily reproducible coupling in the stack.

For inductive, capacitive or optical coupling, as the case may be, thesender and/or receiver are preferentially arranged in the same region ofthe banknote relative to a corner and/or edge, independently of thebanknote's denomination. As a result, by orientating a stack ofbanknotes in relation to this corner or edge, effective coupling of theindividual banknotes becomes possible even for stacks with banknotes ofdifferent denominations.

Furthermore, the properties of the individual banknotes arepreferentially measured one after another or, as the case may be, thebanknote chips are written onto one after another. For one, that canmean that, although several or all of the stacked banknotes emit ameasurement signal, only the measurement signal of an individualbanknote will be picked up and evaluated in an associated evaluationdevice at any given time. It can also mean, though, that the banknotesare only activated individually one after another to emit a measurementsignal. As mentioned above, the activation of the banknotes and thesubsequent emission of a measurement signal to an external evaluationdevice preferentially occurs according to an inductive, capacitive,optical, acoustical and/or microwave coupling method, whereby either thesame or different coupling methods are used for activation and signalemission.

Another method for activating banknotes in a stack individually canconsist of individually activating the banknotes individually by meansof pointwise illumination of a photodiode integrated into the banknote,as has been described in greater detail in the above. For this purpose,the photodiode is preferentially arranged on an edge of the banknote andthe light coming from one side is irradiated onto the stack of banknotesand, one after another, onto the photodiodes of the individualbanknotes. Via an optical interface, the irradiated light will cause thebanknote's chip to emit, by means of a transmitter that is connected tothe chip by a signal line, a response signal in response to the opticalstimulus. The response signal can e.g. likewise occur through activationof a light-emitting element, such as an LED, whereby the light emittedfrom said element, e.g. via the photodiode through which theexcitational light is irradiated into, or though a further photodiodeintegrated in the banknote paper, is sent outwards to an evaluationdevice. Alternatively, a controllable see-through window with e.g.alternating transmission or polarization is also possible as an outputmedium. Alternatively or additionally, the response signal can also beemitted by means of inductive and/or capacitive coupling.

EXAMPLE 75

FIGS. 44 and 45 show an example of an associated measuring device, i.e.reading device 220 with optical coupling in a view from above (FIG. 44)and from the side (FIG. 45). In this context, for example, the banknotesexhibit two photodiodes 226, 227 incorporated in the banknote paper,both of which are connected to a roughly centrally-incorporated chip 3by means of a non-depicted optical interface. In this context, chip 228can be activated by irradiation from both photodiodes 226 and 227 andsends the response light into the other particular photodiode by meansof a non-depicted optical transmitter, such as an LED. In this case itis preferable that one LED apiece be present for each of photodiodes226, 227, which can be selectively stimulated to emit light by chip 3.In order to avoid the necessity of a targeted deflection of the emittedlight beam to either the one or the other photodiode, the response lightcan also be sent out to both photodiodes 226, 227, in particular by asingle LED. As an alternative to the two photodiodes 226, 227, it isalso possible to use a continuous photodiode, upon which the chip isapplied, e.g. glued or hot-pressed, so that in-coupling and out-couplingof the data does indeed take place on the common photodiode, but inputand output are performed separately at the two ends. A separation of thesignals can be accomplished in known fashion by data systems technologyor with optical filters.

The device 220 comprises a base surface 221 and two side walls 222, 223.Banknotes 1 are laid down on the base surface 221 in flush stacks andoriented in relation to left side wall 222. A light source, such as alaser 224, adjustable in height H, is arranged in or on left side wall222. For this purpose, e.g. laser diodes 224 are used that generate afocal point in the area of left [bank]note edge 225 in a magnitudecorresponding to the diameter of the left photodiode 226 of e.g.0.03-0.08 mm.

For measuring the banknote properties, laser 224 is moved by automaticdrive from below to height H, so that the light beam emitted by itsuccessively passes over the output region 225 of photodiode 226 of allbanknotes 1 in the stack once. In this way, the LEDs of banknotes 1 aresuccessively activated by means of chip 3 and in each case emit lightthrough the other photodiode 227, which light is captured by a detector229 that is integrated in or on the inner side of the right side wall223 allocating the stack of banknotes. In this context, detector 229exhibits e.g. a CCD surface, the dimensions of which extend over roughlythe entire height H of the potential stack region.

Whereas in the above, the case was described where laser 224 is moved toheight H, the successively-occurring focusing of the laser beams on theindividual photodiodes 226 can also be realized with a stationary laserby means of correspondingly-adjustable imaging optics and/or in thatseveral laser diodes are distributively arranged in side wall 222 atheight H, which diodes can be selectively activated successively to emitlight.

Moreover, it is also not imperative to work with a punctiform focalpoint. Since banknotes 1 are usually not in exactly flush orientation inthe stack, photodiode 226, which is roughly punctiform in cross section,of an individual banknote 1 would then be struck better if the lightbeam were focused in the shape of a strip, in other words, if the lightbeam extended in a direction roughly perpendicular to stack direction Hand to the illuminated sides of the banknotes 225. In this case, thestimulus light can be reliably focused on the individual photodiodes 226without the effort of additional post-adjustment for individualbanknotes 1, even in case of positional shifts of the individualbanknotes 1 in the stack relative to one another and/or in case ofstacks with mixed denominations, where the photodiodes 226 lie indifferent positions on the side of the illuminated banknotes 225.

In these and also in all other cases where an optical response signal isgenerated for measurement, the denomination of the emitting banknotes 1can be determined in simple fashion by frequency analysis, specificallyvia recognition of the specific wavelength and/or modulation pattern ofthe optical response signal captured e.g. in detector 229, provided thelight frequencies emitted by the banknotes are designed to benominal-value-specific.

EXAMPLE 76

FIG. 46 shows an example of a modified version of measuring device 220from FIGS. 44 and 45 in a view from the side. Measuring device 220′serves to examine banknotes by the stack, with both optical, as well asinductive and/or capacitive coupling elements, as described by way ofexample by means of FIG. 23. Coupling of the banknotes by inductivemeans or capacitive means, as the case may be, requires a lesseradjustment effort than optical coupling, e.g. as per FIGS. 44, 45, sincethe inductive coupling or capacitive coupling, as the case may be, isless dependent upon the exact placement of the banknotes in the stack.By having readout of the banknotes take place by optical means, however,this process, on account of the negligible interaction of theout-coupling signals of the individual banknotes in the stack, is morereadily possible than e.g. with the help of the anti-collision methoddescribed below for inductive coupling. Although analogous action istherefore also advantageous for a capacitive coupling, the followingwill deal specifically with an inductive coupling.

The measuring device 220′ of FIG. 46 distinguishes itself from those ofFIGS. 44 and 45 in that it exhibits a device 251 for generating aninductive alternating field, such as a coil 251 as coupling antenna,instead of a light source 224. In this context, coil 251 preferentiallyextends essentially parallel to the stack area 221 for banknotes 1 andis so designed that the magnetic field lines generated run essentiallyperpendicular to the surface of coil 251. Although a variation is indeeddepicted in which coil 251 is mounted above the stack of banknotes, butsaid coil would preferentially be present on or in the base surface 221,upon which the banknotes 1 to be checked are stacked.

In order to supply the stacked banknotes 1, which can be manufactured inaccordance with FIG. 23, in the measuring device 220′ with energy, analternating magnetic field is generated through coil 251 at a frequencypreferred for the RFID system 3, 250 of the banknotes 1 for an effectivecoupling of 13.56 mHz. The field strength of this magnetic field will bemultiple times greater than that which would be necessary for the energysupply of an individual banknote 1.

In addition, it is possible to send data to chips 3 in the banknotes 1by modulating the alternating magnetic field. In this context, allbanknotes can be addressed simultaneously, i.e. be coupled.

The high field strength required, as well as the strong inductiveinteraction between the individual banknotes in the stack, hamper thesending back of data from chips 3 to the reading device 220′. Avariation to the solution of this problem consists in a load modulationof the chip. Preferred, however, is the depicted variation with opticalsignal out-coupling, by which the signal generated by the LED of thebanknotes is directed through photodiodes 226 a, 227 a to the edge ofthe banknotes. One advantage of sending the signal to two opposite edgesvia photodiodes 226 a, 227 a is that the orientation of the banknotes inthe stack is inconsequential to the measurement. That means e.g. thatdevice 220′ can also check a stack in which banknotes 1 with the frontside pointing up and down are present simultaneously.

The out-coupled optical signals are received by a sensor 229, which ispreferentially a CCD sensor 229 with a rectilinear resolution, so that aplurality of optical signals can be simultaneously received andevaluated in parallel.

The transmission of data by the emission of optical signals can beinitiated via control data that are sent to the chips via the inductivecoupling. The separate, parallel evaluation of the signals sent from theindividual banknotes 1 in the stack via the photodiodes 227 a makespossible the simultaneous readout, processing and storage of the datafrom all banknotes 1 in a stack.

EXAMPLE 77

The following is a variation for reading devices with inductivecoupling. Although the coupling antenna 251 is preferentially arrangedabove or, as the case may be, below the stack of banknotes in theembodiment according to FIG. 46, provision can also be made for it to besituated on the side of a stack of banknotes 1 to be examined. Inanalogy to the variation according to FIG. 45, provision can e.g. alsobe made for such a coupling antenna to be height-adjustable in directionH lateral to the stack of banknotes, exactly like light source 224,which functions as an optical coupling antenna. Alternatively, provisioncan also again be made for several coupling antennas arranged in rowsthat extend in direction H, i.e. roughly perpendicular to the stack area221.

In this case, according to the height of the banknote stack to bechecked, the stack measurement can be performed by moving the couplingantenna up in height or, as the case may be, by successive activation ofthe coupling antennas arranged in rows, such that only a limited numberof banknotes of the stack are supplied with sufficient energy andaddressed in each case. In this context, to the extent that the fieldstrength of the coupling antennas is selected to be sufficiently small,it can, in the ideal case, be achieved that only one individualbanknote, i.e. the banknote closest to the coupling antenna, isaddressed at a time. Otherwise, it can at least be achieved that only alimited number of banknotes in a stack are addressed simultaneously, asa result of which any potentially necessary anti-collision measures aresimpler and faster to execute on account of the lower number oftransponders coupled in. In other words, agents are thus introduced to“displace” the external checking unit spatially, specificallytranslationally, in order to be able to address other transponders inthe stack in temporal succession.

Moreover, in comparison to optical coupling, this variation of inductivecoupling provides the advantage of lesser adjustment effort and placesfewer demands on exact orientation and positioning of the banknotes inthe stack.

EXAMPLE 78

As an alternative or to supplement the preceding examples, provision canalso be made that the banknotes 1 are additionally provided with adevice for inductive out-coupling. Thus, chips 3 can e.g. exhibit adevice for the generation of a load modulation. This makes possible thereadout of chip data from individual, non-stacked banknotes 1 by meansof inductive coupling over a stack measuring device, i.e. stack readingdevice, even beyond those described by way of example in the above. Thisis e.g. an advantage for mobile reading devices or also in [cash]registers, as will be more closely described in the following sections.

If signal coupling is possible using both inductive as well as opticalmeans, various methods of selection or, as the case may be, switchingbetween the optical coupling and the inductive coupling are conceivable.For one, it is conceivable that both methods are simultaneouslyactivated or will become activated, upon stimulation of the banknotes,e.g. through inductive coupling by means of coil 251. In this case, bothtypes of reading devices, i.e. with inductive sensors or, as the casemay be, optical sensors, can be employed without the need for aswitching procedure or the like. However, this variation has thedisadvantage that the parallel operation of both coupling methodsincreases the energy requirement for chips 3.

Therefore, only one of the two inherently possible methods ispreferentially selected. Within this meaning, e.g. a selection orswitching between inductive coupling, i.e. load modulation, and opticalcoupling can take place by way of a specific control signal, which issent to chip 3. In addition, it is possible to define one of the twomethods as preferential, which method is always active initially, assoon as chip 3 is supplied with energy. In this case, when the methodnot defined as preferential is used, switching by means of a controlsignal sent to the chip 3 would likewise take place. Such a controlsignal would preferentially be cryptographically encrypted to only allowreadout in reading devices 220′ intended for this purpose.

A further variation for activation or, as the case may be, switchingconsists in using specific switch-on sequences or codes which are notcontained in normal data transmission from the measuring device to thechip. These can, for example, be realized in that, for a bit encrypting,specific codes that are not contained in the transmission of “1-”, “0-”,“Start-” and “Stop-”signals are reserved and can therefore come intoexclusive use for switching the transmission method.

In this case, but also particularly in the case where, aside fromoptical and inductive coupling, capacitive signal transmission from thechip to the reading device is possible, the chips will be prompted byspecific control signals to use a coupling method specific to theparticular signal.

Alternatively, it is also conceivable that many different transmissionmethods are available to the reading devices 220′, and that theselection of one of the transmission methods occurs in dependency upon acontrol signal that is transmitted to reading devices 220′ from chip 3.

EXAMPLE 79

Moreover, it is possible that a unique banknote identifier, such as theserial number, is initially read out, preferentially in parallel, fromall or a partial quantity of several banknotes during a stackmeasurement in order to then, in a further step, be able to addressindividual banknotes via their serial numbers in a targeted manner.However, this approach is also principally applicable to the testing ofindividual banknotes.

EXAMPLE 80

Banknotes with photodiodes, e.g. of LISA plastic, as was previouslydescribed in relation to the FIGS. 23, 25, and 26, by way of example,are particularly suited to stack measurement.

In this context, for both the use of an LED 235 as well as for theluminous surface 291, the emitted light intensity is altered, i.e.modulated, in order to transmit data from banknote 1 to an externalreading device 229. In that context, the simplest type of modulation ispreferentially employed, that is, the turning-on and turning-off of alight signal, such as so-called “on-off keying” for a 100% ASKmodulation (amplitude keying), as it is e.g. described in Finkenzeller'sbook: “RFID-Handbuch”, pp. 156 to 164, 2000, Carl Hanser Verlag MunichVienna, ISBN 3-446-21278-7.

However, multi-step modulation, e.g. corresponding to bit encrypting viagray shades, is also possible for both the (large-surface) LED 235, aswell as for the luminous surface 291.

The readout of the optically modulated data can occur e.g. via a sensor229, as it was described with reference to FIGS. 44, 45 or, as the casemay be, 46. Sensor 229 can be both a CCD field (a charge-coupleddevice), as well as a line sensor (e.g. a photodiode array).

Photodiode 226, 227, 226 a, 227 a, 227′ is consequently primarily usedfor the transmission of data, in the form of modulated light signals, toa reading device 220′.

A particular property of luminescent materials consists in that anattenuation of the emitted radiation with a defined time constant isobserved upon turning off the absorbed radiation. This effect alsoappears during the modulation of the absorbed radiation for the purposeof data transmission.

A further idea therefore consists in capturing and analyzing theattenuation behavior of the radiation emitted from the fluorescent dyes286 by a reading device, such as sensors 229. When using other materialsor illuminants for the purpose of forging a banknote 1, a differentattenuation behavior at the pulse edges is to be expected. This makes itis possible to recognize forgeries of this type and to handle thebanknote 1 accordingly.

A banknote 1 according to the invention, as was described in the aboveby way of example, is addressed in the stack e.g. inductively orcapacitively and responds through the photodiode. Particularly in thesingled condition, provision can be made to likewise address sameinductively or capacitively, but also responds in this way. Therefore,this variation represents a banknote 1 with two interfacepossibilities/response possibilities.

EXAMPLE 81

As was explained, according to the invention, it is also possible thatbanknotes are read out in the stack by means of inductive coupling. Inthis context, it has been shown that the resonance frequency oftransponders in the stack follows the following function:$f_{total} = \frac{f_{{indiv}.}}{\sqrt{N}}$

Here, N is the number of transponders, i.e. banknotes 1 with chip 3 inthe stack, findiv. is the resonance frequency of an individualtransponder and ftotal is the resulting resonance frequency. Optimalenergy coupling in the banknote stack can then be achieved if themeasuring device transmits on the resulting resonance frequency ftotal.

However, in the case of large stacks, the resulting resonance frequencyftotal assumes very low values. At a resonance frequency of 21 MHz of anindividual transponder, for example, 2.1 MHz result for a stack of 100banknotes 1 and but 0.66 MHz result for a stack of 1000 banknotes 1 withchip 3.

In order to keep the processing speed in a stack low, it is, however,desirable to select the working frequency of the measuring device ashigh as possible, preferentially e.g. at 13.56 MHz. The maximumachievable resonance frequency of an individual transponder 3 with acoil consisting of at least one turn, as a rule, however, is not higherthan 30 MHz. Higher resonance frequencies can not be realized in asimple manner due to the inductance values that are predetermined by thedesign as well as the additionally present parasitic capacitances.

An increase in the resulting resonance frequency by increasing theresonance frequencies of the individual transponders in the stack isthus possible in principle, although it is not practicable in all cases.

In order to be able to nonetheless address a stack of transponders 3outside the resulting resonance frequency ftotal, high magnetic fieldstrengths prove to be expedient. Beyond that, it is advantageous toadjust the diameter of the transmitting antenna, such as transmittingantenna 251 in FIG. 46, to the diameter of the antenna in the banknote,such as of coil 250 in the banknote 1 according to FIG. 23, so as tooptimize the magnetic coupling between transmitting antenna 252 andtransponders 3.

The course of the field strength in a coil in the X direction can e.g.be calculated according to Finkenzeller's book: “RFID-Handbook”, pp. 61ff., 2000, Carl Hanser Verlag Munich Vienna, ISBN 3-446-21278-7. Here,it can be recognized that at a distance x, that is larger than theradius of the coil, the magnetic field becomes strongly inhomogeneousand rapidly loses intensity. By contrast, with very large stacks of e.g.1000 banknotes, the height of the stack is already greater than the coilradius. A homogenous magnetic field can thus no longer be readilygenerated by means of a simple arrangement of coils.

An improvement can be achieved if the volume taken up by the banknotestack exhibits higher magnetic permeability than the surrounding space,i.e. normally the air. To accomplish this, the banknotes are equippedwith a magnetic permeability, as was already described previously.

EXAMPLE 82

A reading device 280 for the readout of inductively coupled banknotes 1with magnetic paper in the stack is depicted in FIG. 47. The manufactureand properties of such a magnetic paper have already been dealt with indetail in the above. For readout of the banknotes in the stack, ahomogenous field is generated that penetrates through the stack. By wayof example, the stack is therefore brought into a ferrite core 28 1. Inprinciple, soft magnetic materials are also possible, but the ferritecore 281 is preferentially formed of a hard magnetic material, inparticular ferrite or amorphous or, as the case may be, nanocrystallinemetal. Here, materials with greater permeability are preferentiallyemployed.

A coil 251 generates a strong, high-frequency magnetic field 282. Themagnetic field lines 282 are directed through the magnetic paper ofbanknotes 1 and subsequently through ferrite core 281, so that the fieldlines run completely through the ferrite core and, in that context, atleast in the region of the stacked banknotes 1, a homogenous magneticfield is developed, which preferentially traverses the stack verticallyin direction X.

In this context, ferrite core 281 is preferentially led along either thenarrow sides or the longitudinal sides of banknotes 1 so that it forms aring that is open in the Y direction, i.e. in a direction Yperpendicular to the plane of the sheet in FIG. 47. In this way, readingdevice 280 can very easily be filled with a stack of banknotes 1 in theY direction and also be emptied again so that machine processing ispossible with no trouble.

A preferable, successively-occurring activation of the individualbanknotes in a stack can also be realized in advantageous manner in thatthe banknotes reciprocally activate themselves one after another. Inthis case, after the activation cascade has been launched throughactivation of an initial banknote of the stack, all others canconsequently reciprocally activate themselves without furtherintervention from the outside. In this context, it is advantageous toconduct the activation by means of light, as described in the followingmore precisely, and to feed the energy necessary for this into the stackof the banknotes by means of electromagnetic waves. Naturally, thebanknotes require corresponding receiving elements to be able to take upthe energy made available by means of the electromagnetic waves.

EXAMPLE 83

A particularly preferential example for such an internal activation isthat the first-activated, e.g. lowermost banknote of the stack sends outlight that is captured by the second-lowermost banknote, which, afterthis activation, in turn sends out light that is received by thethird-lowermost banknote, etc.. In particular, the banknote will, inpreferential manner, thus exhibit an optical transmitter and an opticalreceiver in such a case as well. In this context, the activatedbanknotes preferentially each send out a coded light signal, which e.g.contains information about the own value, or as the case may be, thetotal value of all hitherto activated banknotes. Consequently, only thelight signal sent out by the last-activated banknote in the stack stillneeds to be measured to obtain information, for example, about the totalvalue of the stack.

Therefore, e.g. only the underside of the lowermost banknote isirradiated with light from the outside to activate this lowermostbanknote and the light signal sent out by the last-activated banknote,i.e. the light exiting from the upper side of the uppermost banknote ofthe stack, is captured as a measurement signal. In this context, thetransmitter and the receiver of the banknotes are preferentially mountedon opposite sides of the banknote paper. In the case of measurement inthe aforementioned manner, they should be stacked in like orientationand location. If, on the other hand, a banknote can be activated throughillumination from both the underside as well as from the upper side, andparticularly also in the case that it sends out light both upwardly aswell as downwardly, the aforementioned method can thus also be carriedout independent of the location and orientation of the individualbanknotes in the stack. In this context, the energy supply of theindividual banknotes advantageously takes place through an electrical ormagnetic field, with corresponding receiving devices in the banknotes.

Through optical feedback to respective preceding (operable) banknotes,it is possible here, in the absence of such a reply, to presumedefective banknotes. This can also be demonstrated particularly simplyin that, for an interruption of the activation cascade, no outgoinglight signal of the last banknote that is measurable as such isgenerated, and thus can [not] be measured.

This variation offers the possibility to be able to simply recognizewhether defective banknotes are present in a stack. In this case, thesignal chain is interrupted and thus, at the other end, no outgoingsignal appears or, as the case may be, not the expected outgoing signalas for an uninterrupted chain.

EXAMPLE 84

With reference to FIG. 37, a measurement method for banknotes is nowdescribed, in which energy can be transmitted between adjacent banknotesin the stack by optical means.

Specifically, an electromagnetic wave 402, that can be visible light,but also IR radiation and UV radiation, is irradiated onto photocell 400of the uppermost banknote 1 in the stack. A current is generated in this[banknote] through the external photoelectric effect. With this current,chip 3 is then be supplied with energy via contact circuit 403, in whichcase typical voltages in chip 3 lie in the range of up to 5 V. Afterchip 3 of the uppermost banknote 1 has been supplied with energy, itwill send out light by means of laser diode 401 on the underside, whichin turn will be received by photocell 400 situated on the upper side ofthe banknote 1 lying directly thereunder, to in turn supply its chipwith energy. This [chip] will then, in analogous fashion, transmitenergy to the banknote lying thereunder, etc..

In this context, the light source for illuminating a photocell 400 ofone of the outermost banknotes 1 in the stack can, by way of example, beintegrated in a deposit surface of a reading device, upon which thebanknotes are deposited in a stack, as is e.g. described in analogousfashion for capacitive coupling in relation to FIG. 48.

To achieve positional independence, photocell 400 and laser diode 401are preferentially arranged in the center of the banknote surface and/orparticularly mounted on the two sides of individual banknotes 1.

In this context, data transmission to an external reading device cantake place by all of the methods described within the scope of thepresent invention. However, the data are preferentially out-coupled inanother way, such as by electromagnetic means. Alternatively however,the chip can also transmit data to the outside by means ofpiezoelectrical coupling or also surface waves.

Moreover, the laser diode 401 can not only be used for the energy supplyof an adjacent banknote 1, but also for data transmission to this[banknote], if it sends out a modulated e.g. pulsed light signal 404that, aside from energy, also transmits data.

Furthermore, provision can be made that chip 3 first transmits itsinformation to the outside to the reading device before it, by means oflight-emitting diode 6, supplies energy to and activates chip 3 ofbanknote 1 situated thereunder. Consequently, chips 3 of banknote 1 canbe operated sequentially. As a result of this, e.g. anticollisionproblems are able to be avoided in a simple way even in the case ofinductive out-coupling.

Although in the above, in particular, the case was described that theproperties of individual banknotes are measured one after another, it isalso conceivable to simultaneously measure the properties of several, inparticular of all banknotes of the stack or, as the case may be, tosimultaneously write to the chips of several banknotes. In this context,the coupling methods can be designed as analog inductive, capacitive andor optical.

EXAMPLE 85

In the case of an optical coupling for the use of banknotes withphotodiodes that e.g. lead into a side edge of the banknote paper, it ise.g. possible, through illumination of the entire surface of thebanknotes from the side, to illuminate the photodiodes of several, inparticular of all banknotes, and to consequently activate these almostsimultaneously. Through the stimulation, they are stimulated to send outlight, and the light sent out from the banknotes analyzed as an opticalresponse signal. In the case of the device according to FIGS. 44 and 45,this could for example be realized in that, in the presence of severallaser diodes, which are distributively arranged in the sidewall 222 atheight H, these are not successively, but rather simultaneouslyactivated to send out light.

In addition, illumination of the entire surface of the banknote stack inthe region of side edges 225 can continue to already suffice here,without the need to focus the illuminating light on the individualphotodiodes in each case. This simplifies the arrangement. In thiscontext, during evaluation of the measurement signals of detector 229,the signals that are not generated through the response light exitingout of photodiodes 227, but instead through the illuminating light oflight source 224 that is not in-coupled into photodiodes 226, are, bymeans of reference measurement, considered disturbing signals. In aparticularly simple case, this can occur in that the response signals ofindividual banknotes 1 each send out light at a different wavelengththan the illumination light.

A particular advantage of the use described in more detail in thepreceding examples by way of example of an optical coupling between theevaluation device and the banknote consists in that undesiredinfluencing of the individual signals does not occur. This means e.g.that the light signals, which are sent out from the individualbanknotes, are not altered by the presence of the light signals of theother banknotes. For example, if upon activation of all banknotes of thestack to send out light simultaneously, the light sent out from allbanknotes is measured summed-up by means of a detector, particularly atthe same point in time or in the same time period, the properties of thebanknote stack can thus be determined through evaluation of the totalsignal.

If the light radiation sent out e.g. for all banknotes, regardless ofdenomination, has the same intensity and/or if the light radiation sentout for different denominations has a different frequency or, as thecase may be, a different frequency spectrum, conclusions on the numberof banknotes can be drawn through evaluation of the measured totalintensity or, as the case may be, on the basis of frequency analysis ofthe measured intensity, conclusions can also be drawn on the number ofbanknotes per denomination and thus on the total value of the banknotestack.

In addition, it is to be particularly emphasized that the precedingembodiments of the optical communications by means of photodiodes forstack measurement can also be advantageously employed for banknoteswithout a chip.

EXAMPLE 86

Thus, e.g. in place of an LED controlled through the banknote chip, e.g.a color filter can also be used that only lets through and/or reflects aportion of the irradiated wavelengths. If e.g. as in FIGS. 44 and 45,the photodiode goes through the banknote paper, a corresponding colorfilter can e.g. be incorporated in the photodiode, which, uponirradiation with white light, e.g. only allows a red wavelength rangethrough. In particular, the individual denominations will exhibitfilters with different transmission properties.

In the case of an optical coupling with and without a chip, visibleand/or ultraviolet and/or infrared wavelengths can be used in thiscontext.

While, it was moreover explained in the above, to radiate the opticalresponse signal at the [bank]note edge, it can then also be out-coupledperpendicularly through such a transparent window if the banknote paperexhibits transparent windows. To this end, e.g. a reflective and/or adispersive element is incorporated in a foil of which the transparentwindow consists. This reflective or, as the case may be, dispersiveelement will out-couple light, which, for example, is irradiated intothe plane of the paper by means of a photodiode, perpendicular to theplane of the paper through the transparent window.

EXAMPLE 87

If the coupling does not take place optically, but rather inductively orcapacitively, a reciprocal disturbance can arise during simultaneousdata transmission from several transmitters to one receiver if nosuitable countermeasures are taken. That means e.g. that in the casewhen the chips of several banknotes stimulate their inductive or, as thecase may be, capacitive elements to send out signals simultaneously, theindividual signals can no longer be clearly differentiated by a readingdevice of the evaluation device.

However, this problem can be solved by the use of anticollision methods,as known in the realm of RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) systemsand described e.g. in Finkenzeller's book: “RFID-Handbuch”, pp. 170-192,2000, Carl Hanser Verlag Munich Vienna, ISBN 3-446-21278-7. In thecustomary manner, an “anticollision method” is thus understood to mean amethod, which enables the troublefree handling of a case of multipleaccess to several transponders. It has become evident in that context,that for the stack measurement of sheet material with a chip accordingto the invention, depending on the case of application, various of theknown anticollision methods can be applied particularly advantageously.

Time Division Multiple Access [TDMA] method is especially suited forcounting and value determination in the stack, in which [method] theentire available transmission channel capacity is temporally dividedamong the participants, i.e. all banknote transponders situated withinrange. The dynamic S-ALOHA method or, as the case may be, the dynamicbinary search method are particularly preferred in this context.

EXAMPLE 88

In the event, though, that the transponders of the banknotes ofdifferent denominations are adjusted to different transmissionfrequencies, the Time Division Multiple Access method is alsopreferentially used to determine if counterfeit banknotes or banknotesof an undesired denomination are contained in the stack. Through afrequency analysis of the summed-up total signal, one may, even in thecase of simultaneous reception of signals from several banknotes, drawconclusions about which and, optionally, how manybanknotes-denominations are situated in the stack.

A general advantage of the variation where there are banknotes ofdifferent coupling frequencies, is that, by way of example, there isless overlap of the individual signals for an inductive coupling, ande.g. a temporal separation of the signals through differentresponse-times and/or response-time-periods can also be possible independence on the frequency. Consequently, this advantage results for astack measurement even if there are different delays in the reactiontimes in response to the signals received from the outside for differentbanknotes, e.g. even for the same coupling frequencies.

Likewise, a lesser signal overlap can e.g. be realized in that theantenna position and/or antenna orientation on the banknote paper variesfrom banknote to banknote. Thus, provision can be made that the positionof e.g. dipole antennas varies through rotation by certain angularamounts for different banknotes. This variation can e.g. also bedenomination-specific.

Usually, banknotes in the stack can initially only be addressedsimultaneously via an inductive or, as the case may be, capacitivecoupling. Through a control signal designed for that purpose, thebanknotes can be induced to transmit their serial number or anothersignal that uniquely identifies the banknotes to the reading device. Assoon as e.g. the serial number of the individual banknotes in the stackis known, it is also possible to address the individual banknotes intargeted fashion through appropriate control signals, in that they areindividually selected and addressed e.g. through the transmission of theserial number as a parameter for the control signal. All other banknotesthat do not correspond to this parameter of the control signal, willthen usually not react or at least react differently, i.e. send outother response signals.

It is also possible that the serial numbers of all, or at least aportion, of the banknotes of a stack were already determined by othermeans prior to the stack measurement. This can e.g. then be the case if,in a banknote processing apparatus, through the readout of chip data oralso by other means as well, e.g. by scanning of the print image, theserial numbers of the individual banknotes are known, which aresubsequently stacked as a stack and e.g. placed in cassettes. Thebanknotes can then be addressed in targeted fashion and individually byappropriate reading devices, such as in the banknote processingapparatus or the cassette, in a simple way that avoid anticollisionproblems.

In the case of operation of a stack of capacitively coupled banknotescorresponding to the equivalent circuit diagram of FIG. 49, increasingdistance from the beginning of the stack, i.e. from the place whereenergy is fed in, leads to a rapid decline in the available supplyvoltage. In the case of stacks with a few tens or hundreds of banknotes,a difference of one or more powers of ten can arise between the voltagefed in at the beginning of the stack and the available voltage (voltagetransmission) at the last banknote in the stack. However, the voltagetransmission is strongly dependent on the current uptake of theindividual chips in the banknotes, as well as upon the input capacitanceof the chips. Thus, the voltage transmission differs by one or morepowers of ten, depending on whether all chips in the stack are switchedon or switched off.

EXAMPLE 89

Therefore, a further idea of the present invention consists in, thattransponder chips 3, which were already able to be read out, areswitched to a currentless, so-called “power-saving” or “sleep” mode.These are initially predominantly banknotes 1 at the beginning of thechain, i.e. at the shortest distance to the stimulating energy source,since there is always sufficient energy for operation of the transponderchip 3 available here. By switching off the transponder chips 3 thathave been read, banknotes 1 at the end of the stack can subsequentlyalso obtain sufficient energy for operation.

In this context, the voltage to be supplied at the entrance of the stackshould preferentially be selected higher, by the factor of the voltagetransmission, than the minimum supply voltage of an individualtransponder chip 3. For the previously-named example, a voltage of atleast some 200 V would thus have to be fed in at the entrance of thestack to still be able to supply the last transponder of the stack with1.8 V.

To ensure the operation of all transponders, independent of their randomposition in the stack, chips 3 are preferentially equipped with avoltage control, such as a serial control unit, which can cover thisvoltage range.

In the case of higher working frequencies, the difference in the voltagetransmission between switched-on and switched-off transponder chipsbecomes increasingly less on account of the high pass properties of sucha banknote stack. In the case of sufficiently high operating frequency,it is therefore no longer necessary to switch off the transponder chips.It is, however, to be noted that, in the case of higher frequencies,increasingly higher currents also occur at the entrance of the stack,which, on the other hand, would lead to a larger dimensioning of thereading devices.

If the full operational voltage, i.e. a sufficiently high voltage, isapplied at the entrance of the banknote stack in order to supply thelast transponder in the stack with energy as well, all transponders inthe stack are thereby thus placed in a ready-to-operate state. Theattempt to communicate with the transponders in the stack initiallyleads to a multiple access of the transponders to the reading device. Tobe able to address the transponders individually, these [transponders]must initially be “singled” by the reading device by means of ananticollision algorithm.

In this context, for a large number of transponders, correspondinglymany iterations of the anticollision algorithm used must be run through.Even if it is assumed in this context that a transponder, once selectedand read, is deactivated and no longer takes part in the followingiteration loops, a considerable number of iterations still arise for alarge number of simultaneously active transponders, e.g. over 600iterations in the case of approx. 100 transponders, i.e. banknotes inthe stack. This leads to a high expenditure of time to select a singletransponder.

To optimally shorten the time necessary for readout of the transpondersin a stack, a further idea of the present invention consists in placingonly a few transponders of a stack in an active condition at thebeginning of the scanning process, and to activate further transpondersonly at a later point in time. This is preferentially achieved in thatthe supply voltage applied to the stack is gradually increased duringthe measurement process.

EXAMPLE 90

Preferentially, therefore, a stack of banknotes 3 is initially fed witha voltage Umin that corresponds to the response sensitivity of theindividual transponders in the stack, such as 1.8 V. In this way, onlysome few transponders at the beginning of the stack are supplied withsufficient energy for operation. The selection of individualtransponders by means of an anticollision algorithm can then be carriedout with very few iteration loops. The transponders that have alreadybeen read out are then deactivated and no longer take part in anyfurther communications, e.g. further iterations. Thus, each transponderthat has emitted its feedback can be separated from the energy supplythrough an electronic circuit on the chip or in a second circuit onbanknote 1 connected with such chip. Therefore, it is preferentially notonly switched “mute” for a certain time, but taken out of operationcompletely instead. In this way it is achieved that the inductanceand/or capacitance and the ohmic load of chip 3 is taken out of thechain for a certain time, or preferentially, until the energy supply ofthe stack is switched off, e.g. by disabling a transistor. As a result,its influence on the energy supply of the bordering transponders alsodiminishes, i.e. these are now better supplied with energy. After eachcompleted interaction with a transponder in the stack, the voltage atthe entrance to the stack is increased by a value of ΔU, for whichpreferentially applies:${\Delta\quad U} = {\frac{U_{\max} - U_{\min}}{N}.}$

Here, Umax is the maximum input voltage on the stack which is necessaryto still address the last transponder in the stack. Umax is the minimumsupply voltage of an individual transponder chip and N is the number oftransponders in the stack.

By successively increasing the voltage at the entrance to the stack, itis ensured that, little by little, even the transponder chips lyingfurther below in the stack are supplied with sufficient energy until alltransponder chips have finally been read.

Provided the voltage can be balanced finely enough, it is thus evenpossible to manage without any anticollision, i.e. it is always only oneindividual chip in the stack that responds in each case. The describedmethod of the gradual increase of the energy sent thus allows circuitsin chip 3 to be provided without energy regulation in the entrance,which leads to a simplification of the integrated circuits in comparisonto the previously described variation with voltage regulation in chip 3.The method of the separation of the energy supply according to theinvention is more simply realizable than a control of the input voltagein chip 3.

EXAMPLE 91

FIG. 48 shows, in schematic fashion, an example of a reading device 220″for the capacitive coupling of banknotes 1 with chip 3 which exhibitcapacitive coupling surfaces 256, as were described by way of example inrelation to FIGS. 30, 31. Reading device 220″ exhibits a deposit surface221, upon which a stack of banknotes 1 are automatically or manuallydeposited. An electrode 263 is permanently integrated in the basesurface. Electrode 263 can preferentially exhibit two coupling surfaces,the dimensions of which essentially correspond to coupling surfaces 256of banknote 1. In this context, deposit surface 221 can be executed withat least a lateral boundaries 222, to thus simplify the positioning ofbanknotes 1 with respect to electrode 263 of reading device 220″. Inthis context, this apparatus can also serve to test individual,non-stacked banknotes 1, which must be placed on depositi surface 221for readout. An arrangement of this type in particular allows thereadout of smaller stacks of e.g. 1 to 30 banknotes.

A constant supply voltage can in fact be applied, but a supply voltage,which e.g. continuously or intermittently increases during the ongoingmeasurement process in the aforementioned way, will be preferentiallyapplied to the two electrodes. Through the self-increasing supplyvoltage, an increasingly larger number of banknotes in the stack can beaddressed.

An advantage of a capacitive coupling in comparison to an inductivecoupling consists in that it leads to fewer cases of mutual influencingof the individual banknote transponders in a stack among themselves andthus to an analytic more accurately predictable effect. Among otherthings, this variation is also of advantage for a stack measurement inautomatic tellers in particular, specifically in their input pocket andin cassettes.

EXAMPLE 92

A further idea for capacitive coupling consists of inserting, in a stackof banknotes 1 with capacitive coupling surfaces 256, at least oneelectrode into the stack, in order to have to address fewer banknotessimultaneously. Thus, e.g. in the case of device 220″ according to FIG.48, there can be one or more retractable and extensible electrodes,which are sufficiently thin—in particular at their front region as well,which is intended to be extended into a banknote stack to be tested—inorder to not fold or jam the banknotes. These can e.g. be incorporatedat predetermined heights [with respect] to base surface 221, in order tomove such an electrode into the stack for measurement when stacking alarge number of banknotes e.g. all 100 banknotes.

EXAMPLE 93

FIG. 49 shows, by way of example, the electrical equivalent circuitdiagram of a stack with two capacitively coupled banknotes 1 stacked ontop of one another, where the circuit depicted in the first, leftbanknote 1 in FIG. 49, is also present for the merely schematicallyindicated, second banknote 1. The circuit diagram of the stack cannaturally also be expanded in the form of a series connection ofquadripoles (No. 1 in FIG. 49) for a larger number of banknotes 1 in thestack. If two banknotes are stacked on top of one another, a capacitanceCk thus arises between any two electrodes presently lying on top of oneanother, i.e. coupling surfaces 256. By mounting two electrodes 256 onone banknote side, two coupling capacitors are thus available to eachbanknote 1. For chip 3, however, the two coupling capacitances appear asa serial connection of the individual capacitances, for which ffreasononly ½ Ck is effective in the equivalent circuit diagram. Thecapacitance Cp represents the sum of the input capacitance oftransponder chip 3 and all parasitic capacitances and RL [represents]the input resistance of chip 3.

This system of the stacking of banknotes according to FIG. 30 isprincipally operable. However, it exhibits the disadvantage that theavailable supply voltage decreases very quickly toward the end of thechain, i.e. banknotes 1 in the stack. As a result, very high voltagesmust be fed in at the entrance of the stack in order to make sufficientenergy available for the operation of a chip 3 at the end of the stackas well.

EXAMPLE 94

According to a further idea, an inductance Lp of defined value isconnected in parallel to parasitic capacitance Cp in order to improveenergy transmission in the stack.

A valid equivalent circuit diagram for this purpose, illustrated inanalogy to FIG. 49, is depicted in FIG. 50. The dashed line with thereference character “3” identifies the region of the influencingvariables of chip 3. In this context, the value of inductance Lp ispreferentially selected such that the phase angle of the i2 currentgenerated through parasitic capacitance Cp is compensated within thestack through inductance Lp. A typical value for Lp amounts to roughly0.3 μH. In this context, when dimensioning, care must be taken that theindividual elements in the stack are capacitively coupled among oneanother and reciprocally influence each other in respect of theireffect. The common resonance frequency fres of the banknote, determinedby the elements Cp and Lp (parallel oscillating circuit), therefore doesnot correspond to the operating frequency fb of the stack, but ratherlies about one or more powers of ten higher.

The selected circuit configuration yields a bandpass filter of the Nthorder for a stack of N banknotes 1. A stack of 100 banknotes 1corresponds to a bandpass filter of the 100th order; a stack of 1000banknotes 1 to a bandpass filter of the 1000th order. As simulatedcalculations show, by switching in the inductance Lp, significantlybetter properties with respect to energy transmission result than forthe arrangement according to FIG. 49. The improved arrangement isdepicted in FIG. 50.

EXAMPLE 95

If a banknote outside of the stack is read by means of capacitivecoupling, Cp and Lp together with coupling capacitance Ck form anoscillating circuit. Since the resultant resonant frequency of thisoscillating circuit lies some powers of ten above the usually employedworking frequency for capacitively coupled systems, the readout ofbanknote 1 outside of the stack is usually impaired by the additionalinductance Lp.

Therefore provision is made to design the inductance Lp such that it canbe switched on or switched off, e.g. by chip 3, according to theoperating state of the banknote 1. The inductance Lp is preferentiallyin a switched off state in the initial state of the chip, so that it isdesigned for the examination of one individual [bank]note in particular.If banknote 1 is read out in a stack, the inductance Lp will thusconnected to it additionally by chip 3. Alternatively, the oppositeembodiment, i.e. that inductance Lp is not switched off until there is apending examination of an individual note, is naturally possible aswell. It is also conceivable that the inductance is switched on orswitched off prior to a stack measurement or an individual notemeasurement in each case and again switched back to the original stateafter the measurement. Various methods of switching are conceivable inthis context.

It is also possible to have repeated sending-out of a special command,i.e. control signal, in order to successively induce chips 1 in a stackto switch on inductance Lp. Energy transmission is successivelyincreased, e.g. corresponding to the previously described method, toreach all the banknotes starting at the beginning of the stack.

The use of different frequency ranges to read out chips 3 in the stackor outside of the stack is an alternative or addition to this. Thus e.g.a frequency of 50 MHz to read out one individual banknote 1 over acertain distance, and another frequency of e.g. 13.56 MHz to read out inthe stack, can be used. Here, chips 3 have a unit to recognize thefrequency of the signal being applied. If an operating frequency isdetected, which is used for the reading in the stack, the inductance Lpis thus automatically connected to it additionally in order to optimizeenergy transmission in the stack. In this way, energy transmission inthe stack is successively built up from the beginning of the stack afterapplication of a reading signal.

A further alternative or supplement consists in the evaluation of otherphysical parameters in chip 3. By way of example, it is thusconceivable, for instance, to equip chip 3 with optical sensors whichmust be addressed additionally for reading outside of the stack toprevent an inductance Lp from being connected additionally. Thus,provision can be made e.g. that reading in the stack is usuallyconducted in a darkened environment, i.e. a largely lighttight, closedhousing in order to permit inductance Lp to be switched on. In this way,energy transmission in the stack is once again successively built fromthe beginning of the stack after application of a reading signal.

E.g. the following two methods are possible for realizing the necessaryinductance Lp.

EXAMPLE 96

The inductance Lp can either be applied to the chip 3 through galvanicdeposition (“coil-on-chip”) or integrated on the chip itself(“on-silicon”) or realized externally on the banknote. Alternatively,inductance Lp is simulated by an electronic circuit in chip 3. Circuitswhich allow a rotation of the phase angle of i2 current are suited forthis purpose. The so-called “gyrator circuit” is suited for thispurpose.

One arrangement for communication with chip 3 in the stack fundamentallycomprises an energy source as the sending unit, i.e. specifically, avoltage source and an associated modulator that permits data to betransferred to chips 3 of the banknotes, as well as a receiving unit tobe able to receive the data sent back from chips 3.

In the case of associated reading devices, the sending unit and thereceiving unit can use the same coupling unit, i.e. antenna that servesboth for transmission of data and for reception of data. This can,however, make expensive circuits necessary in order to decouple thevarious signals from one another.

EXAMPLE 97

A further idea of the present invention, which serves for theoptimization of the arrangements for the reception of the transmitteddata, therefore consists in separating the sending unit, specificallythe voltage source provided for it, and the receiving unit from oneanother and equipping each of them with their own coupling units asantennas.

An example for a possible embodiment is depicted in FIG. 51. Here,energy and data are coupled in on one side, in FIG. 5 1, for example,the upper side in the stack of banknotes 1. In this context, forin-coupling, device 270 comprises an in-coupling electrode 271 in theform of a pair of capacitive coupling surfaces 271, which preferentiallycorrespond in form to the dimensions of coupling surfaces 256 of thebanknotes 1, as depicted in FIGS. 30 and 31. The coupling surfaces 271are connected with a unit 272 with a voltage source and a modulator.

The readout of data sent from banknotes 1, such as their serial number,takes place through coupling on the opposite side of the stack.Receiving unit 273 likewise exhibits two capacitive coupling surfaces271 a, which are connected to an evaluation unit 273. Optionally, afurther receiving unit 274 can also be incorporated parallel to thevoltage source 272, as depicted in FIG. 51.

EXAMPLE 98

Based on the technical method of the preceding chapters, ananticollision method can be realized which permits the readout of datathat is uniquely associated with a specific chip 3, such as the serialnumber of the chip, for instance, within only one iteration loop. Themethod is based on bit-wise arbitration of the serial data stream.

To this end, chips 3 preferentially have a receiving unit, by means ofwhich data, e.g. from the reading device 270 with a voltage source and amodulator according to FIG. 51, can be detected and evaluated. Further,chips 3 can preferentially have a circuit for load modulation. In thiscontext, both ohmic load modulation as well as capacitive loadmodulation can be used. In addition, chips 3 have a unique serial numberor the like, which is only used by one individual banknote in each case.

According to the invention, a bit coding with the properties RZ (returnto zero), such as a so-called Manchester code or modified Miller code,for instance, is preferentially used for the data transfer from chips 3to the receiving device. The anticollision method described in thefollowing can in fact also be conducted with NRZ (non return to zero)encrypting, but RZ codings are preferred on account of easierdetectability of a collision that has occurred. Details on themodulation method and coding method can, by way of example, be takenfrom Finkenzeller's book [manual]: “RFID-Handbuch”, 2002, Carl HanserVerlag Munich Vienna, ISBN 3-446-22071-2, pp. 189-198.

In addition, the chips 3 can have a detection apparatus, which permitsindividual chip 3, to recognize whether, during the transmission of alogical “0” or “1” to reading device 270, a signal that is logicallyinverse in each case—i.e. “1” or “0”—is simultaneously transmittedthrough a further chip 3 in the banknote stack. To this end, the inputvoltage of chip 3 is evaluated preferentially, since it is influencedwithin the entire stack by the load modulation of an arbitrary chip 3 inthe stack, such that the load modulation of each individual chip 3 inthe stack can be detected by both a reading device 270 as well as by allother chips 3 in a banknote stack.

According to a further idea, the banknotes 1 in the stack are initiallyall called upon, through a specific signal or command of reading device270, e.g. through modulation of the energy fed into the stack, to beginwith the synchronous transmission of their unique serial numbers toreading device 270. During the transmission of the own data, chips 3continually detect the input voltage upon signals of other chips 3 inthe stack. If, during the transmission of a “1” or “0” bit, a collisionis determined through detection of the signal at the entrance to chip 3,a portion of chips 3 then immediately breaks off the transmission oftheir own serial numbers. The type of coding, as well as the definitionof the algorithm to be applied can be used to define which bit value isconsidered dominant in each case. In case, by way of example, the bitvalue “1” is defined as dominant, then all chips with a “0” in thecorresponding location will immediately break off further transmissionof their own serial number in the case of a collision. This method ispreferentially executed for each bit to be transferred, so that,ultimately, only a single chip 3 in the stack can transmit a completeserial number.

To be able to successively read out the serial numbers of all chips 3 ina stack, the following two methods can be employed, for example:

As soon as a chip has successfully transmitted its own serial number, itswitches to an operating state, in which it no longer reacts to afurther signal or command to transmit the serial number, so that it willno longer take part in subsequent iterations.

For very large stacks of e.g. 100 to 1000 banknotes 1, it is conceivablethat a load modulation signal generated by the last banknotes in thestack can no longer be detected by banknotes 1 at the beginning of thestack, i.e. near voltage source 271. Then, it will potentially no longerbe readily possible for chips 3 to switch off automatically.

For this case, a command is therefore preferentially provided, by meansof which a chip 3, by sending out its serial number, as a rule theserial number which was recognized in the preceding iteration step, isswitched, by reading device 270, into an operating state in which it nolonger reacts to a further signal or command to transmit the serialnumber.

EXAMPLE 99

Numerous variations are conceivable in relation to the aforementionedembodiments.

One possibility consists of mounting an additional receiving deviceparallel to the voltage source at the beginning of the stack, as wasdescribed in relation to FIG. 51. Through comparison of the, potentiallydifferent, sum signals that appear at the entrance and the exit of thestack in the case of load modulation, problems in the reciprocaldetection of the banknote—e.g. through signals that are too weak onaccount of spacing that is too large in the stack—can be recognized andcountermeasures initiated.

EXAMPLE 100

Aside from the preferential variation according to the invention offeeding the stack with energy from only one side through a voltagesource, the possibility also exists to supply the stack with energy fromboth sides via the capacitive coupling.

The procedure described results in that, through the readout and (self-)switching-off of chip 3, the number of the simultaneously “sending”chips 3 is successively reduced during the processing of the stack. Inthe initial phase, on account of the large number of chips 3 that remainactive, the influence of the load modulation can cause the supplyvoltage of chips 3 at the end of the stack to “break down” during thedata transmission of the chips 3. According to the invention, chips 3should therefore immediately break off the data transmission in thecurrent iteration and wait for the next signal or command to transfertheir serial number if they fall below a minimum voltage, such asthrough detection of the input level or, in the extreme case, theappearance of a “power-on-reset”. However, in case e.g. at a later pointin time of the processing of the stack, there are still correspondinglyfew chips 3 participating in the data transmission, chips 3 at the endof the stack can also completely transmit their serial number without abreakdown of the supply voltage.

EXAMPLE 101

The method described is based on the participating chips 3 themselvesworking through the anticollision. However, methods are known accordingto which a reading device carry outs recognition of an anticollision andworks through a corresponding algorithm. One such method, by way ofexample, is the binary search tree, the so-called “binary search”, asexplained, for example, in Finkenzeller's book: “RFID-Handbuch”, 2002,Carl Hanser Verlag Munich Vienna, ISBN 3-446-22071-2, pp. 189-198.

A very advantageous variation according to a further idea of the presentinvention can consist in combining both methods, i.e. the previouslydescribed arbitration method e.g. with such a binary search tree. Thisis then particularly expedient if, on the basis of the high number ofthe chips in the stack of e.g. 100 to 1000 banknotes, it can no longerbe assumed that all participating chips can still detect each other. Inthis context, the advantage of the combination with an external readingdevice for anticollision detection is that it can be constructed oftechnically more elaborate circuitry in order to also recognize weakersignals.

According to a variation, provision can therefore be made to use asuitable code for reliable anticollision detection by a reading device,such as a Manchester code. Furthermore, according to the invention,provision can be made to combine both methods such that a pre-selectionis already made through the autonomous switching-off of the chips,remaining collisions can be resolved through the reading device by meansof the method of the binary search tree.

EXAMPLE 102

Particularly in the above-described case of inductive and/or capacitivecoupling, it can already suffice if, in a measurement process, not allbanknotes are recognized, but rather only a portion of the banknotes ofa stack are recognized or, as the case may be, examined in noncontactingfashion. Thus, e.g. recognition of an individual illegal banknotes thatare, e.g. stolen money or extorted money, can suffice so that a quantityof banknotes to be examined is recognized as suspicious. Anidentification of all banknotes is not necessary in this case. Thisapplies likewise for the case where merely the existence of banknotes,which are e.g. hidden in a suitcase or the like, needs to beascertained. In the case of a customs inspection it can, by way ofexample, suffice, if the banknotes per se are detected, particularly ina large amount and/or with a higher total value. This likewise does notrequire each individual note to be identified.

It is to be emphasized that the previously mentioned optical, inductiveand/or capacitive coupling methods can also be used to carry out asignal transmission to and/or from individual banknotes. Although theaforementioned coupling methods are thus specially designed for stackprocessing, they can also be used for the processing of individual, e.g.singled banknotes, for example, in the processing apparatuses describedin this application as well, such as the banknote sorting apparatusesand/or counting apparatuses and/or money depositing machines and/ormoney dispensing machines and/or registers and/or manual testingdevices.

EXAMPLE 103

As was already mentioned, the supply of an electrical circuit of abanknote by means of a piezoelectrical element, that likewise is lacomponent of the banknote, offers particular advantages in theprocessing of stacked banknotes.

In that context, e.g. a transducer generates a continuous high-frequencyultrasonic signal for the voltage supply of the electrical circuit. Theequally-frequent alternating voltage that thus occurs on the piezoelement is rectified and serves as the supply voltage of the electricalcircuit. The frequency of the alternating voltage tapped by the piezoelement can simultaneously be used as the reference frequency forgeneration of the clock frequency on the microchip.

In a further development of the invention, at least a portion of theenergy is directed to an input capacitor, as a result of which it ischarged. After a time that is sufficient to completely charge the inputcapacitor in the microchip, the ultrasonic signal of the sensor isswitched off. This switching-off is recognized by the microchip,whereupon it now generates an ultrasonic signal itself to therebytransmit data to the sensor. Here, the same piezoelectrical couplingelement can be used as was previously employed for reception of thesignal from the interrogation device.

For data transmission from the sensor to the electrical circuit it isalso possible to alter, i.e. to modulate, the physical parameters of theultrasonic wave, i.e. amplitude, frequency or phase position to the tactof the data to be transmitted. In this context, known methods, such asASK (amplitude shift keying), FSK (frequency shift keying) and PSK(phase shift keying) can be used, as described e.g. in Finkenzeller'sbook: “RFID-Handbuch”, pp. 156-164, 2000, Carl Hanser Verlag MunichVienna, ISBN 3-446-21278-7. To design the circuit technology formodulation of the signals in the electrical circuit of the banknote assimply as possible, amplitude shift keying (ASK) is particularly suited.

If an ultrasonic wave encounters a piezoelectrical element, a portion ofthe ultrasonic wave passes through the piezoelectrical elementunhindered (transmission). A small portion of the acoustic wave isabsorbed by the elements and converted into electrical energy. Anothersmall portion of the acoustic wave is reflected from the element andthus returns to the ultrasonic transmitter (sensor).

From the known reversibility of the piezoelectrical effect, results arepercussion of the electrical properties of the electrical circuitconnected to the piezoelectrical element on the reflection properties ofthe piezoelectrical element. Thus, through alteration of the inputimpedance of the connected electrical circuit, the ultrasonic wavereflected from the piezoelectrical element can be altered in magnitudeand phase position. Through the alteration of the input impedance of theelectrical circuit in the tact of the data to be transmitted, areflection modulation (backscatter modulation) can be generated that canbe interpreted through the sensor, i.e. demodulated.

The reflected signal is now received at the sensor, parallel to thegeneration of a continuous ultrasonic signal. Through the modulation ofthe reflected signal with data, a frequency spectrum arises that islikewise received through the sensor. After filtering out of thefrequency of the continuous ultrasonic signal, the received frequencyspectrum can be easily demodulated and from it, the sent data recovered.

A second possibility consists in sending out a very high-frequencyinterrogation pulse alongside the continuous ultrasonic signal.Differences in the amplitude and the phase position of the receivedreflections of two successive interrogation impulses allow conclusionsto be drawn on the alterations, which are due to modulation, of thereflection properties of the electrical circuits. Starting from a“reference reflection” in the unmodulated state of the electricalcircuit, alterations of the amplitude and phase of the reflectedinterrogation impulse can be interpreted as logical “0” and “1”sequences. Expediently, the frequency of the interrogation impulse isselected such that it represents a multiple of the bit rate of the datatransmission.

The method according to the invention is further developed in suchfashion that the electrical circuit sends data back to the sensor on asecond ultrasonic frequency via the piezoelectrical element. The use ofa second piezoelectrical element is also possible.

EXAMPLE 104

In a further development according to the invention, banknotes arearranged in a stack, with a layering sequence of paper-piezoelement-paper arises. If such a layering sequence is scanned with ahigh-frequency ultrasonic interrogation pulse, the layering sequence canthen be reconstructed from the reflections. The attainable resolution isdependent upon the frequency of the interrogation pulse and, in the caseof suitable frequency, lies in the order of the banknote thickness:Ultrasonic Frequency Axial Resolution 10 MHz 160 μm 20 MHz  80 μm 50 MHz 30 μm 75 MHz  20 μm

In this way, individual banknotes, whose thickness usually lies in therange of 80 μm, can readily be differentiated.

In a further development of detection in the stack according to theinvention, the banknotes are initially stimulated with a continuous lowfrequency ultrasonic signal in order to ensure the voltage supply of theelectrical circuits. The reflection coefficient of the individual layersis determined with a second, high-frequency interrogation pulse. Throughthe electrical circuits in the banknotes, the reflection factor of thepiezoelectrical element is now modulated in the tact of the data to betransmitted (e.g. serial number and denomination of the banknote). As aresult of the different delay time of the signals reflected from theindividual banknotes in the stack, the assignment of a signal to thespatial position of the banknote in the stack is possible. Through theinterpretation of the individual, temporally-altered reflection factorsas data stream, it is possible to carry out a data transmission to thesensor of all banknotes simultaneously (in parallel). Through thedefined relation of the individual reflections to the actual locationalposition of the piezo element in the stack, a precise assignment of thereceived data to the individual banknotes in the stack is possible. Thesequence of the received serial numbers thus represents their actualsequence in the stack.

A further possibility consists in the focusing of ultrasonic waves. Inthis way it is possible to focus an interrogation pulse on a singlebanknote in a stack, for instance, and to read it out in targetedfashion. Through the focusing of the continuous ultrasonic signalserving the energy supply of the electrical circuits onto an individualbanknote, it is further possible to activate individual electricalcircuits in targeted fashion. All other electrical circuits in a stackare without voltage supply at this time and thus inactive.

EXAMPLE 105

As an alternative to the previously described method, it is alsopossible to realize the addressing or the detection in the transmissionmode.

EXAMPLE 106

In a further development, provision is made to supply the electricalcircuits with energy through a continuous ultrasonic signal. This signalis also used for the transmission of data from the sensor to theelectrical circuit.

For data transmission from the electrical circuit to the sensor, anelectrical, magnetic or electromagnetic coupling is used. To this end,the electrical circuit generates, by means of an oscillation apparatus,a high-frequency voltage, which is fed into a corresponding couplingelement. In this context, this is preferentially a frequency in themicrowave range (e.g. 2.45 GHz), the coupling element can alreadyreadily be a component of the electrical circuit at these frequencies,in case it is designed as an integrated circuit.

EXAMPLE 107

Good propagation (low damping) of ultrasonic waves is only present insolid materials or fluids. In gases (air), one must reckon with poordispersal (high damping). Therefore, in the case of a furtherdevelopment, a design is provided, wherein the ultrasonic transmitter(sensor) is followed by an adaptation layer, upon which the banknote orbanknotes slated to be assessed follow. These, in turn, are followed byan adaptation layer, and finally an acoustical absorber.

In this context, the banknotes are pressed between the two adaptationlayers in a mechanical apparatus with as great a force as possible inorder to achieve the best acoustic coupling possible between theindividual layers. The acoustic absorber, which is likewise connected tothe banknote stack via an adaptation layer, is located on the sideopposite the ultrasonic transmitter (sensor). The object of thisabsorber is to completely absorb the acoustic wave going through thebanknote stack in order to suppress interfering reflections.

Particular advantages result in the described use of ultrasound for theevaluation of electrical circuits of banknotes, in particular in thecase of application in metallic housings, such as in the describedtransportation containers or in vaults.

As described above, the piezoelectrical element can be present as a foilof piezoelectrical material. If both sides of the sheet are at leastpartially attenuated metallically for the formation of the electrodes,then the filament can bend in the rhythm of the electrical voltagethrough application of voltage to the two metallic electrodes. In thiscontext, it sends out sonic waves.

In this context, however, the fact that, when high-frequency ultrasonicsignals are used, the oscillations of the foil no longer lie in therange of audibility, so that reproduction of an audible signal throughthe foil is not possible, is problematic in certain cases.

To avoid this, the energy supply and the response of the piezo foil aredecoupled so that the irradiation of the necessary energy for theoperation of the piezo foil does not disturb the response of the piezofoil. As already described, this takes place e.g. such that anintegrated circuit is used additionally, which [integrated circuit] isconductively connected with the electrode of the piezo foil, isintegrated in the vicinity of the sheet or preferentially on the sheetitself. To this end, the irradiated frequency can lie above the band ofaudibility and even in the range of up to a few gigahertz. Theirradiated energy is directed to the circuit and there elicits aresponse at a different frequency.

Alternatively, the energy is stored for a short time and subsequentlyused for the generation of a time-shifted response. The advantage ofthis embodiment lies in the fact that irradiation of the energy andreception of the response do not interfere with one another and that,thus, better and more reliable operation of the circuit becomespossible.

In another embodiment, the energy can also be irradiated as ultrasound.The sonic waves would then have to be picked up and rectified by aportion of the piezo foil acting as microphone, after which theresulting voltage could be used for operation of a circuit. This wouldthen elicit the response of the piezo foil. A corresponding mode ofoperation would also be possible through the irradiation of light onto aphotoelectric cell instead of ultrasound.

By way of example, the response of the electrical circuit is nowdirected onto the electrodes on the one side of the foil on the onehand, and onto the metal layer on the other side of the foil on theother hand. This makes it possible to make the response of the circuitaudible or, as the case may be, demonstrable through vibrations of thesheet in the audible range or in the ultrasonic range.

EXAMPLE 108

In an exemplary embodiment, a sequence of data is stored in theelectrical circuit, the transmission of which [data] onto the piezoelement or, as the case may be, the piezo foil, generates a tone or asound. This can comprise a simple sinus tone, but also speech, sounds,etc.. By way of example, a rustling sound, which copies the crackling ofa real banknote and is reproduced sufficiently loudly, can be generated.Likewise, comprehensible messages can be generated, e.g. thedenomination of the banknote: 10

, etc.. The sonic oscillations emitted by the piezo element can compriseaudible tones and/or represent sonic waves that can be demonstrated bythe use of measurement technology. By way of example, an ultrasonicsignal can be generated that is picked up by a microphone and tested viaa control circuit.

In a simplified embodiment, provision is made for a high-frequencyelectromagnetic signal to be received by means of an antenna. The energyobtained in this context is used for the operation of a frequencygenerator, the output of which is connected with the piezo element,which e.g. emits a tone that corresponds to the high-frequencyelectromagnetic signal or, as the case may be, is derived from same.Provision can also be made that the electrical circuit contains storedinformation which determines frequency and/or intensity of the signals,which are emitted by the piezo element or, as the case may be, by thepiezo foil.

Through irradiation from sonic waves, the piezo element or, as the casemay be, by the piezo foil is stimulated to give off electrical voltages.The corresponding electrical charge is used to supply the integratedcircuit and induces it, in accordance with the stored data, to send outa message, work off a program, etc. and to modulate a signal on thepiezo foil. In this context, the irradiated energy can also be storedbriefly and then serves in the temporally-displaced delivery of aresponse via the circuit and the piezo foil, while the irradiatedfrequency can, in the meantime, be switched off.

EXAMPLE 109

As already shown in the above, a particular problem consists in feedinga stack of banknotes with sufficient energy for the operation of all ofthe chips contained therein. A further solution is therefore presentedin the following, in the context of which, by means of electromagneticfields, particularly in the low frequency range of less than 100 KHz,energy for the operation of the transponder chips in a stack ofbanknotes can be effectively transmitted.

For one, this can occur in that an electrical alternating voltage isgenerated from an external magnetic field by means of induction in acoil of a banknote, which [voltage] supplies the chip with energy and/ordata, as has already been described. However, this requires therealization of a coil with several turns on a banknote. Alternatively,the frequency of the magnetic field can also be selected sufficientlyhigh to be able to use a coil with only a few turns. Effective energytransmission through magnetic induction requires working frequencies inthe range >10 MHz which e.g. can only be realized by elaborate meansthrough polymer electronics.

EXAMPLE 110

One idea of the present invention therefore consists in using themagnetostrictive effect in place of the effect of magnetic induction. Asa result, no large-surface coils are needed on the banknotes and workingfrequencies in ranges of a few 10 KHz can be selected. In this way, forone, the necessary circuits in the banknote with a chip can also berealized by means of polymer electronics, and for the other, theelectronics for generating the necessary fields can also be realizedmore simply.

If e.g. the compound materials according to FIG. 27 or, as the case maybe, FIG. 28 are used, generation of a sufficiently high electricalalternating voltage, which is proportional to an alternating magneticfield 363 applied from the outside, is thus possible while at the sametime avoiding electrical induction.

Strong alternating magnetic fields, which flow through the volume of astack in the vertical direction at high-frequency ranges of e.g. morethan 10 MHz, are needed when coils are used for the energy supply of thebanknotes, particularly in the case of readout in the stack.

In the case of the solution with magnetostrictive materials, it isalready sufficient, compared to the foregoing, to generate a locallystrong alternating magnetic field, which particularly or exclusivelyflows through magnetostrictive metal strips 360, as depicted in FIG. 28by way of example. Since magnetostrictive metal strips 360 exhibitsignificantly higher magnetic permeability than the carrier material,i.e. the paper of banknote 1, it is by contrast easier to direct a largeportion of the generated magnetic flux through the active magnet strips.

The requirement of having to generate a sufficiently strong magneticfield in a small portion of volume in comparison to the total volume ofthe banknote stack simplifies the development of a suitable readingdevice. Moreover, the field does not have to flow through the stack in avertical stack direction, but rather only in a horizontal direction,which can simplify integration in a banknote processing apparatus.

The method according to the invention preferentially works in frequencyranges of less than 100 KHz, typically of a few 10 KHz, thus alsopermitting the use of chips on the basis of polymer electronics. Thisfurther permits the development of simple reading electronics, sinceeven “NF” amplifiers can be used for the generation of the necessaryelectrical power.

EXAMPLE 111

Two possible built-on accessories of suitable reading devices 370 forsuch banknotes are depicted in FIG. 52. In this context, for thegeneration of a sufficiently strong magnetic field, a magnetic fieldgeneration unit 371, e.g. in the form of a horseshoe 371, i.e. aU-shaped component 371 made of highly permeable material, upon which anexciter coil 372 is wound, is used in each case. This in turn is fedwith an alternating current by the output amplifiers of reading device370. In this context, the magnetic field should be generated to be sowide that it can also act on the strips 363 of banknotes that are notstacked flush or, as the case may be, banknotes of varying formats.

Upper FIG. 52 a shows a reading device 370 for a single banknote or asmall number of banknotes, such as can occur at a register. A mechanicalapparatus 373 in the form of e.g. a right-angled stop on a depositingsurface 374 ensures that a banknote 1 lying on the deposit is held inthe right position. In this context, the magnetic field generation unit371 is preferentially situated underneath the depositing surface 374.

FIG. 52 b shows a reading device 370 for use in a banknote processingmachine, i.e. in particular an apparatus for automatic counting and/orsorting of banknotes. The fundamental design corresponds to readingdevice 370 according to FIG. 52 a, but the limbs of magnetic fieldgeneration unit 371 are arranged such that its magnetic field 363 cansimultaneously penetrate strips 360 of the stacked banknotes in thisregion. Here, stacked banknotes 1 are depicted as semi-transparent forbetter clarity. It is e.g. also conceivable that such a reading deviceis integrated in an input pocket of a sorting and/or counting apparatusor, as the case may be, an automatic teller, with the banknotes, whichare stacked, being slid in between the limbs, i.e. the magnetic pole 374of the magnetic field generation unit 371, or transported there.

If the strip 360 to be tested is not integrated centrally on thebanknote paper, reading devices 370 according to FIG. 52 can thenexhibit a second magnetic field generation unit 371 which is positionedat the alternative possible position of strip 360. A positionalinvariance of the banknote 1 during testing is thus obtained. In thiscase, e.g. in the case of the arrangement according to FIG. 18 b) in thecase of integration in an input pocket of a processing apparatus, thebanknotes are placed in the hollow formed by units 371 or transportedinto same.

Since the effect described according to the invention is alsoreversible, strip 360 can, upon appropriate control by chip 3, also beused additionally or alternatively in this arrangement in order to senddata from banknote 1 back to the reading devices 370 according to FIG.52. For this purpose e.g. load modulation or a signal at half of theworking frequency can be used.

The reading devices described have the advantage that banknotes 1 can nolonger be read out over a greater distance. As a result, the anonymityof an owner can be ensured particularly simply and reliably, inparticular, pocket reading devices are used.

EXAMPLE 112

As was already described in relation to FIG. 28, the method withphotodiodes, preferentially LISA photodiodes, as described at anotherlocation of this invention, can also be used for readout of banknotes 1.

A suitable readout device to this end for reading in the stack isdepicted in FIG. 53. By way of example, in the case that LISA photodiode227′ and compound strip 360 are arranged such that they overlap or areat least lie very close together, a deviating prism 375 is used toensure a separation of magnetic field lines 363 from light beams 288.Among other things, this also permits the sensitive electronics for thedetection of the LISA emissions such as, e.g. a CCD camera, to beeffectively shielded against the magnetic fields of magnetic fieldgeneration unit 37 1. The deviation prism is preferentially mountedbetween magnetic pole 374 and banknotes 1 to be tested.

One possibility for increasing the efficiency e.g. of this arrangementconsists in setting the frequency of alternating magnetic field 363equal to the mechanical resonance frequency of compound material 360.Upon stimulation by an alternating magnetic field 363, amagnetostrictive metal strip 361 exhibits pronounced acoustic resonancefrequencies, which exhibit particularly large amplitudes of mechanicalvibration. This effect is also to be expected in compound material 360.Through the coating with additional materials, such as strips 362, 364,a damping occurs, however, as a result of which the resonance effectsmanifest themselves less strongly.

EXAMPLE 113

As an alternative to the above-described variations, provision can alsobe made that the voltage supply and/or communication of the banknotewith the reading device takes place through a contact-type electricalconnection. In this context, the voltage supply and communication fromthe reading device into the banknote can occur via the contact surfaces,while communication from the banknote to the reading device takes placein another form, such as optically or inductively. The individualbanknotes will preferentially exhibit contact surfaces on both sides,among other things, for the purpose of simultaneous contacting of morethan one banknote. In this context, the contact surfaces of the twosides will be electrically connected to one another for galvaniccoupling. To this end, the stack to be measured will preferentially bepressed together in order to achieve better contact between adjacentbanknotes. If the contact surfaces are all arranged centrally, and ifthey are thus at least located at the center, i.e. the intersection ofthe lateral diagonals of the banknote, or are at least symmetricallyarranged in relation to this center, contacting of banknotes is possiblein all four positions, for which e.g. their front side and back side andleft side and right side are exchanged any way whatsoever.

Here e.g. banknotes 1 can be utilized, which are depicted in FIG. 34 or,as the case may be, 35. To contact a stack of such banknotes 1, thestack must be pressed together such that layers 380 of all banknotes 1in the stack are electronically conductively connected. The twooutermost, i.e. the uppermost and the lowermost contact layers 380 arethen each contacted from the outside by an electrical contact clamp. Anenergy supply of this type permits the number of direct contacts 380(galvanic contacts) to be reduced to just two in the simplest case.Naturally, solutions with more than two contacts 380 are also possible,if this offers advantages. Preferentially, contacting of a processingdevice to a banknote 1 will take place via contacts 380, which aresignificantly larger than chip 3 and preferentially at least 1 cm2 insize. This makes it possible to galvanically address a stack ofbanknotes 1 of any thickness whatsoever simultaneously. This galvaniccoupling preferentially serves in the energy supply of the chip 3.Driving of the chip and data transmission can then optionally also takeplace via another method, e.g. a noncontacting inductive or opticalcoupling. Consequently, control and/or data transmission can take placeindependently of the energy supply. This has the advantage of being ableto keep the intensity of the electromagnetic fields low, since no powersupply of the chips must take place by this means.

In the case that the elements of the stack must be stacked withoutregard to their orientation, the polarity of the applied energy supplymust be observed. This can e.g. be compensated for, in that analternating current is applied to galvanic contacts 380 and that thechip or, as the case may be, line 381 exhibits an associated rectifier.Alternatively, a DC voltage can also be applied.

In addition, it is preferred that the contacted banknotes situated in astack can communicate with one another directly, as has already beendescribed in relation to an optical coupling by way of example. To thisend, e.g. banknotes 1 according to FIG. 35 can also be used. These canbe contacted such that chips 3 are successively addressed, i.e. e.g.activated. Here, by way of example, the entire banknote stack caninitially be supplied with energy by connecting voltage to the outermostconductive contact strips 380. In this context, if all chips 3 aredeactivated first, then, by additional contacting e.g. of the upperthird contact 382 of the uppermost banknote 1 in the stack, a transistoror another suitable switch element of chip 3 of this banknote 1 issupplied with a control signal, which enables the switch element andthereby activates chip 3 of uppermost banknote 1. Subsequently, banknote1 lying thereunder is activated a control signal of chip 3 of theuppermost banknote 1 being sent out via the fourth contact 382 locatedon the underside of uppermost banknote 1. The precondition in thiscontext consists in that contacts 382 of individual banknotes 1 in thestack are positioned such that the third contact or, as the case may be,the fourth contact 383 lie one over another in the case of suitablestacking and thus establish the galvanic contact between two banknoteseach lying one over another. In this context, the third and fourthcontacts 383 are particularly preferentially designed the same and/orcan fulfill the same function, in order to be independent of theposition of individual banknotes 1 in the stack.

By way of example, this method thereby allows the energy supply to beapplied galvanically to the entire banknote stack simultaneously, whilebanknotes 1 can be activated successively in the manner mentioned. Hereas well, preferentially e.g. only one of banknote chips 3 at a time canbe simultaneously active.

Disabling and Enabling of Banknotes

As was already briefly mentioned above, a further essential idea of thepresent invention consists of writing about the validity of a note intoa memory of the banknote chip, e.g. of an EEPROM or a PROM.

EXAMPLE 114

It is in principle conceivable, for example, that a code be written bybanks authorized to do so to the memory of the banknote, which marks thebanknote, so that this condition will be recognized for such banknotechips by the associated reading devices, and so that the banknotes canthen be classified as marked or invalid. Disabling and enabling is thuseffected by changing at least one dedicated bit in the memory of thebanknote chip. In order to also be able to recognize this marking orstatus setting, as the case may be, without a reading device, the stateof validity can be additionally displayed on an optical or acousticdisplay device integrated into the banknote paper, such as an LED or LCDdisplay. In the simplest case, a suitable bistable display such as anLED in the banknote, which is switched on or off in the case of aninvalid note, will suffice. Said display device can have properties asdescribed in a following chapter entitled “Commerce.”

The superordinate idealistic value of a banknote is, however, to be seenin its anonymity and its neutrality. If the authenticity of the paper'sfeatures is to already suffice within this meaning in order to be ableto use the banknote unreservedly as a means of exchange in any giventransaction, the “temporary” invalidation of banknotes as relevant forthe end consumer is to a large extent prohibited. Despite thetheoretical possibility of an occasional “disabling” in an authenticbanknote, this possibility is thus prohibited, at least as regards theend consumer.

Nevertheless, this technical possibility offers entirely new securityconcepts.

If one is to actually utilize the technically “invisible” information ofthe banknote chip memory, that the note is “disabled,” the centraloffices within the banknote circulation can in fact receive valuableinformation from this. Since it is possible for a machine to read outthe chip data, data can be collected during the normal processing of thebanknotes in banknote sorting machines, e.g. of the central banks, andthe “switches” can then be reset.

EXAMPLE 115

If, for example, banknotes are deactivated prior to transport from onelocation to another, then banknotes which were stolen during an armedrobbery of such a transport can be easily identified. This can beeffected e.g. during the transport of banknotes from the banknoteprinting works to an issuing central bank and/or from the central bankto a commercial bank.

EXAMPLE 116

It is furthermore also conceivable that the banknotes not be enableduntil immediately prior to their being dispensed to a customer in a bankor from an automatic teller. This can preferentially also be done onlineby an organization authorized to do so, such as a central bank, via aremote data link between the banknote chip and a central bank computeras described in greater detail in the present application.

EXAMPLE 117

Moreover, in the case of e.g. extortion money, such data as will lead totime-delayed disabling, and e.g. deactivation of an associated displaycan be written into the memory of a banknote chip, so that same onlybecomes marked as invalid and can be recognized after a time delay afterthe money has been transferred to a blackmailer. The delayed disablingcan be achieved e.g. by means of a counter contained in an integratedcircuit of the banknote, which marks the notes as invalid only aftere.g. ten days. Alternatively, it can also be provided that an expirationdate as of which the banknote loses its validity is written into thememory of the banknote chip. This validity date can then be checked bythe associated reading devices.

This disabling and enabling of banknotes by writing data to a memory ofthe chip will preferentially be effected in the stack here as describedabove. The validity status of a banknote will be further indicated, e.g.following a lapse of the expiration date, by an optical and/or acousticdisplay device permanently integrated in the banknote paper as describedin detail in a following chapter entitled “Commerce.”

EXAMPLE 118

It is furthermore conceivable that when payments are made with suchbanknotes marked by the chip data as being special, e.g. invalid, suchas when deposits are made in a bank or when payments are made at abusiness such as a gas station, this state is recognized by theassociated checking devices reading out the chip data, and thus a cameracoupled with the register terminal is activated in order to be able torecord the suspicious payment operation, i.e. in particular the personmaking the deposit.

EXAMPLE 119

Apart from the writing of data which provides information on thevalidity of the banknote into the banknote chip, data on otheradministrative states can also be stored. Here, it is possible to havee.g. data on states such as “in storage,” “in transport,” or “stolen”.

EXAMPLE 120

Also, especially in conjunction hereto, provision can be made that chip3 of a banknote 1 has several logical switches, memory cells in general,which preferentially also hold sufficient data available in the“switched” state to induce the “switching operation;” i.e., concerning,for example, by whom or, as applicable, by which device, when, whereand/or why the switching operation was carried out.

This means e.g. that chip 3 not only has a single switch or chip datacharacterizing same, as the case may be, which serve to fully disablethe banknote, but that several switches are provided for different usersin each case in accordance with the associated chip data, in order todisable chip 3 of banknote 1, for example, for certain groups of peopleor actions. Users can e.g. be central banks, securities transport firms,commercial banks or customers. For this purpose, different memory areascan in turn be provided in the chip for different users. In addition,the switch does not necessarily have to be assigned only a binary signalthat e.g. can only assume the “valid” or “invalid” state, as the casemay be. One can additionally realize the storing of additional data forinformation. This can, for example, be data concerning by whom and/orwhen and/or where the switch of the particular banknote was used.

Further, identifying data can be stored in the memory upon changes tothe contents of the memory data, e.g. relating to changes in the displaycondition of the optical and/or acoustical display, which indicate bywhom and/or with which device and/or when and/or where the associateddata was entered into the memory, in order to be able to clearly followand control the changes made when the memory contents are read out, evenat a later point in time. In the case of activation or, as the case maybe, deactivation of banknotes, the writing devices e.g. will beavailable solely at the system operators' that is responsible for same,such as the central banks, securities transport firms or other cashhandling service undertakings, so that memory data on the currentvalidity of the banknote can only be changed by persons authorized to doso.

This can be achieved by having the data stored in the chip such that itis encrypted and/or marked, or password-protected, as the case may be,and such that it can only be changed given knowledge of the password or,as the case may be, of the encryption algorithm or, as the case may be,only with special writing devices adjusted to writing the associatedchip data to the particular banknote. The PKI system described above,for example, can be utilized for this purpose.

It is additionally possible for the digital signature or the key foraccess to the encrypted data, as the case may be, to be saved in aseparate chip, which is not a component of a banknote. The separate chipcan e.g. serve to check the access authorization for certain users orcertain actions, as the case may be, as specified in the following. Thischip can e.g. be a component of an external chip card, which must beinserted into a checking device having read functions and/or writefunctions for banknote chips or connected to same, as the case may be,in order to check the required access authorization. This has theadvantage that, upon a conceivably necessary code change, only chipcards, of which there is but a limited number, and not all the banknoteswill need to be replaced.

EXAMPLE 121

Circuits having the properties cited in the above are suited to severalapplications within the overall circulation of money.

In a case of extortion, the chip memory “switch” reserved for statecentral banks can be provided with the information, “04.17.2002,Extortion, Case: Code word”, in a state central bank. Only state centralbanks (SCB) can write, read and delete this information in the banknotechips.

Banknote sorting machines at the state central banks check all banknotesflowing back into the monetary circulation for authenticity and theirfitness for circulation, i.e. state of preservation. Should the SCBswitch of each banknote now also be checked within the context of thisroutine, the banknotes assigned to the above-cited extortion case can befiltered out.

Such data is not perceptible to the ordinary consumer; it is alsoirrelevant to the consumer, since the banknotes are still authentic andthus valid.

EXAMPLE 122

Further, the memory can e.g. encompass an authentication system whichcontains data on different access authorizations for reading and/orreading or writing chip data and/or for changing the data contents ofthe memory. It can e.g. be necessary to input into the associatedreading and/or writing device a code necessary for a certain group ofusers or testing devices, as the case may be, and/or for the performingof a specific action. The entered code is preferentially compared for amatch with the reference data stored in the chip itself in order toenable access authorization.

The reference data is preferentially saved in a memory area, whichcannot be read from the outside without special authorization. In orderto legitimize itself for the actions, the corresponding processingdevice, must enter the code, optionally upon prompting by the banknotechip.

Also of preferable advantage in such a case is use of a maloperationcounter. The chip of banknote 1 can specifically contain at least onenon-volatile error counter which cannot be written to from the outside.Upon each unsuccessful attempt to transmit the code, it counts ahead byone, although it preferentially resets upon successful entering of asuitable code. An exception is made in the case of the error counterreaching or exceeding, as the case may be, a fixed value. In this case,the banknote is marked by a status which documents the attemptedmanipulations and which cannot be reset. This can e.g. lead tooccasional or permanent, i.e. irreversible, deactivation i.e. preventcertain chip actions. According to one variant, after the errorcounter's fixed maximum number has been exceeded, the chip e.g.irreversibly no longer allows any more chip functions to be executedexcept for querying the status of the chip.

Provision can be made that the cited codes be different for eachbanknote and/or that they are stored or will be stored, as the case maybe, in a central database. The associated reference data arepreferentially stored in a ROM memory area during production of thebanknote. It can further be provided that the code is randomlyregenerated after every action or at least after a given number ofactions, which require the use of the code, and stored in the chip ande.g. transferred to the central database. In this case, it can also beprovided that, for example, the chip of the banknote needs to belegitimized at a reading device, in that the code which is storedtherein is transferred to said reading device, which in turn transfersthe code it reads to the central database, which e.g. only returns aYes/No statement as to whether the code for the corresponding banknotewhich can be, for example, additionally uniquely marked by anunalterable serial number, is correct. A connection to the centraldatabase can e.g. be established via cell phone or a GSM connection.

In many cases, it is expedient for the transponders of the banknotes torespond and communicate one after the other. This is especiallynecessary when querying and processing the individual data of theindividual banknotes.

In other cases wherein a defined number of banknotes are to be furnishedwith standard data e.g. prior to a securities transport with the data,“Securities transport from location A to B, date, time, transportcompany, transport number, transport truck, unit of quantity, etc.,”, itis of great advantage to provide a majority or all of the banknotes withthe data in parallel i.e., at the push of a button all at the same time.After the transport has been concluded, the data can likewise besimultaneously deleted again for all banknotes “at the push of a button”or, as the case may be, all the “switches” can be reset.

For parallel writing/deleting of information, it can be necessary forthe banknote transponders to have a further interface which isparticularly optimized to this mode of operation. This applies inparticular for banknotes having an optical interface for serialprocessing, e.g. photodiodes.

EXAMPLE 123

Given a case where there are different access authorizations fordifferent users in order to perform different actions and/or fordifferent memory areas, it can also be provided that at least one memoryarea is rewritable and in essence freely accessible to all. This cane.g. be utilized to the end that anyone, thus also any private person,is able to write, read and change data, which is then sent off in a formsimilar to a “message in a bottle.” It is likewise conceivable to storeadvertising information, gift promises (“Use this banknote at XYdepartment store and you will receive a 3% discount”), games, etc. Thedata can be written into this kind of memory area as text and/or symbolsand/or images and/or sounds and/or games. These can then be opticallyand/or acoustically reproduced, either by means of a display deviceintegrated within the banknote itself or by means of an external device.

Remote Data Transfer

Another idea of the present invention consists of having a remote dataconnection in order to transfer data between a banknote checking deviceand an evaluation device at a spatially remote location. The checkingdevice can in particular also be a device described in the presentinvention for the recognition and/or checking of banknote chips, withthe device being able to read data from the chip and/or write data toit. This remote data transfer can be effected via a telephone connectionsuch as a fixed line connection, a mobile link, or via a networkconnection, e.g. the Internet or an intranet connection. This datatransfer can e.g. be either unilateral or bilateral in this context.

EXAMPLE 124

When, for example, a banknote checking device is integrated into acellular phone or also when stationary terminals, such as moneydepositing and/or disbursing machines at banks or retail stores, havesuch a device for remote data transfer, it is conceivable to enable asecure data transfer from and/or to a center, e.g. a central bank or atrust center, e.g. via a GSM connection. For example, directcommunication between the chip of the banknote and a computer at thecentral bank can thereby be established. Authentication between thebanknote chip and the central bank computer can ensure that specific,pre-defined actions can only be performed by the organizationsauthorized to do so, in this case e.g. the central bank.

The following includes possibilities of application in this respect:

EXAMPLE 125

A check of the chip data can be performed online. This means that theevaluation of such data, e.g. for checking the authenticity of banknotechips, is not performed by the on-site checking device, but instead at aremote central bank or the like via the remote data connection, and theonly feedback from the central bank to the checking device is the resultof the check. This has the advantage that the central bank can keepbetter secret of the evaluation algorithms and that an unauthorizedthird party cannot simply conclude the details of the executed checkingoperations simply by an analysis of the checking devices as such.

EXAMPLE 126

The above-cited data on administrative states, such as the validity ofthe banknote, which are preferentially stored in its chip, can beadditionally or alternatively stored in the central database such thatthey are assigned to the particular banknote. A variant of this consistsin that the data such as the serial numbers of stolen banknotes arecollected centrally in the database. If, in this case, banknotes aredeactivated for transport, this can then prevent the stolen banknotesfrom subsequently being “put back into operation” without being noticed.

Recognition of Duplicates

A problem inherent to banknotes is the possibility of their being forgedwith a corresponding effort. This problem also exists with banknoteshaving a chip, since it can be assumed in this connection that the chipcan also be duplicated given the correspondingly large effort.Particularly when using large-surface circuits made from polymerelectronics or polycrystalline silicon, there is the risk of a re-designand, connected with same, the production of one or more copies of thechip for the purpose of bringing forgeries into circulation. In contrastto forged chip cards, a forged banknote is immediately put intocirculation and is thereafter no longer in the possession of thecounterfeiter. This increases the incentive and, thus, the risk of aforgery.

Therefore, there is a need to be able to recognize duplicates ofbanknotes.

EXAMPLE 127

A possibility for this purpose consists of having a new code alwaysbeing written into a memory area of the banknote chip provided for thispurpose in each case, during one, preferentially during each onlinecheck of banknotes. Online check is hereby understood to mean inparticular a checking operation wherein the checking device forbanknotes is linked to a remote computer system via an online connectionin order to perform a data comparison with a central database, asdescribed in greater detail in the following. Feasible as onlineconnections are network connections such as fixed line or cellulartelephone, Internet or intranet connections.

In this context, the code can be a random number representing anarbitrary letter, digit and/or symbol combination. The random number ispreferentially generated for the first time at the time of the check.This random number is likewise stored in a central database, e.g. of thecentral bank, and assigned to the serial number or another unique andconstant identification of the particular banknote. Upon each furtheronline check of the banknote, the random number in the banknote chip iscompared with the associated entry in the central database. Thecomparison is preferentially performed in the computer of the centralbank in order to be able to more effectively prevent manipulations. If adisparity of the random number is determined for a given serial number,it can then be assumed that there is at least one duplicate of thechecked banknote or that the duplicate was tested, as the case may be.If a match is determined for the random numbers, the banknote can thenbe assessed as being authentic. In this case, a new random number isgenerated and saved in the banknote chip and in the central database.Thus, forged duplicates of circulating banknotes can be recognized in areliable manner.

In order to ensure that the memory of a banknote chip can be written to,the newly-generated random number is preferentially first written to thebanknote chip and then read out again. If saving of the new value in thebanknote was successful, the entry in the central database will thenalso be updated. Only then, will the banknote be recognized as authenticand a corresponding display be output on the reading device.

An additional possibility consists of registering unsuccessful writingattempts in a maloperation counter. This enables the prompt recognitionand sorting out of chips having defective memory cells or also ofduplicates having a read-only memory, which would, however, not havebeen recognized as authentic anyway.

Briefly summarized, the idea thus consists of storing a random number inboth the banknote chip as well as in a database. Upon each check of thebanknote chip, the random numbers are first compared, specifically e.g.upon each successful check, consequently, a new random number isgenerated and stored in the banknote chip as well as in the database. Ifthe two random numbers do not match, the banknote is then classified asa suspected forgery and handled accordingly.

EXAMPLE 128

Instead of the random number, the banknote can also be assigned e.g. atransaction number TAN upon each transaction. The TAN is thereby derivedfrom a number of digits, with the number of all possible TANs beinglarger than the number of all possible serial numbers, i.e. the TAN is avery long and randomly-generated number and thus not easily guessed. Thedifference from the random number consists of the fact that the TANswere already generated previously and become invalid after use. It isnot mandatory to establish a relationship to a serial number, since aTAN alone can also represent a feature of validity.

The following will describe possible problems in the realization of thisduplicate recognition and their possible solutions.

EXAMPLE 129

A possibility for illegally ascertaining the random number exists in theso-called “brute force” attack wherein all conceivable possiblecombinations are queried from the database for as long as necessaryuntil a correct random number is determined. The smaller the availablememory in the banknote chip, and thus the length of the random number,the easier this process is.

In order to prevent this, a time stamp is saved in both the banknotechip as well as in the database, i.e. data on the time of the lastquery. Additionally, the ID number or the IP address, as the case maybe, of at least the most recent querying checking unit to the database,preferentially, however, a longer history on the last query, can bestored in the database. In place of the ID number or IP address, as thecase may be, all other data can also be used which allows referencingback to the particular checking unit and/or location, i.e. theinstitution such as the particular business or bank where the checkingunit is installed and/or to the last queried database. This additionaldata will be termed “location stamp” for short.

With each query of the database, a frequency check is now preferentiallyexecuted, e.g. by means of a maloperation counter, which will bedescribed in greater detail in the context of these presentapplications. That means that queries, where combinations of serialnumber and random number are thus retrieved and compared to the entriesin the database, are recorded in a maloperation counter if the randomnumber for a given serial number is invalid. If it appears that a serialnumber has been repeatedly erroneously queried within a short time byjust one checking unit, there is then cause for suspicion that anattempt is being made to determine a valid random number by means of abrute force attack. To prevent this, the checking unit or the associatedbanknote processing device, as the case may be, can be temporarily takenoff the network or the communication between database and checking unitdecelerated such that an attack cannot be carried out within anacceptable amount of time.

If, however, it appears that a serial number has been repeatedlyerroneously queried by diverse checking units, then the suspicion of analready circulating forgery, possibly in larger quantities, suggestsitself.

EXAMPLE 130

A possible problem which can arise when checking banknotes via a centraldatabase is a very large number of simultaneous accessing of thisdatabase. In order to circumvent this problem, provision can be made fordistributing the data among several databases DB. FIG. 54 shows anexample of this case. There are N databases DB. When a banknote BNC ischecked by a checking unit, the checking unit then sends the serialnumber and the current random number RNDt=0 of the banknote beingchecked to one of the databases. The particular database DB to which thetest data is sent can, for one, be made dependent on a furtheridentification number as a criterion for selecting one of the databases1 . . . N, which is stored together with the random number in the chipof the banknote to be checked. The identification number can also be apart of the random number itself; e.g. its last two digits. One databaseDB will then always be responsible for checking a certain group ofidentification numbers.

Should a new random number RNDt=1 be generated during a query, it thusthereby becomes certain, with which database the next query will takeplace upon the next check. In the example shown in FIG. 54, the 1stdatabase DB writes and assigns a random number RNDt=1 to checkedbanknote BNC, which corresponds to the 4th database DB. Therefore, theassociated data record on the checked banknote BNC, e.g. at least dataon the serial number and random number, must be transferred via dataline from the 1st database DB to the 4th database DB.

In contrast to only one database, there is a resulting decrease intraffic volume, i.e. the number of accesses, by a factor of 2/N, with Nrepresenting the number of databases in the overall system.

With this system, each checking unit can access any database within thesystem. In this context, the databases are preferentially present onseparate computers, in particular also at separate locations. It ispossible that the checking units can access all possible databases viadifferent databases. For the data comparison, however, it ispreferential for one individual checking unit to be connected to afront-end computer, which is assigned to several checking units andwhich in turn establishes a connection to the individual databases 1 . .. N. The individual checking unit thus only needs to establish a singledata link to the front-end computer in each case and not to all thedatabases at the same time; e.g. upon a deposit transaction.

EXAMPLE 131

A further possibility of reducing accessing of a single databaseconsists of a spatial distribution of the databases, with thedistribution possibly being made e.g. by countries, provinces, cities orthe like. In this context, each database serves a subset of checkingunits. Any arbitrary, e.g. cross-border, access is not possible for thechecking units, since there is a fixed assignment between checking unitand database.

In this scenario, the banknote chip contains at least one other entry onthe database last queried apart from the random number and an optionaltime stamp. When the banknote is dispensed by a central bank or thelike, the valid data record is stored in only one of the databasesassigned to the particular central bank.

In addition, it can be provided that all the databases within one systemare networked together and, that a comparison can be made among the datarecords they contain if necessary.

In the following, a concrete example of such a scenario will beexplained with reference to FIG. 55. Here, it is assumed that a banknoteBNC#255 having the exemplary serial number #255 is stored in databaseDB1. Upon a check at a terminal PE1 at time t=1, the stored data recordis compared with the data record stored in database DB 1. If the checkis successful, a new random number RNDt=1 is then generated and storedtogether with the location stamp and time stamp, i.e. in this case, thetime t=1 and database DE1 data, in banknote BNC#255 as well as indatabase DB1.

If banknote BNC#255 in the example now leaves the “catchment area” ofdatabase DB 1 and is found in the catchment area of DB2 at time t=2,then the data record associated with said banknote BNC#255 willinitially be missing from said database DB2. However, the location stampin banknote BNC#255 can serve to establish that a corresponding datarecord is present in database DB 1. By a comparison of databases DB 1and DB2, the relevant data record can now be transferred to databaseDB2. The data record can then subsequently either be deleted fromdatabase DB1 or a corresponding reference to the “border crossing” ofbanknote BNC#255 can be stored in database DB1.

On the basis of the data record now found in database DB2, theauthenticity of banknote BNC#255 is checked and a new data record with anew random number RNDt=2 as well as a new location stamp and time stampis written into database DB2 as well as banknote BNC#255.

In contrast to a single database DB, there is a resulting decrease intraffic volume (i.e., the number of accesses) by a factor of 2/N, with Nrepresenting the number of databases in the overall system. In addition,cross-border flows of money can also be detected. Additional security isprovided by means of the time stamp and location stamp in the banknote.

EXAMPLE 132

A further scenario for an attack consists of making the chip in thebanknote unusable by writing absurd data to it.

As already illustrated elsewhere in the invention, provision can be madefor circumventing this problem by signing the data record to be writtento the chip e.g. with a public key in a so-called “public key”procedure. The chip only needs knowledge of a public key to check theauthenticity of the data record and to reject the data record ifnecessary.

An additional possibility consists of including the serial number of thebanknote chip itself in the marked data record. In this way, the copyingof—inherently valid data records—of other banknotes is also prevented.

A further possibility consists of safeguarding reading and/or writingaccess to the banknote chip by means of a derived PIN number. In thesimplest case, the PIN is derived from the serial number of thebanknote. A further possibility consists of including the particularlyvalid random number RND in the PIN computation so that the PIN will alsochange upon each check of the banknote.

EXAMPLE 133

A further attack scenario consists of copying data from the chip of anauthentic banknote, transferring it to a duplicate, and subsequentlydestroying the authentic chip, which still remains a component of anactual authentic banknote.

According to the invention, it can therefore be provided that the serialnumber of a banknote is detected at a suitable checking unit in adifferent way than by reading the chip data, e.g. optically by means ofa camera such as a line sensor. Especially in the case of a defectivechip, a corresponding notation as to suspected forgery is then stored inthe database.

EXAMPLE 134

Another attack scenario which is just as possible consists ofmanipulating a checking unit in such a way that, a data comparisonbetween the banknote and the database is activated first when a banknoteis presented. Given an appropriate manipulation, it is then conceivablethat the new data record, i.e. the new random number in particular, isnot written back to the banknote chip, but instead, the data records arecollected in the checking unit so they can be used to programcounterfeit chips at a later point in time.

In order to prevent such a procedure, provision can be made for not onlystoring the current data record in the banknote chip, but older datarecords as well, in order to keep a history of testing operations as alife history of the banknotes. Older data records are likewise saved tothe particular database in order to produce a history of the banknote.

Moreover, the identification number, such as the IP address, etc. of thequerying checking unit, can also be stored in the database. In thiscontext, it is possible, by a statistical evaluation of the data recordssaved in the database for instance, to discover evidence of possiblymanipulated checking units.

A further possibility thus consists of saving historical data records onformer testing operations on the banknote as well as in the database.According to another variant, it can also be provided that thehistorical data records of the banknote are not to be read out orwritten to directly. This can e.g. be achieved in that the memory of thebanknote chip is an FIFO memory (“first-in-first-out”), with the olderdata records being pushed through the memory each time a data record isupdated with a random number and, as applicable, a time stamp and alocation stamp.

FIG. 56 shows an example of this variant wherein the current data record“n” of banknote BNC, which was created during the previous check at timet=0, is compared with the corresponding data record “n” in database DBwhen the check at time t=1 in checking unit PE is performed. Uponsuccessful check, a new data record “n+1” is thus generated and storedwith the time data, t=1, both in database DB as well as in the chip ofbanknote BNC.

In order to check that the new data record was actually written to thebanknote chip and not intercepted by the terminal, i.e. checking unitPE, the new “n+1” data record is preferentially linked to at least onedata record of the history by an algorithm. Here a function of the lastn data records is output for a fixed small n. Ideally, this is aso-called “one way” function or a cryptographic hash function.Alternatively, with limited resources, simpler functions can also becomputed. This operation is performed in banknote BNC as well as indatabase DB and the results subsequently compared. Since checking unitPE disposes of no knowledge of the history, manipulation at this pointcan effectively be made more difficult.

A further improvement of the writing control can be effected by keepinga history indefinitely. For this purpose, the oldest data record in eachcase, which in turn contains information about preceding data records,is fed to a random number generator PRG. The result can e.g. be streamencryption, a so-called “stream cipher,” where the stream cipher outputis used to compare the data from the banknote chip and the database.

Apart from a random number generator PRG, there is also the possibilityof computing a checksum such as a so-called “cyclic redundancy checksum”CRC, since, here as well, the entire history, i.e. older data records,enter into the results.

A pseudo random number generator can also be used to compute the randomnumber, which is customarily configured as a counter having a sequentialcircuit for feedback as is e.g. described in the book by FinkenzellerK., “RFID-Handbuch”, ISBN 3-446-22071-2, 3rd Ed., 2002, pages 228 to231. It can thus be provided that the coding of the sequentialcircuit—and thus the underlying algorithm—be changed in the chip ofbanknote BNC if necessary. For this purpose, the sequential circuit canbe disposed with a programmable memory, such as an EEPROM.

It is furthermore preferentially provided that the generator polynomialof a possibly utilized checksum CRC also be changed in the mannerdescribed above. Changing the sequential circuit or the generatorpolynomial in a banknote chip can be triggered by an own (write)command, where the new parameters are generated by database DB andtransferred to banknote BNC by checking unit PE while said banknote isbeing checked.

EXAMPLE 135

According to the invention, it can further be provided that the banknotedisposes of at least one additional, redundant, identical memory. Awriting operation, e.g. to update the data records, will first beperformed in one of the identical memories, subsequently, the data iscopied e.g. into a primary memory area provided for same. Thecorresponding status of the writing operation is marked and recorded inthe banknote chip by flags, so that at least the original status of thememory can be restored in the banknote in case the writing operation isaborted, e.g. if an interruption in voltage supply to the banknote chipoccurs.

EXAMPLE 136

It is further possible to irreversibly alter the properties of thebanknote chip. A possibility for this consists of burning throughso-called “fuses.” In so doing, it is possible to have sufficiently highamperage flow through the fuse. It is, however, also possible to burnthrough the fuses e.g. with a laser.

A possibility consists of the provision of a quantity, e.g. an array ofas many fuses as possible, which are preferentially burned throughaccording to a random pattern, with the number of fuses increasing thenumber of possible combinations and thus the security as well as thenumber of possible checking cycles. The status of the arrays in turn ispreferentially saved in the central database.

EXAMPLE 137

A further possibility for duplicate recognition without testing the chipdata can be achieved by irreversible, local altering of a banknote or afeature of the banknote. It can thus be provided that a marking, e.g. anink dot, is applied, e.g. imprinted at a random location on the banknoteupon each testing operation of a banknote in a suitable checking unit.In contrast to a usual identification of banknotes which are no longerfit for circulation, e.g. banknotes to be destroyed, the alterationaccording to the invention will thus be effected above all when the noteis assessed as further fit for circulation or is classified a priori asfurther fit for circulation due to the lack of a status check.

The ink used for that purpose shall preferentially be machine readableand not recognizable in the visible spectral range. In addition, theposition of all dots of ink already present on the banknote is recordedin a database with an assignment to the particular banknote e.g. in turnvia its serial number, and rechecked during a subsequent check.

EXAMPLE 138

Although not mandatory, it can also be provided in the afore-mentionedcase that this data in turn, is stored in a chip of the banknote. Thisenables a check of the clear assignment of banknote paper to banknotechip. This can particularly effectively prevent unallowed removal of thechip from a banknote and insertion of the chip into another banknotepaper.

EXAMPLE 139

As an alternative to the afore-mentioned examples, wherein the banknoteis selectively altered by application of markings, magnetic, especiallyhard-magnetic particles, can also be brought into the banknote paper inorder to provide same with a locally different magnetization. In thiscontext, it is provided that the magnetization pattern is alteredaccording to the random principle in a reading/testing operation andthat the particular current pattern is deposited in the database.

EXAMPLE 140

A further alternative possibility consists of removing from the banknotemarkings, e.g. imprinted dots of ink, already applied during productionof the banknote; in a random or also in a predetermined order. A laser,for example, with which the dots of ink can be removed, can be used forthis purpose.

EXAMPLE 141

Still another possibility consists of furnishing the banknote completelyor at least in a portion thereof with a changeable, e.g.heat-activatable surface. During each checking operation, a pattern canbe written on the banknote, e.g. with a laser beam, which is changed ina random order or also in a predetermined order. It is possible inparticular to configure the heat-activatable surface to be very small,with the dots applied with the laser being of a microscopic, non-visiblescale.

EXAMPLE 142

Finally, a further possibility involves altering the structure of thebanknote paper itself; e.g. with a laser. One can thus provide forburning dots into the paper or burning it away completely in order toproduce recesses such as holes in the banknote. These will, again,preferentially be of a microscopic, non-visible scale.

Banknote Processing Machines

Banknote processing machines are machines which perform worksteps fullyor partly automatically with a number of banknotes transferred to them.Such worksteps can e.g. consist in counting the banknotes, determiningtheir value, sorting them according to currency and/or value and/orposition and/or quality, stacking them, packing them, checking them forauthenticity or even destroying the banknotes. Banknote processingmachines can also perform a combination of several such worksteps.

Banknote processing machines according to the invention can be dividedinto three different classes according to their procedure whenprocessing banknotes: into banknote processing machines with individualprocessing, where the individual banknotes are separated, processedsuccessively and subsequently deposited again, preferentially stacked,into banknote processing machines with stack processing, where entiregroups of banknotes are all processed quasi at the same time withoutthem being physically separated completely from one another, and intobanknote processing machines with combined individual/stack processing,where processing by the banknote processing machine can be effected viaboth individual processing as well as stack processing, is possible. Inthis context, banknote processing machines are conceivable, whichalternatively provide both processing possibilities, banknote processingmachines that perform both processing possibilities on the banknotes tobe processed or banknote processing machines that allow every possiblecombination of processing possibilities.

That is why, in contrast to the banknote processing machines that arerealized at present, stack processing must be designed significantlymore efficiently in addition to individual processing. In the following,examples predominantly relating to banknote processing machines withindividual processing are described.

EXAMPLE 143

FIG. 57 shows the principle structure of a device 100 for processingsheet material having an electrical circuit or, as the case may be, abanknote processing machine for processing banknotes having anelectrical circuit.

Banknote processing machine 100 has an input unit 110 into which thebanknotes are inserted in stacks. A singler 111, which takes individualbanknotes out of input unit 110 and transfers same to a transport system120, is connected to input unit 110. Singler 111 can be configured, forexample, as a suction singler, i.e. singler 111 separates the banknotesby means of negative pressure, or it can be configured as a frictionwheel singler. Singler 111 can be disposed, as depicted, at the upperend of input unit 110 and separate the uppermost banknote of the stackof banknotes in each case. Likewise, an arrangement at the lower end ofinput unit 110 is possible, such that the particular lowermost note ofthe banknote stack will always be separated. Transport system 120transports the individual banknotes through a sensor unit 145, whichdetermines data from the banknotes, which e.g. permits conclusions to bedrawn on authenticity, condition, currency, denomination, etc..

The determined data of the banknotes is transferred to a operating unit160, which evaluates the data, thereby controlling the further flow ofthe banknotes through banknote processing machine 100. In this context,operating unit 160 acts on switches 121 to 124, which are components oftransport system 120 and allow the banknotes to be placed in outputunits 130 to 138 according to the predetermined criteria.

Output units 130 to 138 can be constructed, for example, as spiral slotstackers, which stack the banknotes, which are to be filed, in stacker131, 133, 135, 137 by means of rotating units 130, 132, 134, 136, whichhave spiral slots. A further output unit 138 can be formed by ashredder, which thereby serves to destroy banknotes in poor condition,for example severely soiled banknotes, by means of shredding 139.Banknote processing machine 100 can be controlled by a user viaoperating unit 166, which can consist of, for example, a display and akeyboard.

Data Exchange Devices

For processing banknotes having electrical circuits, banknote processingmachine 100 has special transfer devices in sensor unit 145, alsoreferred to as data exchange devices, which permit a transfer of energyand/or data with the electrical circuit of the banknotes, i.e. e.g.reading and/or writing of data from and/or to the electrical circuit.For communication, the banknote likewise has transfer devices, such asan antenna linked to the electrical circuit.

EXAMPLE 144

FIG. 58 a shows, for example, a banknote 1 having an electrical circuit3 as well as an antenna 7, with antenna 7 and/or electrical circuit 3being affixed in and/or on banknote 1. Antenna 7 is configured as adipole antenna and is oriented toward the short side of banknote 1.Contingent upon the orientation of the banknote during transport throughtransport system 120, in transport direction T1 parallel to the longside of banknote 1 or in transport direction T2 parallel to the shortside of banknote 1, different requirements result for the data exchangedevice in sensor unit 145. Upon affixing antenna 7 to banknote 1 asdepicted in FIG. 58 b, these requirements act conversely.

The data exchange device of sensor unit 145 is therefore constructed insuch a manner that, independent of the orientation of antenna 7 ofbanknote 1 and/or the orientation of the data exchange device of sensorunit 145 and/or the transport direction T1, T2, data exchange betweenthe data exchange device of sensor unit 145 and electrical circuit 3 ofbanknote 1 is always possible.

A further possibility consists of determining the orientation and/orposition of antenna 7 of banknote 1 during transport through transportsystem 120 and controlling the data exchange device of sensor unit 145accordingly in order to enable data exchange. Other sensors present insensor unit 145, sensors which record the optical information ofbanknote 1, for example, can be used for this purpose, for example.

Another possibility consists of designing the data exchange device ofsensor unit 145 and banknote 1 in such a manner that the data exchangedevice of sensor unit 145 and electrical circuit 3 of banknote 1 arecoupled inductively or capacitively for the data exchange. This, forexample, can be effected by means of electroconductive coupling surfacesin the data exchange device of sensor unit 145 and banknote 1.

A data exchange device for banknote processing machine 100 is proposedwhich enables communication with an electrical circuit 3 both inlongitudinal as well as also transverse transport, i.e. whentransporting along the long side T1 as well as the short side T2 ofbanknote 1, and independently of the orientation of antenna 7 ofelectrical circuit 3 of banknote 1.

EXAMPLE 145

According to FIG. 59, a further embodiment of a data exchange device 142consists of electroconductive segments 150 to 156, which are disposed tobe insulated from one another. FIG. 59 a depicts data exchange device142 at that point in time at which electrical circuit 3 of thenondepicted banknote, of which electrical circuit 3 is a component, isat the height of segment 152. One branch of antenna 7 lies in the areaof segments 150, 151, the other branch in the area of segments 153 to156. In order to enable communication of data exchange device 142 withelectrical circuit 3, segments 150 and 151 are connected to one anotherelectroconductively 157 a. Segments 153 to 156 are likewise connected toone another electroconductively 158 a. In this way, segments 150, 151and 153 to 156, which are connected to one another electroconductively,serve as an antenna or coupling surface for the data exchange withelectrical circuit 3 via its antenna 7. For this purpose, electricalconnections 157 a and 158 a are connected to operating unit 160.

Since banknote 1 is moved by transport system 120 of banknote processingmachine 100, the position of antenna 7 of banknote 1 changes. In thecase depicted in FIG. 59 a, wherein antenna 7 is transported in thedirection T perpendicular to segments 150 to 156 of data exchange device142, the position of antenna 7 relative to the individual segments 150to 156 changes. FIG. 59 b depicts data exchange device 142 at a laterpoint in time, at which banknote 1, and thus antenna 7 as well aselectrical circuit 3, have been transported further by transport system120 in comparison to the representation in FIG. 59 a. At this point intime, electrical circuit 3 is at the height of segment 154. Therefore,segments 150 to 153 are electroconductively connected with one another157 b on the one hand. On the other hand, segments 155 and 156 areelectroconductively coupled with one another 158 b. In this way, theelectroconductively-connected segments 150 to 153 as well as 155 and 156serve as an antenna or coupling surfaces for the data exchange withelectrical circuit 3 via its antenna 7. Electrical connections 157 a and158 a are additionally connected to operating unit 160.

In order to ensure that the correct segments 150 to 156 areelectroconductively connected to one another at all times, the positionof banknote 1 being transported by transport system 120 is determined sothat the interconnecting of segments 150 to 156 occurs synchronously tothe movement of banknote 1, or antenna 7 and circuit 3, as the case maybe. The position of banknote 1 can e.g. be derived from the knowntransport speed of transport system 120 when the location of banknote 1is precisely determined at a specific point in time; for example, bymeans of light barriers disposed in the transport path of transportsystem 120. The operating unit can then control the above-describedelectrical connection of the individual segments 150 to 156. For thispurpose, operating unit 160 can, for example, control electronicswitches such as transistors or electromechanical switches such asrelays, which are connected to segments 150 to 156 in order to produceconnections 157 and 158.

Further, the orientation of banknote 1 or antenna 7, as the case may be,is determined. The orientation of banknote 1 is usually known, sincebanknote processing machine 100 transports banknotes 1 either alongtheir long side or along their short side. If the type of banknotes tobe processed is known, e.g. a certain currency, then the position andorientation of the banknote's antenna 7 is also known. If same is notknown, a conductivity sensor of sensor unit 145 can be additionallyused, for example, to determine the position and orientation of antenna7 in order to control the described electrical connection of segments150 to 156 of data exchange device 142.

Once it has been or, as described, once it is ascertained that antenna 7is at the height of e.g. segment 153 and transported along direction T,as depicted in FIG. 59 c, and parallel to segments 150 to 156, segments150 to 152 will be electroconductively connected to one another 157 c.Segments 154 to 156 are likewise electroconductively connected to oneanother 158 c. Electrical connections 157 c and 158 c are—as describedabove—connected to operating unit 160 in order to enable an evaluationof electrical circuit 3. Further monitoring or changing of electricalconnections 157 c and 158 c can be omitted in this case, since theposition of circuit 3 or antenna 7, as the case may be, does not changerelative to the segments of data exchange device 142.

EXAMPLE 146

FIG. 60 shows a still further embodiment of a data exchange device for abanknote processing machine 100 according to the invention for theprocessing of banknotes 1 having an electrical circuit 3. The dataexchange device is formed from singler 111 of banknote processingmachine 100, for example from the singling roller. The data exchangedevice consists of two electroconductive roller bodies 142 a and 142 b,which form the singling roller and are connected to an electricalinsulation 142 c. The two roller bodies 142 a and 142 b are connected tooperating unit 160 for the data exchange. The data exchange betweenelectrical circuit 3 of banknote 1 and data exchange device 142 a,boccurs upon the separation of banknote 1 from input unit 110 via singler111 (FIG. 57). When banknote 1 is detected by singler 11, a branch ofantenna 7 lies in the area of the one roller body 142 a, the otherbranch of antenna 7 lies in the area of the other roller body 142 b, sothat operating unit 160 can exchange data with electrical circuit 3 ofbanknote 1 via data exchange device 142 a,b.

EXAMPLE 147

FIG. 61 shows a still further embodiment of a data exchange device for abanknote processing machine 100 according to the invention for theprocessing of banknotes 1 having an electrical circuit 3. The dataexchange device is formed from electroconductive surfaces 142 a,b, whichare disposed along the transport system 120 of banknote processingmachine 100. Electroconductive surfaces 142 a,b of the data exchangedevice are electrically insulated from one another and have an obliquegradient in transport direction T1, T2. It is thereby ensured that dataexchange will occur between electrical circuit 3, 3′ of banknote 1 anddata exchange device 142 a,b when banknote 1 is transported past dataexchange device 160 by transport system 120, independently of theorientation of antenna 7, 7′ of banknote 1 and independently of thedirection of transport T1, T2. Thus, operating unit 160 can exchangedata with electrical circuit 3, 3′ of banknote 1 via data exchangedevice 142 a,b.

EXAMPLE 148

In a further variant, data exchange device 142 of banknote processingmachine 100 comprises a device which generates a rotating and/ormigrating electrical and/or magnetic field. An antenna structure, forexample, which functions according to the so-called “phased array”principle, can be used for this purpose. This data exchange device 142allows data exchange between the banknote's electrical circuit 3,independently of the orientation, position or shape of antenna 7 ofbanknote 1 and independently of any possible position or transportdirection of banknote 1 in transport system 120 of banknote processingmachine 100.

EXAMPLE 149

The arrangements and structures described for data exchange device 142can also be utilized for banknote 1. For example, antenna 7 can bedisposed obliquely on and/or in banknote 1 in order to enable dataexchange with data exchange device 142 independently of the orientationand transport of banknote 1. In addition, other deviating antennastructures can be provided, e.g. a cross-shaped dipole antenna or aclosed (e.g. annular, circular, polygonal, particularly rectangular) ora ridged antenna structure.

The data exchange device 142 described above can also be disposed in thearea of singler 111 and/or input unit 110 instead of in the area oftransport system 120 or also additionally thereto and e.g. be acomponent of a second sensor unit 140 (FIG. 57).

EXAMPLE 150

FIG. 62 depicts an input unit 110, into which banknotes 1 are inserted.At location 111, banknotes 1 are detected by singler 111, separated andtransferred to transport system 120 in the direction T. Data exchangedevice 142 for data exchange with electrical circuit 3 of banknote 1 issituated in the area of input unit 110. Data exchange device 142 has astructure and a functionality as described above.

Data exchange can occur in the inactive state with the next banknote 1to be separated, i.e. with the uppermost or the lowermost banknote,depending upon whether singler 111 separates from above or below.

It is, however, also possible to conduct the data exchange during theseparation of the particular banknote 1 to be separated and to e.g. makeuse of the movement of banknote 1 during separation when same is movedpassed data exchange device 142. As described above, the singler,preferentially singling roller 111 itself can also comprise dataexchange device 142.

However, an exchange of data can also be effected with several or allbanknotes in input unit 110. In that context, the procedures describedbelow must be applied to avoid collisions or crosstalk, as the case maybe.

The problem of mixed-up talk/crosstalk can also be solved by alwayshaving only one banknote selectively communicate with data exchangedevice 142. In order to achieve this, provision can be made to alwaysenable only one banknote for data exchange with data exchange device142. This can be particularly advantageously achieved if the nextbanknote 1 to be separated is enabled for data exchange with dataexchange device 142. To enable, it is particularly expedient to utilizea transfer method deviating from that for the data exchange with dataexchange device 142. For example, provision can be made to effectenabling by optical means, e.g. by irradiating with light.

For this purpose, a photocell is provided on transponder chip 3 which,when sufficiently lit with enough brightness, electrically enables thefunction of the transponder. Should a light source be located insingling unit 110, which illuminates the next banknote to be separatedin the area of chip 3, same enables the units necessary forcommunication, whereby data exchange is enabled. This luminosity of thelight source is to be measured in such a way that the light passingthrough the separated banknote and striking the next banknote is so weakthat it can only just not yet be enabled for the next banknote. It isexpedient to also provide measures in chips 3, e.g. in the form ofthreshold values, which optimize the photosensitivity of the photocellsto this situation. Care must be taken that the banknotes are disposed insuch a way in the singler for this communication that the photoelectriccells of chips 2 are disposed in the direction of the light source.

EXAMPLE 151

Optical activation of the next banknote 1 to be separated is effected byilluminating a portion of or the entire surface of banknote 1 withlight, since, at this time (prior to separation), banknote 1 is openlyavailable in input unit 110 due to the fact that it constitutes—asdescribed above, depending upon separation from above or below - theuppermost or the lowermost banknote of the banks notes in input unit110. As depicted in FIG. 62, a light source 141 can be provided for thispurpose, which fully or partially illuminates the surface of the nextbanknote 1 to be separated. The light strikes an optoelectric component,a photo transistor, for example, which can be a component of electricalcircuit 3 of banknote 1, and enables electrical circuit 3 for dataexchange with data exchange device 142.

Illumination with light can also occur at selective points if theprecise location of the optoelectric component in input unit 110 isknown so precisely.

The use of one or more photodiodes in the banknotes represents a furtherpossibility, as described at the outset. In that context, the light oflight source 141 is guided to the optoelectric component, for whichpurpose an end of the photodiode or photodiodes is coupled to saidoptoelectric component. The other end or ends of the photodiode, forexample, can terminate at one or more edges of the banknote. The lightfrom a light source can then be selectively coupled to one of the edgesof one or more of the banknotes in order to effect the enabling. Thelight can be coupled particularly advantageously when the front edge,viewed in transport direction T, of the banknote 1 just being grasped bysingler 111 is illuminated in an area outside of input unit 110, sinceonly the edge of this banknote 1 that has just been separated—and thusthe photodiode—can be selectively illuminated in this area, with whichonly electrical circuit 3 of said banknote 1 is activated for the dataexchange.

If, the banknotes are to be separated anyway in banknote processingmachine 100, however, the solution preferred is the one where nophotodiode is needed, since selective communication is then possiblewith exactly the lowermost or uppermost banknote, as the case may be. Inorder to ensure in this case that the next, e.g. viewed from singler111, the second banknote, is not activated in this case, a threshold isto be provided, as previously mentioned, which ensures that the lightwhich has already passed through one banknote is insufficient foractivation of the next banknote.

EXAMPLE 152

As further illustrated further in FIG. 62, the second sensor unit 140can contain further sensors 143. For example, sensor 143 can be anoptical sensor that captures the surface of the particular separatedbanknote 1 and the signals of which are evaluated by operating unit 160.Conclusions as to the condition of banknote 1 can, for example, be drawnfrom the optical appearance of the surface of banknote 1, e.g. relatingto soiling or damages. Further evaluations also allow conclusions e.g.as to the authenticity and/or the currency or, as the case may be, thedenomination of banknote 1. Additional sensors can also be provided inthe second sensor unit 140 in the area of singler 111 and/or input unit110 for checking authenticity or other properties of banknote 1.

EXAMPLE 153

The early recognition of banknote 1 or certain features of banknote 1prior to and/or during separation allows operating unit 160 to makepre-settings for further components of banknote processing machine 100,which can facilitate, accelerate or improve further processing. Forexample, operating unit 160 can pre-set sensor unit 145 for the check ofa certain currency and/or denomination, as a result of which a faster ormore precise check is enabled.

The structure or function, as the case may be, of data exchange device142, light source 141, as well as additional sensors external sensordevice 145, described above in connection with the second sensor unit140, which is disposed in the area of singler 111 and/or input unit 110,is also applicable to the banknotes that have bee deposited and/or areto be deposited in output units 130 to 137.

EXAMPLE 154

The data exchange between the banknote and the checking device cansignify reading on the one hand and writing on the other hand. As isknown, can be read out in an especially short period of time when EEPROMmemories are used. In contrast, however, writing data takes a relativelylong time. Depending on whether only reading or also writing is now tobe effected, one must check whether same is also readily possiblewithout hindering the checking sequence. In this context, one must takeinto account that, when a high-performance sorting machine with aprocessing speed of e.g. 40 banknotes/second is used, the idle time foreach banknote exposed next in each case lasts a maximum of 1/40 second.All planned measures are to be coordinated according to theaforementioned, i.e., locations in the sorting machine are to beselected for the individual writing operations, which take these factsinto account.

The banknotes stay the longest in spiral slot stackers 130, 132, 143,136 (FIG. 57). For writing operations, therefore, it appears especiallyexpedient to provide the “writing devices” in the individual slots ofthe spiral slot stackers.

This enables data exchange with electrical circuit 3 of the banknote tobe deposited while same is situated in a spiral slot of rotating units130, 132, 134, 136. Since usually only one banknote is found at a timein a spiral slot, provision can also be made to optically enable saidbanknote, or, as the case may be, its electrical circuit, as describedabove. Further, as likewise described above, further sensors can beprovided in rotating units 130, 132, 134, 136. It is moreover possibleto shield the individual spiral slots from one another, e.g. by the useof electroconductive surfaces that form a type of Faraday cage.

It is likewise possible to provide data exchange devices in stacker 131,133, 135, 137. In this case, data exchange can be performed with severalbanknotes that have been deposited or, as the case may be, with thebanknote last deposited in stacker 131, 133, 135, 137 in each case.Since the surface of the particularly last stored banknote in stacker131, 133, 135, 137 is freely accessible, i.e. not covered by otherbanknotes, an above-described enabling of data exchange can be effected.Further, as likewise described above, further sensors can be provided inthe area of stacker 131, 133, 135, 137.

To improve, e.g. accelerate, the processing of banknotes 1 having anelectrical circuit 3 in banknote processing machine 100, provision canbe made to distribute the data exchange between banknote 1 and banknoteprocessing machine 100. For this purpose, a separation of reading andwriting operations can be effected, for example.

EXAMPLE 155

In this context, for example, data is read from the electrical circuit110 of banknote 1 by means of the second sensor unit 140 in the area ofsingler 111 or, as the case may be, input unit 110. Data can then bewritten to electrical circuit 3 of banknote 1 in the sensor unit 140mounted in transport system 120 and/or in the data exchange devices ofoutput units 130 to 137. Likewise, a further separation of the readingoperation and/or the writing operation is actually possible. Forexample, only a certain part of the information from electrical circuit3 of banknote 1, can be read out in second sensor unit 140, e.g. theserial number, while the rest of the data, which is required forprocessing in banknote processing machine 100, is read out in sensorunit 145. In the same way, arbitrary distributions can be made betweenreading and writing operations as well as between the data exchangedevices mounted at the different locations that have been described.

In other words, the processing device for the receipt of energy and/ordata from the sheet material circuit will have a receiving device, whichis located in the same or another processing part of the processingdevice as the transfer device for the transfer of energy and/or datafrom the processing device to the sheet material circuit, with“processing parts” or also “processing station” preferentially beingunderstood to mean modular components of the device having differentprocessing functions, such as input, singler, transport path, sensorpath, stacker and/or deposit means.

Intelligent Light Barriers

In order to be able to better monitor the individual steps of processingof the banknotes in banknote processing machine 100, light barriers 161to 165 are provided, which capture the transport of the banknotesthrough banknote processing machine 100 and forward same to operatingunit 160 for processing. Further light barriers can be provided atadditional locations along transport system 120 if necessary, inparticular, sensor units 140 and 145 can also be regarded as lightbarriers and their signals evaluated accordingly. It is thus possible todetermine the particular location of a banknote after separation in thetransport system, when the signals of light barriers 161 to 165 areevaluated by operating unit 160.

EXAMPLE 156

A further improvement of monitoring can be achieved if data exchangedevices are provided at the positions at which light barriers 161 to 165are mounted instead of or in addition to the light barriers. Such lightbarriers 161 to 165 will be referred to as intelligent light barriers161 to 165 in the following. It thereby becomes possible to read out theunique data of the banknote to be processed, e.g. the serial number,from the electrical circuit of each banknote at the start of processingin banknote processing machine 100. Same can be effected in sensordevices 140 or 145, for example. Along the further course alongtransport system 120, the unique data is again read out by sensor device145 and intelligent light barriers 161 to 165 and forwarded to operatingunit 160, which logs same for monitoring purposes. Such an intelligentlight barrier can in particular also be used to recognize whether thereare several banknotes that are overlapping one in the transporter.

Thereby, precise monitoring of the processing of the banknotes inbanknote processing machine 100 is possible at every point in time.Particularly in the case of malfunctions, such as jamming of thebanknotes, for example, better assignment of the individual banknotes isthus possible. This is especially important when banknotes stemming fromdifferent depositors are processed at the same time. In this case, whenbanknotes from different deposits are mixed, it is possible to assigneach banknote to the deposit from which it originated, since thecorresponding unique data (serial number) are detected during separationand stored in operating unit 160.

If a malfunction and along with it intermixing of the banknotes occurs,the serial numbers of the individual banknotes serve to restore theoriginal assignment.

Likewise, during preparation of a deposit for processing by the banknoteprocessing machine, the owner or, as the case may be, legal owners (e.g.name and/or account number), can be recorded in the electrical circuitsof the banknotes, either by the depositor itself or at the site of thebanknote processing machine, or, as the case may be, during transport tosaid site. Should malfunctions occur in the course of processing, suchas jams or a mix-up of the order of the banknotes (so-calledcrossovers), the assignment of a banknote to a depositor can be restoredautomatically.

This can be effected by having an operator who reads the serial numbersof the banknotes and compare them to the log, which contains data on theaffiliation of the intermixed banknotes to the particular deposits asdisplayed on operating unit 166. It is, however, also possible tore-feed the intermixed banknotes into input unit 110. They will then beautomatically allocated to the particular deposit in accordance with thelog of operating unit 160. However, it is also possible to write theinformation into a “write-only” type memory area in order to maintainthe anonymity of the depositor. In cases of uncertainty, the informationthen be checked for validity and put out only within the chip.

Destruction of Banknotes with Electrical Circuits

Special security is necessary when monitoring the destruction ofbanknotes by means of shredder 138, as removal of banknotes fromtransport system 120 by manipulation prior to their destruction must beprevented. For this reason, disposal or, as the case may be, shreddinghas usually only been performed by central banks to date. By contrast,the procedure according to the invention also allows this to beaccomplished by cash centers or other cash handling serviceundertakings.

EXAMPLE 157

In order to prevent this, provision is made according to a furtherexample to dispose intelligent light barrier 165 in direct proximity toor as part of shredder 138. It thereby becomes possible to recognizethat banknotes are removed prior to destruction by shredder 138, since,otherwise, the signal of intelligent light barrier 165 does not reportthe expected banknote to operating unit 160. If intelligent lightbarriers 161 to 165 as well as sensor units 140 and 145 capture theserial numbers of the banknotes, as described above, operating unit 160can generate and save and preferentially transfer to a central databasea list of all of the banknotes to be destroyed. If banknotes latersurface in the circulation of money later on, the serial numbers ofwhich are on said list, this is then a case of forged banknotes withserial numbers identical to the destroyed banknotes.

It is also possible to delete from the list the serial numbers capturedby intelligent light barrier 165 and forwarded to the operating unit,since their destruction is ensured. The latter list can be stored inaddition to or in place of the first-cited list for subsequentmonitoring.

In order to also make the electrical circuits unfit for later abusefollowing destruction of banknote 139, shredder 138 can, for example, beformed such that the electrical circuits are also reliably destroyed.For this purpose, provision can also be made to subject the remains 139of the banknotes to further treatment, e.g. have them burned, in orderto ensure destruction of the electrical circuits.

It is likewise possible to configure intelligent light barrier 165 suchthat it destroys the electrical circuit or marks it as no longer validby means of an irreversible writing operation. This can be achieved, forexample, by a so-called fuse which is irreversibly burned through bymeans of a suitable current flow in order to rule out further use.

Further, it is therefore also possible to perform a comparison with thecited list or lists, which contain the serial numbers of all of thedestroyed banknotes. If one of these serial numbers surfaces at a laterpoint in time, this is a case of manipulation. In order to enable thiscomparison and the above-cited monitoring of banknotes removed prior todestruction, a central database, which contains all the serial numbersof all the banknotes deemed to be destroyed. This, for example, can bedone via a network connection, e.g. the Internet. Serial numbers in thedatabase can be checked as necessary via the network connection.Alternatively, it is also possible to delete the banknotes fromdatabases on all valid banknotes.

Should banknotes surface during processing in banknote processingmachine 100, the electrical circuit of which cannot communicate with thedata exchange device, e.g. because the banknote's electrical circuit orantenna is defective, these banknotes can be transported, guided bycontrol device 160, from transport system 120 to shredder 138 fordestruction, since they are no longer usable due to the damage. In orderto prevent abuse, however, by having other features of these banknoteschecked by evaluating the signals of sensor unit 145 by operating unit160, it is ensured that the banknotes are not counterfeit banknotes orbanknotes where the above-cited irreversible writing operation formarking of the destruction has been performed.

However, provision can also be made for banknotes having electricalcircuits that cannot be evaluated to be sent to a special deposit means,e.g. stacker 131, wherein all suspicious banknotes or non-processablebanknotes are deposited for a manual examination. The analysis therebyenabled can, for example, allow conclusions to be drawn in the case offrequent occurrence of defective or absent electrical circuits.

Utilization of Data of the Electrical Circuit

A variety of further data can also be read and written apart from thereading and/or writing operations described to this point in the contextof the data exchange between the banknote's electrical circuit and thedata exchange device of the banknote processing machine. For example,data can be exchanged in order to determine the presence of a banknote.Further, the currency and/or the denomination of the banknote, i.e. thedenomination can be contained in the data.

EXAMPLE 158

The data described can additionally be utilized for the counting,sorting and accounting of the processed banknotes. By means of theevaluation of the data contained in the electrical circuit of thebanknote alone or in addition to the information obtained by operatingunit 160 from the signals of sensor unit 145 and/or 140, processingsecurity is increased and can be additionally safeguarded by means ofthe thorough monitoring by means of intelligent light barriers 161 to165 as described above. Missing or non-assignable, i.e. recognizable,banknotes thus barely occur anymore.

EXAMPLE 159

Further, the data of the electrical circuit can be used for processingfor in order to determine the state of the banknotes. For this purpose,test data can also be written into the electrical circuit. For example,data about the production date of the particular banknote, the date thebanknote entered circulation or the date of its last determination ofcondition can be written into the electrical circuit. Further data suchas information about production-relevant parameters, e.g. colordeviations, etc., previous checking procedures of the banknote, i.e.signals of the sensors of sensor unit 145 or their evaluation byoperating unit 160, are written into and stored in one or more dedicatedmemory areas of the electrical circuit.

EXAMPLE 160

The stored data can be utilized for a later examination and e.g.determination of condition. For example, conclusions regarding thenote's likely condition can be drawn from the date of manufacture and/orthe date of entry into circulation and/or the date of the lastdetermination of condition or check, since statistical connectionsbetween circulation time and banknote condition have been wellresearched and known. Of course, the result of the last condition checkcan also be stored and used for these conclusions. In this case,elaborate optical sensors for examining the state of the banknote couldbe done without in this case, since the condition can merely beestimated on the basis of the stored data. Alternatively, every moreelaborate check can also be applied merely to the subset of the dubious,expired or specially-marked banknotes.

EXAMPLE 161

As mentioned previously, the statistical connections between circulationtime and banknote state of the banknote are actually relativelywell-known. However, particularly on the part of manufacturers ofbanknotes, there is a need to gain more exact and reliable statements onthe actual causes of banknote wear in order to effect improvements inproduction that improve the durability of banknotes. For this purpose,provision can be made for one or more sensors to be integrated in thebanknote paper to measure environmental influences.

These sensors can serve to measure chemical, physical or mechanicalvariables. Sensors, which measure humidity, temperature, salt content,pH value, bacterial infestation or fungal infestation, damages or tears,can be used, for example.

Said sensors can be preferentially integrated either into the chipitself or realized separately at another place of the banknote paper bymeans of thin layer technology. In a simple embodiment, it can be e.g.an FET transistor mounted in such a manner that its gate electrodeenters into a reaction with the material to be detected on account of aspecial pre-treatment or coating.

In this context, the sensors will be connected to a chip of thebanknote. Here, the chip will have a writable memory, such as an EEPROM,in order to store the measured values recorded by the sensors. Thevalues, preferentially saved at regular intervals, e.g. daily, can beread out and evaluated at a later point in time by organizationsauthorized to do so, such as the central banks, when the particularbanknote, which is in circulation again, is received by them.

It is not mandatory for all of the banknotes entering circulation to beequipped with the integrated sensors. It can already suffice to furnishonly a portion of the banknotes with sensors in order to obtainsufficient measurement data for a reliable evaluation.

EXAMPLE 162

From the data stored in the electrical circuit of the banknote, such asinformation about production-relevant parameters, data from previouschecking procedures or the sensor data, adjustments to the measurementparameters can be performed, in dependence on the stored data, byoperating unit 160. In this way, the afore-mentioned color deviations,for example, can be taken into account when checking the signals ofoptical sensors, as a result of which the measurement result and thusprocessing of the banknotes by banknote processing machine 100 isimproved.

EXAMPLE 163

The presence and/or the position and/or the authenticity of specifice.g. optical and/or magnetic locally present security features ofbanknote 1 can also be stored in chip 3 of banknote 1 during manufactureof banknote 1.

By reading out the chip data when such banknotes 1 are checked, one canachieve that checking will be performed more accurately at thatparticular place only, i.e. e.g. at a higher resolution. By way ofexample, for this purpose, for example, data on the location of thefeatures on banknote 1 can be transferred by operating unit 160according to FIG. 57 of sensor unit 145 in order to check such featuresat the pre-determined location only. It thereby becomes possible, forexample, to avoid an elaborate preliminary check to determine thepresence and location of the features, as e.g. is necessary according toWO 01/60047 A2. It thereby becomes possible to design the detectionmethods in banknote processing machines for such locally variantfeatures significantly more simply.

EXAMPLE 164

Further, the data stored in the electrical circuit allow laterprocessing of banknotes, which could not be clearly assigned and which,as described above, can for example be in output stacker 131. This datacan be evaluated and taken into account during a later manual appraisalby an operator, as a result of which the appraisal is normallysimplified, since the operator immediately recognizes which feature ofthe banknote appears suspicious.

Deposit Processing

Further advantages of storing processing-relevant data result whenprocessing deposits, which each consist of several banknotes and stemfrom different depositors, so-called deposits. The banknotes of thesedeposits are usually separated from one another by separator cards, withthe separator cards, for example, being able to contain data about thedepositor. The data can e.g. be stored in electrical circuits of theseparator cards, which are configured like the electrical circuits forbanknotes like those described until now. Such separator cards canpotentially be dispensed with if the data of the electrical circuits ofthe banknotes of the different deposits are available for processing inprocessing machine 100.

EXAMPLE 165

For that purpose, provision can be made that the depositor writes datato the electrical circuit, by which the banknotes can be identified asbeing associated with the particular depositor. Such data can, forexample, be an account number or a customer number. The data can, forexample, be written to the electrical circuit when the depositorreceives the banknotes and e.g. places them in a cash register. Duringprocessing in processing machine 100, the data identifying the depositorcan thus be used at any point in time in order to determine thedepositor of the particular banknote.

EXAMPLE 166

A further possibility consists in, for example, recording the serialnumber or another unique feature of the particular first and/or lastbanknote of a deposit and to assign this serial number or, as the casemay be, these serial numbers to the particular depositor, for example,by means of operating unit 166. During processing in banknote processingmachine 100, the serial number of each banknote is then read during orafter singling by the data exchange device in sensor unit 140 or, as thecase may be, singler 111 or sensor unit 145, and operating unit 160assigns the banknotes to the particular depositor when the recordedserial numbers appear. Moreover, all banknotes of the particulardepositor can be marked by banknote processing machine 100, by the datacharacterizing the depositor being written to the electrical circuit ofthe banknotes, so that same can be recognized as being associated with acertain depositor at any time during processing.

EXAMPLE 167

Moreover, provision can be made for banknotes 1, which cannot berecognized because e.g. their chip 3 is defective, to be automaticallysorted out and handled separately. Thus, their serial numbers e.g. canbe scanned separately and then stored separately for further processing.

Authenticity Check and Data Security

To improve and safeguard the checking of authenticity and/or the datastored in the electrical circuit of the banknotes to be processed orparts of this data, in particular authenticity features, value or, asthe case may be, denomination, serial number, etc., the data can bestored in encrypted form in the electrical circuit of the banknoteand/or with a digital signature or, as the case may be, the dataexchange between the banknote and the banknote processing machine cantake place in encrypted or digitally signed form.

Likewise, the data can be stored in a special area of a memory of thebanknote's electrical circuit, which is access protected. This data canthen only be read or, as the case may be, written when the data exchangedevice utilized is correspondingly authorized. In order to check this,provision can be made for mutual authentication between the banknote andthe banknote processing machine or, as the case may be, between theelectrical circuit and the data exchange device to be carried out. Thiscan e.g. take place according to the so-called challenge responseprocedure, with or without integration of a certificate.

PKI (Public Key Infrastructure) methods are especially suited toencryption, since they in particular enable a simple realization of thebanknote processing machine, since no specially-protected securityelectronics are necessary for storage of the keys for decrypting thedata. Rather, PKI constitutes a so-called asymmetrical encryptingprocedure, wherein the data is encrypted using a secret key, whereas aso-called public key, i.e. a generally-accessible key, is used fordecrypting. In this case, the secret keys could be kept at theparticular national central banks, the public keys in the banknoteprocessing machines.

If data encrypted by the banknote processing machine are also to bewritten into the electrical circuit of the banknote, it needs the secretkey or its own secret key in order to e.g. be able to encrypt specialdata for processing in the banknote processing machine or a processingstep that is downstream.

It is likewise possible to provide the data or portions of the data witha digital signature. For this purpose, a secret key is used to generateand likewise store in the electrical circuit a digital signature aboutthe data stored in the electric memory of the banknote or, as the casemay be, about a hash value formed from the data. Checking the data isnow possible by checking the digital signature with a public key.

Different sets of keys can be used for the described encrypting of thedata or, as the case may be, the forming of digital signatures, e.g. asdescribed in the above for different applications and/or users;likewise, different sets of keys from secret and public keys can also beused for different currencies, series, denominations, etc.

The described procedures for securing the data or portions of the datacan be applied individually or, in order to increase security, in adesired combination.

To further improve the checking of authenticity of banknotes, provisioncan be made for the electrical circuit, which contains theabove-described encrypted or decrypted data, to contain further data, inparticular in encrypted form, derived from features, which arepermanently connected with the banknote and individualize same. In thesimplest case, this can be the banknote's serial number, which e.g. isstored in encrypted form and/or with a digital signature in theelectrical circuit.

EXAMPLE 168

During checking in banknote processing machine 100, the serial number ofthe banknote is read from the banknote's electrical circuit e.g. bysensor unit 140 and/or sensor unit 145 by means of data exchange device142 and decrypted in operating unit 160, e.g. by means of theabove-described PKI method. At the same time, sensor unit 140 and/orsensor unit 145 detects the serial number printed on the banknote bymeans of an optical sensor, e.g. sensor 143. If the two serial numbersmatch, this indicates an authentic banknote; otherwise, a forgery mustbe assumed. For a more precise check, a banknote suspected of beingforged is e.g. transported in the first output stacker 131 in orderto—as described above—permit a manual check of the banknote. For thispurpose, data stored in the electrical circuit or in operating unit 160can be drawn upon, which e.g. provide information on the results of thecheck by sensor units 140 and/or 145.

Instead of using features of the banknote that are visible to the humaneye, such as the serial number for improving the authenticity check,features which are not readily recognizable, can also be used. Suchfeatures can be, for example, special materials which e.g. areluminescent, exhibit special magnetic properties, etc. The presence ofthese materials can then be proved by means of excitation by e.g.ultraviolet light or infrared light or magnetic excitation and bedetected by corresponding sensors, e.g. also biochip sensors, andevaluated by operating unit 160. Further, such materials can be used tocarry out coding e.g. in the form of a bar code, with the informationthat is coded with the features—as described above with respect to theserial numbers—being stored in the electrical circuit for a comparison,so as to check authenticity. Instead of disposing the features on or inthe banknote in an ordered form, e.g. the bar code mentioned, thefeatures can also be disposed randomly or pseudo-randomly on or in thebanknote. The particular distribution of the features is determined,e.g. by the use of corresponding sensors, in this case and storedthereafter in the electrical circuit of the associated banknote. Theabove-described procedures for the protection of data can be used forthis purpose.

As described in the above, it is thus possible for chip 3 to contain thedata specific to the particular banknote 1, which e.g. can also comprisedata about the paper, or, as the case may be, the feature substancescontained therein, of banknote 1. Alternatively or additionally, it isalso conceivable to permanently apply, in particular to print, onto thebanknote the information, which couples banknote-specific paper datawith chip data, such as the associated serial numbers of chip 3, whichmay or also may not correspond to the serial number imprinted on thebanknote. This can be effected e.g. by printing on a bar code or apassive oscillating circuit. As described in detail in the scope of thisapplication, the information is preferentially encrypted and/ordigitally signed in order to be able to prevent forgery of the imprintcorrelating paper data with chip data. Paper data also refer to dataabout the paper of the sheet material and/or the feature substancescontained therein and chip data refer to data about the chip, such asits serial number, etc..

An advantage of this variant consists in that the manufacture of suchbanknotes can take place simply and quickly. The data individuallymarking the chip, e.g. its serial number, which are established by thechip manufacturer, are e.g. simply read out from the chip in the endphase of banknote production and then imprinted e.g. in the form of abar code, coupled with paper data, such as the serial number, which isestablished by the banknote manufacturer. This procedure avoidselaborate writing onto the chip during banknote production in comparisonto the reading operation.

Special features, as described above in connection with the checking forauthenticity of the banknote, can also be used for further tasks.

EXAMPLE 169

For example, the features can exhibit a certain dependence on externalinfluences, e.g. a fluorescence effect can become weaker over time. Afeature of this type can be utilized to make statements about changes tothe banknote in order to e.g. be able to sort out banknotes that are nolonger fit for circulation.

Further features, as described, are stored in the electrical circuit ofthe banknote, can be used to check the intactness of the banknote.

For example, if a pattern or a random distribution of features overessentially the entire surface of the banknote is saved, a comparisonwith the features detected anew during processing in the banknoteprocessing machine can be used to determine whether the banknote isintact. The data of these features thus serve as a so-called “snipprotection”, which allows checking for the completeness of banknotes,or, as the case may be, the detection of parts of banknotes parts thatdo not belong together.

EXAMPLE 170

Further, it is possible to improve the above-described data security andauthenticity check by means of electrical circuits, which e.g. arefounded on the basis of silicon technology or on the basis of organicsemiconductors. In this context, in the detection of authenticity, apremise starting with the check for the presence of the electriccircuit, and going all the way to more complex procedures taking intoaccount serial numbers and/or statement of value (also referred to asdenomination or denomination)—as described above—is being assumed.

In the case of sole checking of the electrical circuit, a banknoteprocessing machine or, as the case may be, its sensor can be deceived ifthe electrical circuit of an authentic banknote is removed from same ande.g. applied to a neutral sheet of paper or a copy. Additionally, thebanknote without an electrical circuit can still be used further; e.g.in a person-to-person exchange, since in this case, the absence of theelectrical circuit would not be noticed. The described combination ofserial number and electrical circuit already improves security.Electrical circuits with a memory that can only be written to once (aso-called WORM memory) are sufficient for this purpose. It is thuspossible, for example, to store the serial number and the statement ofvalue on a banknote in the way known in the art. Further, an additionalvalue is determined from other features of a banknote. However, a randomnumber e.g. would also be suitable as an additional value.

For example, a banknote with an electrical circuit can contain theserial number of the banknote, the denomination and a check digit in theelectrical circuit. By means of a secret algorithm, e.g. that describedabove, the check digit is derived from the data in the electricalcircuit (denomination and serial number) and additional information. Thederived check digit is subsequently compared with the check digit of theelectrical circuit.

Further features of the banknote can be used for safeguarding, e.g. thestatement of value of the banknote decrypted from a secret feature.These further features can be feature stored on a security thread as anoptical, mechanical, magnetic or other code, measurement values can alsobe used, which are determined in the detection of a secret featuresubstance. This secret feature substance can cover the surface of thebanknote, but it can also be applied to, applied on or incorporated incertain locations in a localized fashion. Likewise, a feature derivedfrom the thickness profile or the dieprint of a banknote can be used.The format of the banknote, the position of the printed image, etc., canalso be used.

Further features can also be derived from random measurement values,which can be determined on the banknote (so-called unique features).Thus, the transmission of the light on a certain small surface unit ofthe banknote can be determined, just as positional deviations of printedcharacters or other components of the banknote, such as security thread,optically-variable element, etc.

When linking the denomination and the serial number with one or more ofthe described other features, a measurable property derived from thecheck of the feature or of the other features, e.g. an intensity of ameasuring signal of the other features, can be advantageously referredto. It is thus e.g. possible to depict a banknote's statement of valueby a certain number of points or strips or by the positions of the otherfeature. In this case, the detection of the other feature allows aconclusion to be drawn; e.g. as to denomination, in which case thedistribution (e.g. quantity, density) of the other feature can also varyat individual locations within significant tolerance limits, which,however, are immaterial, since it essentially suffices to faultlesslyprove the presence of the other feature at the relevant locations. Inactual practice, the minimum intensity necessary for this purpose isnearly always exceeded considerably. Therefore, additional informationcan be gained from the values of the intensity of the feature at therequired locations, which, in a suitable fashion, can be stored or usedto derive the check digit.

It is also possible to save the result of the check of the other featureas such in the banknote's electrical circuit. This is then particularlyadvantageous when the measuring results of the test are derived from asecret feature or feature substance. Direct knowledge of the particularvalue would then be harmless, because the origin of this value is ofcourse unknown, since it is derived from the secret feature or featuresubstance by measurement. Linking of the features then consists instoring them together in the electrical circuit.

What is essential is that the procedure according to the inventioncreates a connection between the features that are easily read (e.g.denomination and serial number) on the one hand and a certain individualpiece of the documents, represented by certain properties specific tothis piece. Linking of the stored features to a feature on the banknotedetermined in another way will cause a checking result to result thatvaries from one banknote to the other, even when several banknotes havethe same denominations or serial numbers, which is actually notpossible, but occurs frequently with forgeries.

If a counterfeiter e.g. were to produce forgeries with self-manufacturedelectrical circuits, these would have to at least contain the correctdata as to denomination and serial number. Even if this were to succeed,though, an own check digit would still need to be determined and storedfor each banknote. This impedes forgeries so much that they are scarcelyto be expected any more. This would also still be the case if thesignificance of the check digit were known to forgers.

If one uses e.g. the data of the value coded on a security thread as theother feature, then the stored features would force the data of thethread to be read as well. In another embodiment, one could also includefurther properties of a document in the check. By optical, magnetic orcapacitive scanning of the cross profile of a banknote, e.g. a propertythat is typical for each banknote can be derived, which stands for theindividuality of the banknote like a fingerprint. This measured valuecan be stored in the electrical circuit and compared later at any timewith the measured value of renewed capacitive scanning (unique feature).Similarly, a feature can be derived from the position of an OVD(optically-variable element) strip and saved.

In a special embodiment, the denomination of a banknote is not stored inthe electrical circuit. Instead, the serial number and the other featureare linked by means of an algorithm, and the result of such linking isstored in the electrical circuit. If the algorithm is concealed, only asuitable sensor can infer the serial number and/or the denomination ofthe banknote from the stored data. This would even impede a forgery inthe case where suitable electrical circuits are available for theforgeries and where they can be provided with data. PKI procedures,wherein the properties measured on the banknote are entered in the chipof the banknote encrypted with the aid of a “secret key” and/or signeddigitally, are particularly advantageous. The device checking forauthenticity decodes with the aid of the public key and/or checks thesignature.

EXAMPLE 171

When a banknote is produced, the serial number is stored in plain textin a circuit situated therein. Further, the distance from the firstprinted character in the upper left corner to the left edge of thebanknote is determined. This value A is rounded to two digits (e.g.3.243 mm would result in the value of 32). The serial number is nowcalculated modulo A and the result (a number between 0 and 31) likewisewritten into the integrated circuit. Here, “A” can be any two-digitnumber.

EXAMPLE 172

A bit code, which represents the numbers between 1 and 8, is generatedon a security thread by means of magnetic printing ink. This value A isread during a check and first linked with the denomination

-   -   B=denomination modulo A    -   A value “B” between 0 and 7 results. The serial number is now        multiplied by this value and a further modulo operation follows,        so that the following results:

C=(serial number * B) modulo X

A fixed value can be used for X, but a different value determined fromthe information contents of the banknote can also be used. Result C iswritten into and stored in the integrated circuit.

EXAMPLE 173

In a metallic layer, e.g. a metallized strip, fine interruptions aregenerated in the metallization, which are almost invisible to the nakedeye. The spacing of these interruptions is determined and a digitalnumber derived therefrom. The result is linked in a suitable fashionwith e.g. serial number and/or denomination. The result of the linkingis stored in the integrated circuit.

EXAMPLE 174

A suitable quantity of a fluorescent feature substance is added in themanufacture of a banknote paper. Following printing and insertion of theintegrated circuit, the serial number and the denomination are stored inthe electrical circuit. Further, the intensity of the fluorescencecaused by the feature substance is determined by a suitable sensor andlikewise stored in the electrical circuit.

EXAMPLE 175

On a share, the serial number as well as the security identificationnumber of the share are imprinted. These data are also stored in anintegrated circuit situated in the share. Further, a random number inthe form of a digital code (perhaps a bar code) is mounted by means of anon-visible feature substance. This random number is linked to theserial number and the result of the linking is likewise stored in theIC. When checking the share, the serial number and the identificationnumber are read from the IC and compared with the stored data. Further,the non-visible random number is read by a corresponding sensor andlinked to the stored data. The result of this linking must then agreewith the stored result. If one uses a three-digit random number xyz,then multiplication by an eight-digit serial number would deliver aresult with 11 to 12 digits. This procedure is naturally also applicableto other papers of value such as banknotes.

EXAMPLE 176

In a banknote printing works, an identifier of the electrical circuit isread by a numbering machine, i.e. a printing technology device, whichprovides banknotes with serial numbers, and printed on the particularbanknote directly, or in a form altered by means of an algorithm, asplain text and/or bar code and/or pixel code or as anothertwo-dimensional code. Since this is only possible at a very lowprocessing speed with the high-pressure numbering machines normallyused, numbering is performed by means of ink jet methods or otherdigital printing methods or by means of laser.

EXAMPLE 177

In the banknote printing works, an identifier of the electrical circuitis read and an optical structure that can be generated variably (e.g.lattice, hologram) is and transferred to the particular banknoteuniquely assigned and a laterally resolved structural or chemical changeis preferentially applied or incorporated.

EXAMPLE 178

In the banknote printing works, an identifier of the electrical circuitis read and a magnetic structure that can be generated variably istransferred to the particular banknote uniquely assigned andpreferentially an individual one-dimensional or two-dimensionalperforation is incorporated, preferentially by means of laser.

EXAMPLE 179

An oscillating circuit is situated on the banknote, which ispreferentially realized by printing technology. In this context, severalcapacity surfaces, i.e. electroconductive surfaces, which preferentiallyconsist of transparent conductive material, are electroconductivelyconnected with one another. If the surfaces (e.g. n pieces) are at aparticular ratio of size of 2:1, then 2n states can be coded. Thus, e.g.a check digit can be realized. By means of a laser, the surfaces, orportions thereof, can be separated from the oscillating circuit so thatthe desired coding can be effected. The particular advantage in thiscontext consists in that the check digit can be determined contactlesslyfor a check via the resonance frequency of the oscillating circuit.

Instead of the hitherto-described electrical circuits, optical memories,e.g. TESA-ROM©, are also suited as a security element for storing theabove-described data and/or features.

The three last-named examples are preferentially utilized in the casewhere the chip/IC has no memory area that can be written to by the user(e.g. ROM, WORM types). The examples described are, however, alsoapplicable to other types of memory without a chip/IC, such as magneticor optical types of memory (e.g. TESA-ROM).

EXAMPLE 180

In order to preserve the anonymity of a banknote with an electricalcircuit, and, at the same time, enable monitoring of banknotes forcertain properties, in particular their previous owners or, as the casemay be, bearers, provision can be made to provide the electrical circuiton the banknote with a write-only memory area, which cannot be read outdirectly. In this case, provision is made that a comparison is performedof the information stored in the banknote with other predeterminedinformation in the banknote or, as the case may be, its electricalcircuit. Here, the banknote or, as the case may be, its electricalcircuit merely generates a signal, which indicates whether the comparedinformations correspond.

Thus, the informations, which are to be checked, must be known, as aresult of which anonymity of the banknote is given completely. At thesame time, however, each banknote can be marked (e.g. banknotes fromextortions, disenabling during transport, etc.) without this beingdetectable by an unauthorized user of the banknote (blackmailer, robberof the transport, etc.). In the context of standard evaluations bybanks, e.g. after robberies, a series of identifications that have beenmade known can be checked. In this connection, it is particularlyadvantageous to provide several different memory areas, which can bewritten into in each case, e.g. one stack, according to differentauthorizations.

Further, for example, a depositor of a deposit can suitably mark hisbanknotes beforehand. If discrepancies are detected by the institutionprocessing the deposit, the owners can be ascertained after the markingsused by them, e.g. code numbers, are made known.

EXAMPLE 181

The write-only memory area can be used particularly advantageously tostore information in the banknote such as the above-described randomnumber or the different code numbers for access to the differentfunctions of the banknote chip. For security-critical applications, theuse of the write-only memory area in combination with the describederror counter and the disabling or, as the case may be, marking of thebanknote upon exceeding of abortive attempts, e.g. of the input of acode number for access to the banknote, proves to be advantageous.

Small Banknote Processing Machines

By making use of the above-described electrical circuits and theforgery-proof features of the banknotes, which are jointly incorporatedin the authenticity check of the banknotes, as well as use of thecorresponding data exchange devices, even especially compact banknoteprocessing machines can be realized, which are more efficient and morereliable than previous banknote processing machines of comparable size.Such banknote processing machines are depicted in FIGS. 63 and 64.

EXAMPLE 182

FIG. 63 shows a second embodiment of a banknote processing machine,particularly for counting and/or evaluating banknotes with an electriccircuit. Banknotes 1, which are to be counted and/or checked forauthenticity and/or the total value or, as the case may be, thedenomination of which is to be determined, are inserted into an inputunit 110. For that purpose, banknotes 1 are grasped by singler 111 andsingled and transported 1 b via a transport path 120 into a stacker 131.Further stackers, which also permit sorting, are possible, but notdepicted. The respective banknote 1 a to be singled next, the lowermostbanknote in this case, is detected by sensor unit 140 and the signals ofsensor unit 140 are evaluated by an operating unit 160. The evaluationtakes place as described above in connection with FIGS. 57-61. Inparticular, a sensor unit can also be present in singler 111, instead ofor in addition to sensor unit 140, as described in connection with FIG.60. Given appropriate interpretation of the banknote processing machine,a separate transport system 120 can be dispensed with. In this case, thebanknotes are transported directly from singler 111 into stacker 131.The banknotes can be processed alternatively along their long side oralong their short side.

A special advantage of the banknote processing machine according to FIG.63 consists in the integration of the sensor unit in the area of thesingler or, as the case may be, of the input unit. As a result, ameasurement path or even the entire transport system can be omitted, tothe effect that a particularly simple and compact structure results.

The small banknote processing machine designed in this way can, thus,depending on its internal structure, belong to the class of the banknoteprocessing machines for processing single notes or to the class ofbanknote processing machines with stack processing. By the use ofbanknotes according to the invention, however, more complex tasks canalso be performed by banknote processing machines with stack processing,as the following example illustrates.

EXAMPLE 183

FIG. 64 shows a third embodiment of a banknote processing machine,particularly for the counting and/or evaluating of banknotes with anelectrical circuit. Here, a stack of banknotes 1 which are to be countedand/or checked for authenticity and/or the total value or, as the casemay be, denomination of which is to be determined, are paged through inthe direction T. A sensor unit 140 detects the banknotes la or, as thecase may be, exchanges data with the electrical circuit, with the sensorsignals being evaluated by an operating unit 160—as described above inconnection with FIGS. 57-61. The evaluated banknotes 1 b are held untilall banknotes 1 are processed.

In this context, the checking of the banknotes for authenticity can takeplace after the authenticity features of the banknote have been detectedand the corresponding data of the electrical circuit read out, bycomparing the detected authenticity features with the data read out.Since the electrical circuit cannot be removed from the banknote and theauthenticity features are forgery-proof, when the detected authenticityfeatures and the read-out data match, this reliably yields theauthenticity of the checked banknote.

EXAMPLE 184

FIG. 65 shows a further example of a so-called spindle counting machine402, the essential points of which correspond to the constructionaccording to FIG. 64. A stack of banknotes 1 is inserted into thespindle counting machine 420 and clamped and held there by holdingdevice(s) 421. The stack is then situated at position la depicted bydashes. A mechanism 422 now singles banknotes 1 at the other side andcounts them. Here, the counted banknotes 1 are grasped by rods 424disposed on spindle 423, singled and crimped. After successful counting,the stack of banknotes, which is still clamped, is situated at positionlb. Upon request, machine 420 releases the stack so that it can beremoved.

If suitable information transfer devices are present inside and outsideof the banknote, the principle described here of the small banknoteprocessing machine with stack processing can be utilized veryadvantageously in order to be able to address the banknotes individuallyin the phase of deformation. The banknotes can be enabled very simplyhere by optical means, or can be addressed only during the page-throughtime period via electromagnetic waves by suitable communication devices.

EXAMPLE 185

The above-described energy gain from the deformation of the banknote,e.g. by elements with a piezoelectric effect, is now particularlyadvantageous here, since the banknote receives the energy at exactlythat point in time when it can and should be addressed individually.Thus, anti-collision procedures can be avoided or, as the case may be,designed distinctly more efficiently. In addition, through thisprocessing method, the number of banknotes not provided with afunctional circuit or only provided with a non-operational one isdetermined without any additional effort.

The described spindle counting machine thus allows simple processing bya banknote processing system without transport, during which thebanknotes can nevertheless be addressed individually.

EXAMPLE 186

If stack processing of banknotes driven by deformation energy is to becarried out at a banknote processing machine, a further alternative tothe above example is offered, according to which the entire stack ofbanknotes 1 is clamped on both sides, similarly as in a vice, and theends are moved relative to one another in periodic oscillations.Reading-out of the information from the banknote then takes placepreferentially by means of light or electromagnetic waves.

EXAMPLE 187

This form of energy feed by deformation energy can also be utilizedexpediently for single-note processing of banknotes by machine. Banknote1 can e.g. be detected at a place in the banknote processing machinewhere the banknote is deformed by the shape of the transport path. Suchplaces can preferentially be situated everywhere where banknote 1performs a change of direction or, alternatively, banknote 1 can besupplied with energy by the protrusion of the rollers driven with thetransport speed of banknote 1 into the transport path of the note, whichcrimp same. A combination with a limpness sensor e.g. is especiallyadvantageous, as e.g. described in the applicant's DE 195 436 74 A1,where the sheet is crimped and stimulated to oscillate by the banknoteto be checked being contacted periodically by a rotary roller withseveral edges or, as the case may be, brushes, piezo elements or leversystems.

Such a limpness sensor or any other sensor, such as also a hole sensor,where the banknote to be checked is deformed for measurement(s) of paperproperties, can hereby also be simultaneously used in a targeted way forthe chip's energy supply and/or for reading out chip data, since thebanknotes are deformed anyways for measurement of the paper propertiesand since a voltage in the banknote is thereby induced, which can supplythe chip with energy.

EXAMPLE 188

Different kinds of banknote processing machines with stack processingare also conceivable, which perform jobs, which hitherto could not beperformed this easily.

Such solutions consist in e.g. marking of all banknotes contained in astack or a container for transport, collective switching-on or, as thecase may be, switching-off of banknotes, group-wise recording of serialnumbers in chips during banknote production and/or the evaluation of thespecial banknote data written in during production and quality controlfor static purposes.

For banknotes of variable denomination, a stack of worthless—i.e., witha value of “0” written on them—“blank” banknotes can even have thebanknote values required for a delivery written on them. Some of theabove-described security features, e.g. the random number that iswritten in, even allow reliable determination of the authenticity of thebanknote in banknote processing machines with stack processing.

EXAMPLE 189

Banknote processing machines, which communicate with stacks of banknotesin their singler and/or in the stackers, reckon among the class ofbanknote processing machines with combined individual and stackprocessing.

Another form of the banknote processing machines with combinedindividual and stack processing preferentially provides own transportpaths for both kinds of processing. Here, e.g. following input and, ifnecessary, a first stack processing, the banknotes are singled in thesingler of the banknote processing machine and the individual banknotesare transported, e.g. by means of belt drives or roller drives.

In addition, however, there exists in the banknote processing machine afurther form of transport, wherein entire groups of banknotes aretransported together, loosely or preferentially in transport containers,within the machine. The transport containers can e.g. be filled up atstations, which correspond to the stackers of conventional banknoteprocessing machines with individual processing; that is, e.g.spira-pocket stackers. The transport containers can either have theirown drive or, however, also be driven by the banknote processingmachine.

A particular advantage then results when the transport containerscontain a memory, which contains processing steps to be conducted and/orthat have been conducted on the banknotes and/or data about thesebanknotes contained therein. In particular, the variants described inthe section entitled “Containers for banknote transport” may also beexpedient for the transport container of such a banknote processingmachine.

A version of the transport container in a form, which offerspossibilities so that the banknote processing machine can depositbanknotes therein as well as be able to again single the banknotes outof the same containers again, is particularly advantageous is. However,the bands of banknote packets can also be explicitly regarded astransport containers. In order to achieve a uniform throughput, thestack transport can be distinctly slower than the single transport,whereby it is less susceptible to malfunction.

EXAMPLE 190

In addition, banknote processing machines with combined individual andstack processing can be realized in a more modular fashion, compared tothose with purely individual processing. Namely, the individual modulescan transfer the transport containers to one another, due to theoptionally low transport speed and higher mechanical stability of atransport container with greater mechanical tolerances, than would bepossible with individual banknotes. For example, an input station, anoutput station, a sensor station, a sorting station, a manual reworkingstation, a destruction station, a banding station, a packing station,etc. are possible as such modules.

EXAMPLE 191

Banknote processing machines with combined individual and stackprocessing permit tasks to be performed, which can not be performed bybanknote processing machines with only stack processing. Such tasksconsist e.g. in the sorting or packing of banknotes, the detecting andevaluating banknotes by sensors and the reliable recognition anddestruction of banknotes without an electrical circuit according to theinvention.

EXAMPLE 192

On the other hand, tasks can also be solved with banknote processingmachines with combined individual and stack processing which cannot besolved or can only be solved given very large effort by those withindividual transport.

This includes e.g. the provision of transport containers in a waitingposition, in order to thus be able to temporarily store largerquantities of banknotes if jams or errors in certain parts of themachine limit the function of these machine parts.

This thus allows processing to continue in the banknote processingmachine while jams are being remedied, which can significantly increasemachine throughput. Several input stations for banknotes on one machineare also conceivable. If the waiting positions for the transportcontainers have sufficiently large capacity, it is even possible to havea greater number of operators inputting banknotes at the input stationsthan the machine's nominal processing rate would allow. The transportcontainers situated in the waiting position can then be processedautomatically at times of lower machine utilization, e.g. at night.

In the same manner, the manual rework banknotes at the banknoteprocessing machine can be automatically singled yet another time andreprocessed, whereby the rate of manual banknotes can be distinctlyreduced.

EXAMPLE 193

In current banknote processing machines with individual processing,stackers are used, where the operator of the banknote processing machineremoves the processed banknotes, and where a fixed assignment existsbetween the stacker and the sorting class. These stackers frequentlystill need to be run in pairs, in order not to have to halt the machinein those periods during which a stacker can not be charged withbanknotes, e.g. during the removal of processed banknotes. The resultingpotentially large number of stackers and their spatial extent can leadto a banknote processing machine becoming so long that its operator canonly remove processed packets if he stands up and leaves his workstationfor the input of banknotes.

In order to prevent this complication for the operator, which, in thelong-term, also becomes noticeable in reduced machine throughput, abanknote processing machine with combined individual and stackprocessing can exhibit one or more output stations, which are situatedin direct proximity to the operator, and in which the containers, whichhave been made ready for removal, are pushed out of the machine. Thus,several filling stations, wherein the containers are filled andsubsequently transported to the associated output station, are assignedto at least one of the output stations from which the containers areoutput to the operator. Admittedly, the machine is not necessarilysmaller spatially, but it can be designed distinctly more ergonomically.

Great advantages can also result in the destruction of banknotes if thebanknotes to be destroyed can be moved directly out of the transportcontainers into the shredder, whereby neither jams in the transportsystem with effects on the shredder, nor disturbances from banknoteserroneously being moved into the shredder are possible.

The aforementioned variants, e.g. for stack transport in separatecontainers within the banknote processing machine, are also expedientlyapplicable to banknotes without an electrical circuit. The use ofbanknotes according to the invention, however, enables distinctfacilitation in realization.

EXAMPLE 194

For example, the sensor data and/or sorting classes determined by thesensor station, which can then be utilized by the sorting station, canbe written into the banknotes. Such a procedure ensures that thecontainer situated in the waiting position can be further processedwithout a loss of information after leaving the sensor path, even aftermajor machine malfunctions. Even a continuation of the processing atanother machine is possible.

EXAMPLE 195

Particular advantages result in deposit processing of banknotes bybanknote processing machines with combined individual and stackprocessing.

An idea, which can also be employed with banknotes without an electricalcircuit, consists in that individual processing stations, such as thesingler, the sensor path, the stackers and the interjacent transportpaths, which are preferentially realized as modular units, never containmore than one stack at the same time. This makes it possible to reliablyavoid a mixing of different deposits. Thus, for example, if a jam occursin a transport path, which must be remedied, there will thus be no needfor a hard-to-effect assignment of the jammed banknotes to the differentdeposits, since banknotes of only a single deposit can be found in thetransport path in each case.

Due to the expected increasing shifting of condition sorting tasks fromthe central banks to the commercial banks or cash centers, depositprocessing in shredder mode will gain in importance. However, thebanknotes to be destroyed, are certain to include a relatively largeshare of non-operable electrical circuits, since these arepreferentially sorted out as no longer fit for circulation. By physicalseparation now being given by the spatial spacing of different deposits,the risk of so-called crossovers of such banknotes, i.e. a mixing up ofthe original banknote order, can be reliably avoided.

EXAMPLE 196

Preparation of the individual deposits for going through the machinewill preferentially already take place in the singler. These can [also]be separated from each other by separating means, e.g. separator cards(U.S. Pat. No. 5,917,930), separate separating and information means (WO02/29737), or separating means designed as container(s) (EP 1 1195 725A2).

Advantageously, the separating means and/or information means areequipped with electrical circuits, which have the same communicationinterface as the banknotes according to the invention.

Advantages can be also, if the separating means can prevent the banknoteprocessing machine from communicating with the banknotes. When coupledwith electromagnetic fields, it is e.g. conceivable for the separatingmeans to be electroconductive; e.g. a separator card made of metal, suchas aluminum. With this, the banknote processing machine can communicatewith all the banknotes of the current deposit to be processed, but not,however, with the banknotes of the next deposit separated by theseparator card. Even if the banknotes are present in stacks and areseparated from one another in the stack by separator cards, this makesit possible to achieve e.g. inductive coupling and processing of only asingle deposit in the stack.

With such shielding, the retention of the separating means prior toseparation can also be realized very effectively, e.g. in accordancewith EP 1 253 560 A2. As soon as communication with the separating meansof a deposit no longer achieves any responses, the singler is halted.After the machine has idled, separation can be restarted. This pause,during which no banknotes are separated, can be used to communicate withthe banknotes and the separating means and/or information means of thenext deposit.

Commercial Bank

As has been described in the above, the commercial banks constitute anessential component of the institutions of the circulation of money andare responsible for, among other things, dispensing cash, e.g. to tradeand consumers or, as the case may be, for receiving cash, which isdeposited by same. Within a broader sense, this is also understood tomean other service providers for cash handling, such as valuablestransport entrepreneurs or so-called cash centers. In particular, moneydepositing machines, money disbursing machines and combined moneydepositing/money disbursing machines (moneychanger(s) or recycler(s))and the above-described small counting and/or sorting devices are usedto perform these transactions. It is to be noted that, within themeaning of the present invention, input “and/or” output machines or, asthe case may be, payment machines are understood to mean paymentmachines, money depositing machines, as well as combined moneydepositing and payment machines.

Money Depositing Machines

Money depositing machines can, for example, be constructed such thatthey comprise an input device for the input of banknotes to be depositedand a transport device for transporting said input banknotes to adeposit device. The input device can be designed as a single notedraw-in module for accepting only single notes or also as a stack inputmodule for accepting stacks, i.e. several stacked banknotes. In thiscontext, the storage device can exhibit a temporary storage, e.g. a foilstorage, wherein the deposited banknotes are stored temporarily untilsuch time as the depositor gives his final consent for actualwithholding of the banknotes deposited in the current transaction. Inparticular, the deposit device will further comprise an end depositmeans, such as a cassette described in greater detail in the above,wherein the deposited banknotes, optionally after temporary storage inthe temporary storage are supplied to the end deposit means by means ofthe transport device and input. Here, the transport of the depositedbanknotes can either take place singly and/or also in stacks.

EXAMPLE 197

FIG. 66 shows an example of such a money depositing machine 200, intowhich banknotes 1 can be deposited. Here, money depositing machine 200comprises an input pocket 201 with an attached singler 202, a sensordevice 203 for the checking of singled banknotes 1, a foil storage 204as a temporary storage, a return pocket 205, into which the banknotes 1not accepted by sensor device 203 or the banknotes 1 stored in foilstorage 204 upon abortion of a current transaction are output again, anend cassette 206, wherein the banknotes 1 accepted by sensor device 203and situated in foil storage 204 are ultimately stored followingconfirmation of a current transaction by the depositor, and a controlunit 207, which controls the individual components of the moneydepositing machine 200 via signal lines depicted by dashes. Here,control unit 207, among other things, on the basis of measurementsignals of sensor unit 203, determines data such as the total valueand/or the amount per denomination of banknotes deposited in atransaction.

Money depositing machine 200 can be designed to accept both conventionalbanknotes without a chip as well as those with a chip. In order to checkthe authenticity and fitness for circulation of the deposited banknotes,sensor device 203 therefore comprises e.g. a magnetic sensor, a UVsensor and/or an infrared sensor for measuring the associated banknotepaper properties, which, of course, is understood to mean not only theproperties of the paper itself, but e.g. also the properties of thefeature substances incorporated therein. In this context, a sensorysystem for checking chip properties can be mounted in the same area,e.g. in the same module housing as a sensory system for checking paperproperties, although it is also of advantage additionally oralternatively if these two types of sensory systems are spacedspatially, e.g. accommodated in different module housings and/orparticularly in different parts of processing, such as was explained byway of example in connection with a chip check in the singler.

Money depositing machine 200 can exhibit further components, as theye.g. were described in the above as a component of banknote countingand/or banknote sorting machines, for reading out from and/or writing tothe chips of banknotes with a chip 1. Thus, for example, a reading unit,which e.g. checks the presence of and, optionally, the operability ofbanknote chip 3 and/or reads chip data such as the serial number, thedenomination and/or data about authenticity and/or previous checkingoperations of the particular banknote 208, can be present in the area ofsingler 202 and/or in sensor device 203. An aforementioned intelligentlight barrier e.g. can also be used. As was described above withreference to the banknote sorting and/or banknote counting devices, suchdata e.g. can be used to pre-adjust sensor modules that are downstream.Especially in the case of there being several reading units 208 mountedin the transport path of banknotes 1, the path of the banknotes 1deposited in machine 200 can be clearly followed in a particularlysimple and reliable way by reading the serial number or other individualdata, as is not the case with known systems.

EXAMPLE 198

If it is ensured by the production process of the banknotes that thechip cannot be removed from the banknote paper without loss of itsfunctional ability and, thus, that a fraudulent incorporation of thechip into authentic or forged banknote paper of a higher denominationcan be prevented, it is e.g. also possible for the authenticity of thebanknote chips and/or the denomination of the deposited banknotes to beable to be determined without further optical or other measurements justby reading out the associated chip data.

EXAMPLE 199

If the device is not designed for banknotes without a chip, but only fordepositing banknotes with a chip, the device can also dispense with thepresence of the associated sensor components for measuring magnetic, UVand/or infrared properties.

Such a testing system, where a signal coupling between the chip and thesensor unit and/or the receiving unit of an external evaluation deviceis only used for measurement or essentially only used for measurement,can, for example, then preferentially also be used when the depositor isknown and/or determinable and the authenticity and/or the condition ofthe deposited banknotes is controlled only later e.g. in a competentstate central bank.

EXAMPLE 200

In such a case, where the chip check itself indicates the presence of anauthentic banknote, and where the banknote proves to be a forgery duringa subsequent check, because e.g. the chip was incorporated intoworthless paper, the depositor can then be retraced later via the serialnumber. For this purpose, data on the depositor can be stored in amemory of the banknote's chip and/or in a separate database.

This is a special example for a case, wherein a correlation oftransaction data, such as data on the depositing person, the locationand the time of deposit with the measurement data of the sensor deviceis expedient, by e.g. this data being assigned and saved together. Inthis connection, e.g. data about the depositor, the time of the deposit,about the authenticity, the condition, the denomination and/or theserial number of the individual banknotes, the total value of thedeposited banknotes and/or the intended use of the deposited money, suchas data about the account, to which it is to be credited, aresummarized.

EXAMPLE 201

Given an anonymous deposit, however, the chip check does not suffice inthose cases wherein such forgeries cannot be reliably excluded.

Moreover, in the money depositing machine, a write device 209, withwhich data can be written into chip 3 of banknotes 1, willpreferentially be present downstream of sensor device 203.

Such data will be e.g. information, measured or, as the case may be,determined by sensor device 203, about test data and/or transaction dataabout the particular deposit transaction. Writing-in of such data willpreferentially occur after temporary storage, when the banknotes aretransported from temporary storage 204 to stacking cassette 206. As aresult, an unnecessary write operation can be avoided, in case thebanknotes are returned to the depositor into pocket 205 upon abortion ofa current transaction.

EXAMPLE 202

Further, it is also possible for such data to be written into not allof, but only part of the basically functioning banknote chips. Thus,e.g. data can be written into only those banknote chips whichpotentially or very likely should or, as the case may be, need to bechecked once more subsequently. In this context, these can be e.g.banknotes suspect of forgery, which do exhibit a functioning chip, butthe data of which, though, indicates a forgery (see the “Recognition ofduplicates” section) or the paper of which appears suspect of forgery.These banknotes suspect of forgery are preferentially stored in machine200 and/or cassette 206 separately from the banknotes not suspect offorgery.

EXAMPLE 203

It can occur that, e.g. due to signs of aging, the chip of an otherwiseauthentic banknote is defective or not identifiable. These banknotescan, for example, be immediately output to the depositor and/or alsostored separately in machine 200 or, as the case may be, retained incassette 206 so that they can be checked later by means of other devicesor procedures and possibly credited to the customer. Alternatively oradditionally, it is also possible in the case of the banknote check notbeing limited to a chip check, that the check of e.g. authenticity andthe determination of denomination is effected by means of the basicallyknown check of the banknotes' paper properties. Thus, provision can alsobe made to read the serial number of the banknotes by means of anoptical scanner as a camera system and to store these together with theother data about the retained banknotes in a memory of the automaticteller or, as the case may be, of the cassette.

EXAMPLE 204

In order, for example, in a transitional period after the introductionof banknotes with a chip, during which older banknotes without a chipare also to still be accepted as an authentic means of payment,provision can be made that, during an automatic check, e.g. by means ofa scanner, the serial number on the banknote paper is always read or atleast read in the case where a check is not recognized or not checked asauthentic. This [serial number] is then preferentially compared withdata, which give details about those banknotes, which were still putinto circulation in a regular fashion without a chip. This check caneither take place locally in the checking device itself or by means of aremote data transfer via a comparison with data in a central database.Moreover, provision can be made to achieve differentiation betweenauthentic banknotes without a chip and authentic banknotes with adefective chip or, as the case may be, an antenna in that atwo-dimensional image of the banknote, especially of those areas wherethe chip or, as the case may be, its antenna should be situated, isgained by means of a camera system. In this context, other commonprocedures, such as acoustic, electrical or other procedures, whichpermit detection of the presence of a chip, can also be used.

EXAMPLE 205

A further special embodiment is given when the banknote check isconstructed multiple-staged, in particular two-staged. This means e.g.that different checking procedures are performed at different speedsand/or different checking procedures are performed at separate times. Inparticular, this can also mean that there is one checking and/orevaluation process before and another one after temporary storage intemporary storage 209. Thus, it is thus particularly preferential fore.g. the determination of value, chip authenticity and/or assignment ofthe serial numbers to the depositor in the sensor device 203 to takeplace prior to storage in temporary storage 203, while the authenticitycheck, e.g. of the banknote paper features or print banknote printfeatures and/or the condition check is effected after the temporarystorage.

An advantage of this kind of an procedure consists in that thesubsequent checking steps, such as the check of condition, can takeplace at a slower speed than the checking steps prior to the temporarystorage. This makes it possible for the depositor to have the deposittransaction completed quickly with the temporary storage and to have thecondition check of the banknotes deposited during the transaction to beperformed only slowly in a period by no later than by the beginning ofthe next deposit transaction. Due to the time saving, a significantlymore inexpensive checking and evaluation device can thus also be used,which does perform checks such as the condition check accurately, butdoes so more slowly. At the same time, however, it is ensured thatsettlement of accounts with the customer, i.e. confirmation and thuscompletion of the deposit process, for example,.takes place quickly andconsequently, that the transaction time for the customer can decline.Therefore, e.g. a sensory system, which requires 1-5 seconds to evaluateone banknote, can also be used for the condition check.

Within the meaning of this concept, it is also possible e.g. to alreadyrecord data by means of associated sensors prior to temporary storage,but to evaluate at least part of these data only later, e.g. partiallyor fully after completion of the deposit transaction for the customer.Thus, it is possible e.g. for a camera that contains sensor unit 203, totake an optical, two-dimensional picture of at least a partial area ofthe individually-deposited banknotes and for the data to be evaluated,e.g. with regard to the presence of tears, dirt or stains, only later inorder to determine condition.

If, in that context, banknotes are e.g. classified as no longer fit forcirculation, they can then be stored in machines 200 and/or cassette 206separately from the banknotes which are still fit for circulation. Inthe case of banknotes with a chip, it is alternatively or additionallyalso possible to mark the banknotes that are fit for circulation and/orthe banknotes that are not fit for circulation by writing associateddata into the chip and storing these separately or together with theother banknotes. Due to the possibility of writing check data into thechip, simpler storage without the need for separate storage of banknotesthat are not fit for circulation and banknotes that are fit forcirculation can thus be produced

It is to be emphasized that the aforementioned system of themulti-staged check can also be advantageously used with all othermachines where banknotes are deposited. It is especially emphasized thatthis method is not limited to the use of banknotes with a chip, butrather that it can also be used with all banknotes without a chip.

EXAMPLE 206

Furthermore, as mentioned above, a money depositing machine is preferredthat identifies the retained banknotes as disabled prior to their finalstorage in the cassette. This has the advantage that money stolen fromthe machine after it is broken open is not considered authentic and thatit is therefore of no value to the thief, at least not if such disablingis also reproduced optically and/or acoustically or, as the case may be,reproducibly for humans without machine checking. Otherwise, thisidentifier of the banknotes, which continue to be considered authenticmay at least help to better follow the circulation of these banknotesupon a subsequent check of the banknote by machine.

EXAMPLE 207

A further particularly advantageous embodiment provides for thebanknotes to be fed in as a stack and processed in the stack, i.e.checked via measurement, among others. The methods and components of theapparatuses with which such a measurement in the stack can be carriedout were explained and described by way of example previously in thesection “Stack Measurement”.

If e.g. the value of the stack is determined without singling, directtransport into the end cassette can take place with the money depositingmachine. Singling, the transport of individual notes, the sensortechnology for individual notes and escrow can consequently beeliminated. The reliability of such a device increases significantly dueto the significantly simplified construction. In addition, the price canbe reduced drastically.

An example of such a money depositing machine 210 is schematicallyillustrated in FIG. 67. It comprises an input pocket 211, whereinbanknotes 1 with a chip are deposited as a stack onto a deposit surface215. The banknotes 1 loaded into pocket 211 are measured as a stationarystack by means of a checking device 212 controlled by a control device213. In this context, checking device 212 will be constructed andfunction in a manner as was described above in the section “StackMeasurement”. In particular, this measurement will comprise a valuedetermination for the determination of the total value of the depositedstack. Furthermore, the other, aforementioned processing steps can alsobe carried out by checking device 212, such as an authenticity checkand/or a check of condition and/or a writing of check data and/ortransactional data to the chip of the deposited banknotes.

Subsequently, the banknotes 1 thus tested are deposited stacked in thebanknote cassette 214. This can e.g. occur in that a non-depictedelectromechanical actuator is switched on and driven by the controldevice 213, by means of which drive the deposit surface 215, upon whichthe banknotes 1 in the input pocket 211 rest, is pulled away, such thatthe banknotes 1 in cassette 214 potentially fall upon the alreadystacked banknotes deposited therein. Subsequently, deposit surface 215is again moved back to the position depicted in FIG. 67, upon whichsurface banknotes can again be deposited during a subsequenttransaction.

In order to prevent unauthorized removal of banknotes after a check, butstill prior to final storage in cassette 214, input pocket 211 willpreferentially be lockable e.g. via a cover 216 that is pivotable bymeans of an electromechanical adjustment drive. This means that cover216 is or, as the case may be, will be opened at the beginning of adeposit process to enable the insertion of the banknotes 1 to bedeposited, and that, in particular prior to the beginning of the stackmeasurement, cover 216 will be closed to prevent an unauthorized accessto the banknotes 1.

EXAMPLE 208

A further variation consists in the following: In many countries,lawmakers provide that, in the case of money depositing machines,banknotes that are considered suspect of forgery must be deposited in aseparate pocket in order e.g. to ensure that banknotes that haveactually been forged can be destroyed following a technical criminalinvestigation. The necessity of the separate pocket results in a notinconsiderable increase in costs for such money depositing machines,since the pockets themselves not only need to be constructed, but inaddition, the entire transport path of the money depositing machinesmust also be modified such that the pocket can be filled with banknotes.Apart from this, the increase in space requirement for the moneydepositing machines is also not inconsiderable.

The necessity for such a separate pocket can be eliminated through theuse of the banknotes according to the invention. To that end, the factof the suspect of forgery is written into the memory area of eachbanknote suspect of forgery during the check in the deposit machines.This writing-in should preferentially be irreversible for the owner ofthe machine. Only the central bank can possess the privilege of liftingthe counterfeit suspicion in case the suspicion is not confirmed after acloser investigation. This can be implemented e.g. through the use ofvarious access privileges to the memory of the banknote.

The operator of the money depositing machines could then e.g. beobligated to check the banknotes removed from the money depositingmachines with a reading device and to send the banknotes reported assuspect of forgery to the central bank. If the banknote contains its owndisplay for displaying its condition, it would also be de factoimpossible for the operator of the money depositing machine to proceedotherwise, since the banknotes would have been clearly identified assuspect of forgery.

A further possibility consists in the use of PKI encryption methods. Thenumber of banknotes marked as suspect of forgery and/or other data, suchas the time of emptying, an emptying counter of the machine that cannotbe manipulated by the operator, etc. are encrypted by the machine with apublic key assigned to the machine and can be decrypted at the centralbank with the private key assigned to the machine. For example, theoperator can be forced by law to effect uninterrupted delivery of suchreports, with the variable portions, such as the time stamp or, as thecase may be, the counter of the encrypted data being able to cancel thepoints of attack for a manipulation, because this would prevented datafrom older transactions from being used once more.

Combined Money Depositing and Money Dispensing Machines

In the case of combined money-deposit and money dispensing machines,such as money changers or, in particular, recyclers, the aforementionedembodiments that were described in relation to money depositing machinescan be applied. This also applies in particular to the case where thedeposited banknotes are not again dispensed and therefore e.g. also neednot be stored separately by denomination. The aforementioned principlescan, however, also be used for a recycler wherein the depositedbanknotes are stored separately by denomination to be able to outputthem once again in subsequent money dispensing transactions. Thus, thereading/writing of chip data, the multistage checking method or, as thecase may be, the stack processing also prove to be particularlyadvantageous here, for example.

Since only the actual input process and output process should occurquickly in a recycler, e.g. the sorting of banknotes storedintermediately by denomination can in turn also take place at a slowerspeed. I.e. the singling of the e.g. banknotes inputted and measured inthe stack can potentially also be conducted after completion of thetransaction. Furthermore, deposited banknotes that are outputted againshould be checked for their authenticity in every case.

Money Dispensing Machines

In the case of money dispensing machines, too, some of theaforementioned concepts, which were described in relation to moneydepositing machines and combined money depositing and money disbursingmachines can be adopted. Thus, the reading/writing of chip data andstack processing also prove to be particularly advantageous in thiscase, for example. Thus, the serial numbers of all banknotes stored inthe supply cassettes of the money dispensing machine are captured e.g.by readout of the associated chip data and either stored in a databaseinternal to the machine or in a database connected from the outside bymeans of a data line.

EXAMPLE 209

A particular improvement to the currently known systems then results ifone unequivocally follows which banknote amounts have already beendisbursed and which ones are still located in the machine momentarily.

This can be effected in that a serial number reader is interposedbetween the memory area of the banknote to be dispensed and the outputpocket, which [reader] reads the serial numbers or other individual dataof all of the banknotes subsequently dispensed. This is then expedientif the correlation between the serial number and the denomination wasknown or e.g. was determined or, as the case may be, measured in anautomatic teller or another external apparatus.

EXAMPLE 210

In addition, the money flow can be controlled in that check data such asthe banknote serial numbers, together with transactional data, such asdata about the recipient, are stored when money is disbursed. Theconcept of temporary cancellation of the banknotes can likewise beadvantageously applied. Thus, through prior writing to their chips, thebanknotes inputted into the money dispensing machines by the commercialbank will be marked as cancelled and thus without value. By interposinga writing unit now for writing to the banknotes that are to be dispensedin an ongoing transaction between the deposit area of the banknotes tobe dispensed and the output pocket, the banknotes to be dispensedimmediately afterwards are enabled again by writing the associated datato the banknotes' chip.

EXAMPLE 211

In addition, provision can also be made to determine only thedenomination of all of the banknotes situated in the automatic tellers,in place of or in addition to the serial numbers. Here, e.g. theaforementioned measurement methods can be realized and utilized. Inparticular, a stack measurement of the banknotes stored in the automaticteller is thus expedient. This can in turn also be realized as a type ofself control, so that the momentary amounts of cash in the automaticteller are always determinable on the basis of a stack measurement by ameasurement device or, as the case may be, an evaluation devicecontained within the automatic teller or, as the case may be, itsstorage cassettes.

This make it possible for the cash stored within the machines to beacknowledged as a minimum reserve and thus as non-interest-bearingproperty of the Land Central Bank [FRG]. In known money dispensingmachines, the commercial bank that inputs and stores the banknotes inthe automatic tellers for later output to the customers must payinterest on these [banknotes] to the issuing Land Central Bank, since itcannot be continuously clarified which banknotes actually inputted intothe machines at a certain point in time are still situated in themachines at later points in time, and which are not. By means of theunequivocal self control it can, however, always be clearly demonstratedwhich cash amounts were still located in the money dispensing machineswhen or, as the case may be, exactly when they were dispensed. Thismethod will mean significant savings for the commercial banks.

Commerce

Cash registers, or registers for short, are used in all areas ofcommerce such as in supermarkets or department stores. As is commonlyknown, these registers serve to accept the customer's cash intended inpayment for purchased goods and to deposit it in the register and to inturn give out change from the cash holdings in the register. In largerbusinesses, money depositing machines, wherein, for example, the cashholdings of the respective registers are inputted and automaticallycounted and reconciled, are used as well to levy and reconcile theindividual registers of a department store.

Money Depositing Machines in Commerce

Within the meaning of the present invention, such money depositingmachines preferentially have properties as were previously described inthe section “Commercial banks/money depositing machines”. Moreover, itis also conceivable to use the above-described combined money depositingand money dispensing machines to not only reconcile the individualregisters, but to also simultaneously dispense the necessary (cash)change, e.g. for the next day.

In comparison to the use of such devices with money depositing functionat commercial banks, these devices for use in commerce willpreferentially be not be designed as variations that are installed suchthat they are stationary, but rather as mobile i.e. transportablevariations. If the device within this meaning e.g. is equipped with arack on rollers, it can thus be readily moved between the variousregisters of a department store to be able to levy and clear the cashholdings directly on location, without the need to first refill the cashthat was taken out of the register to be reconciled e.g. into a cassetteand to transport it to a money depositing machine installed such that itis stationary in another room.

Registers

Since cash is likewise inputted and dispensed at registers, embodimentsas described above for money depositing machines, money dispensingmachines and combined money depositing and money dispensing machines canalso be realized for these [registers].

In that context, the checking of banknote properties throughcommunication between the chip of the banknotes and an evaluationdevice, e.g. by optical, inductive or capacitive means, is once again ofparticular advantage. In this context, particular reference is onceagain made to the use of a “light barrier” and/or processing in thestack. Here, the evaluation device can either be present as completelyintegrated in or on/at the register and/or at least partially externalto it.

EXAMPLE 212

Reading device 220″ of FIG. 48 for the checking of banknotes withcapacitive coupling elements can thus be used for banknote checking atregisters. An associated device can e.g. be present externally orintegrated into the register itself. By depositing a stack of banknoteson the depositing surface 221, the authenticity and/or the value can bechecked rapidly, for example.

Further, the use of banknotes with a chip allows particularly reliable,automatic inventory or, as the case may be, monitoring of the register.This can e.g. be realized in that the register contains a device to beable to register each removal or insertion of banknotes.

EXAMPLE 213

For one, this can take place in that it is recognized whether banknotesare taken out of the deposit area of the register or insertion into it.This is e.g. accomplished by at least one checking unit installed in theregister as a type of light barrier, which determines, e.g. by means ofoptical, inductive or capacitive coupling with the banknote chip,whether same leave the deposit area of the register or not.Specifically, this can e.g. be determined by checking whether thebanknote chips come into a certain predefined coverage range of thecoupling or move out of same. Aside from the determination of thepresence of such banknotes that have been deposited and/or dispensed,the checking unit can e.g. preferentially also be designed such that itreads properties such as the serial numbers of the banknotes and/orchecks their authenticity. The authenticity check can e.g. also takeplace through the recognition of the chip and/or the checking of chipdata.

EXAMPLE 214

Additionally or alternatively, provision can be made to ascertain therespective momentary stock of cash in the register itself. I.e. it isnot directly ascertained whether banknotes are being taken in or, as thecase may be, dispensed, but rather which Banknotes are situated in theregister momentarily. To this end it can e.g. likewise comprise one ormore checking units that, through communication with the banknotes inthe register, determine their authenticity and/or number and/or serialnumber and/or total value. In this way, a type of self control of thecash holdings inside can also be realized for registers. In thiscontext, the cash holdings thus determined can also be displayed on adisplay surface of the register.

If the banknotes in the register are deposited cleanly by denomination,i.e. the banknotes of different denominations are deposited separatelyin different slots, it can also suffice to merely determine themomentary number of banknotes per slot, for example by means of one ofthe aforementioned stack measurement methods. Among other things,several of the slots, in particular each slot, will exhibit anindividual checking unit in this case as well. If it is predeterminedwhich denomination of banknotes are, or, as the case may be, aresupposed to be in which slot, the total value of banknotes perdenomination and/or the total value of all banknotes of an arbitrarydenomination can be determined e.g. by means of an evaluation deviceintegrated in the register or connected to it by a signal line. In casethe contents of a register can be determined free of doubt in this way,it is simple to document filling or removal by the register personnel atany time. One can therefore dispense with the currently customaryprocedure of personalized register drawers for banknotes.

EXAMPLE 215

E.g. in such a case, in order to prevent that the operating staff of theregister unintentionally deposit banknotes incorrectly, e.g. insert a 10e note in the slot for 20

notes, the register will preferentially be provided with a checking unitthat determines whether banknotes of only one individual denominationare present in the respective slot. By way of example, the case of aninductive or capacitive coupling to the banknote chip is explained. Ifthe transponders of the banknotes of different denominations eachexhibit a different frequency behavior, then e.g. an anticollisionmethod that determines whether “false” response frequencies, i.e.signals from banknotes of incorrect denominations, are measured in therespective slot, will be able to be used to advantage.

Alternatively or additionally, a deposit surface corresponding tosurface 221 of FIG. 48 can also be present in each of the individualslots to be able to determine and monitor the inventory of banknotes inthe individual slots.

EXAMPLE 216

A further particularity of registers, as opposed to the money depositingmachines or, as the case may be, money dispensing machines used incommercial banks, is that, not only must the capture of the amount ofmoney taken in occur in registers, but also a comparison with the amountto be paid per se, i.e. the total value of the purchased goods, with thedifference in the amounts being paid out again as change.

For that reason, the banknotes deposited in the register and/or taken inand/or dispensed from same are preferentially not only captured, butrather a comparison with the fixed total value of the purchased goodstakes place e.g. by means of scanning of the barcodes on the price tagsof the purchased goods. That means that e.g. in an evaluation device, acheck is performed to determine whether the operating staff member takestoo much and/or too little change from the register during a salestransaction. An incorrect disbursement of change can e.g. be displayedthrough an optical and/or acoustical warning. To the extent that thetaking in and dispensing of coins is not also recognized automatically,no exact counterbalance can be conducted in this case. At least,however, one can determine whether or not banknotes with a total valuethat exceeds the amount of change due were dispensed.

Through above-described monitoring it can also be ensured that no moneyis removed from the register at a certain point in time or in a certainperiod of time, e.g. when no sales transaction is being carried outmomentarily.

EXAMPLE 217

In order to also potentially be able to determine inconsistenciessubsequently, it is preferentially possible for all of or a portion ofthe data captured by the checking unit to be stored in connection with atime capture for later evaluation.

EXAMPLE 218

The checking unit for the recognition and checking of banknote chips canalso be connected with the scanner for the purchased goods. To theextent that the goods e.g. are likewise equipped by means of atransponder instead of an optical barcode, the scanner for the goods cansimultaneously also fulfill the function of the checking unit for therecognition and checking of the banknote chips. That means that a singledevice or, as the case may be, components of the register can sufficefor both the recording of the goods as well as the recording of thebanknotes.

EXAMPLE 219

The checking unit for the recognition and checking of banknote chips, aswas described in the above, can not only be integrated in permanentlyinstalled registers, but rather in mobile registers, cassettes orstrongboxes as well.

EXAMPLE 220

According to a further preferred example, information on the intendeduse of the banknotes are stored in the memory of the chips of thebanknotes. In this context, data with reference to the intended use areparticularly preferentially displayed with an electrooptical and/oracoustical display device that e.g. is integrated in the banknote paper.Through the fact that the information on the intended use are alsodisplayed such that they are visually visible or acoustically, one can,upon circulation of the money, also immediately recognize withoutadditional aids whether the banknotes are disabled for a certainintended use.

EXAMPLE 221

Thus data, which indicate that the banknotes are only to be exchangedfor certain goods or groups of goods, can be stored or are stored in thechip memory or, as the case may be, can be displayed or are displayed onthe display, so that, for banknotes that e.g. are dispensed by theparents to their children as pocket money, symbols are displayed in thedisplay that indicate that no goods such as alcohol or cigarettes can bepurchased with the respective money.

In this case as well, provision can further be made that the checkingunits of the registers, which are set in accordance with theaforementioned, read the relevant memory contents of the banknote chipsand refuse the acceptance of such banknotes in the payment process forexcluded goods.

EXAMPLE 222

According to a further preferred embodiment, the display is used as aninformational surface or an advertising surface on which information isdepicted. In particular, an intended use for the document of value canbe displayed. In this case, the use of the banknote it is not completelyunrestricted, but rather a certain use such as the purchase in certainbusinesses or of certain goods is considered preferential or limited orexcluded. This display of the intended use can function mandatorily ormerely as a recommendation. In addition, e.g. correspondingly adjustedchecking apparatuses may refuse the acceptance of such documents ofvalue in the payment process for goods excluded by the display. Throughthe fact that the information on the intended use are displayed invisually visible fashion, one can, during circulation of the money, alsoimmediately recognize without additional aids whether the banknotes havebeen released for a certain intended use.

EXAMPLE 223

In an embodiment, provision is made that a consumer can, at certainterminals intended for consumers, which are set up and operated by thecompany, call up the status of banknotes received. Likewise, manualdevices that are offered commercially can find application for thispurpose. To this end, a particular addressing and associated storagearea is provided in the electrical circuit of the banknote, under whichthe company can write and store information for this banknote in theelectrical circuit. This can be the serial number (that is opticallyvisible on the BN for everyone), but also information about anotherintended use (e.g. gratuity, bonus, prize). The consumer can thenretrieve the status of the banknote at the described devices. In thiscontext, provision can also be made that the consumer likewise writesinformation under the particular address, e.g. his name, home address,customer number, etc.

To this end, the company writes informations to the electrical circuitof the banknote under the respective addressing. This can e.g. takeplace in that the company provides randomly selected banknotes, theserial numbers of which it has previously read in and e.g. stored on adata processing system, with an identifier prior to the dispensing ofchange at the registers. As described above, this informations arestored under the particular address so that these addressed informationsare only read out at customer terminals provided by the company for thatpurpose and/or at the registers of the company. It is also conceivablethat manual devices could be obtained by customers, with the help ofwhich the customer could then read out the status of the banknotesreceived by him. This can take place on the premises of the company, butit is also conceivable that the customer calls up these informationse.g. at home by means up of an additional device or a network connectionsuch as an Internet connection or a mobile radiotelephone connection(GSM, UMTS, etc.).

The information given out (e.g. presence of prize or no prize) isdirectly displayed or transmitted to the customer. A banknote providedwith a prize is enabled (erased) again by the company after handing outthe prize, preferentially at the register or at the customer terminal,for this purpose, the particular address is again enabled. Afterwards,the banknote can also be given back to the customer again. In order tobe able to translate the procedural procedure described into practice,EEPROMs (electrically erasable programmable ROMs) are preferentiallyused as the memory of the electrical circuit of the banknote. However,magnetic and/or optical memory devices that are writable or, as the casemay be, rewritable and erasable are also conceivable.

EXAMPLE 224

A further potential application example for a banknote with anelectrical circuit is a tracking and tracing process. Here, the banknoteor, as the case may be, its electrical circuit is previously providedwith an identifier, e.g. through storage of the serial number. If theconsumer then brings the banknote into the vicinity of one of thecustomer terminals described above, a register or a manual readingdevice, such register or device recognizes whether the banknote isspecifically marked. For department store chains, this tracking mustexpressly not be limited to one branch. One can e.g. imagine that thecustomer in Department Store A in City B is given a marked banknote, butthat it is first examined for an identifier mark at a terminal during asubsequent visit to Department Store C in City D. In this context,provision is made that the customer sends e.g. an SMS (short messageservice) to the department store via mobile telephone or internetapplication when he recognizes that the banknote is marked, and in acountermove thereupon receives a message whether a prize is associatedwith the present banknote and/or what type of prize is involved in thiscontext.

EXAMPLE 225

A further example relates to a lottery function (similar to a raffle).Here, certain banknotes are marked and provided with a lottery ticketnumber as in a raffle. If the customer then checks the number during hisvisit to the department store he can see whether his BN is marked(“prize”) or not (“dud”). Here, the prize can be visualized at aterminal, or the customer receives a message about his prize via SMS,surface mail etc. and it is later personally handed out or shipped.

EXAMPLE 226

In a particular application, provision can be made that the customerenters the serial number of his banknote received at the participatingcompany on an internet page provided specifically for that purpose. Hemay then leave e.g. his name, address or similar. The company conducts atype of lottery at periodic intervals in which certain serial numbersare selected as prizes.

EXAMPLE 227

A particular form of the application according to the invention can e.g.also be that a casino or a gambling establishment gives out specialcoupons, jetons or stamps (special bank notes are also conceivable) uponthe cashing of a check or during the exchange of cash at the beginningof a visit to the casino, which [items] are likewise marked by means ofa chip. During certain games of chance (e.g. at the roulette table, butalso other conceivable games such as blackjack, baccarat, slot machine,etc.), the jeton, the stamp or even the banknote are then examined foran identifier mark and, as applicable, the prize or bonus is handed outor credited to the customer.

EXAMPLE 228

In a further application example, provision can be made that a companywrites a gratuity to the banknote in addition to the denomination of themarked banknote. E.g. a marked 50

note contains an additional gratuity of 10

that can then be redeemed in the same company, even at a later time,e.g. upon the purchase of a further article. This function can also becombined with the customer cards frequently issued nowadays, which canlikewise have an electrical circuit. In this context, by means ofspecially marked banknotes, acquired gratuities can be transferred tothe customer card or be credited directly upon the purchase of goods. Inthis context, it is particularly expressly provided that theabove-described terminals for the recognition of the identifier marks ofthe banknotes can also simultaneously write to or read customer cards.

EXAMPLE 229

In this context, it is possible that a business e.g. allows its logo tobe depicted on the display by writing corresponding data to theelectronic memory of the banknote chip and accepts the banknotes thusmarked as discount coupons upon purchase. For a banknote with adenomination of 100

, the customer would receive e.g. goods in the value of 110

upon purchase. In case the business does not wish to reissue thecoupon-banknote again, it will subsequently erase the displayedinformation which marks the coupon in that, e.g. control signals, whichalter and/or erase the usage data in the memory of the chip of thebanknotes in appropriate fashion, are transmitted to the chip of thebanknote with the checking unit of the register.

EXAMPLE 230

In addition, if e.g. goods of lesser value than the denomination of thebanknotes are purchased in the department store, the usage informationcan thus preferentially be applied to the change that will be dispensedto the customer. Consequently, the deposited banknote is automaticallyrecognized in the register during the deposit process and, via a writingdevice integrated in the register or externally to it, the change ismarked by means of a noncontacting coupling to the chip of the change incorrespondence to the intended use displayed for the deposited banknote.In this context and in the above-described variations, the chip can notonly be situated in the banknotes, but also in coins. In this context,the coin is preferentially nonconducting, e.g. except for the componentsof the chip and the antenna necessary for a transponder function, ande.g. manufactured of hard plastic.

EXAMPLE 231

A display of the banknote can also be advantageously used to indicatethe momentary validity of a banknote. By way of example, it isconceivable that a code of correspondingly authorized banks can bewritten into the memory of the control device integrated in thebanknotes, which [code] completely limits the use of the banknote, i.e.renders the banknote temporarily or permanently void. This state will berecognized by the associated reading devices for such banknotes, and thebanknotes then classified as not authentic.

However, to be able to also recognize this invalidity without a readingdevice, the validity state is additionally depicted on the display. Inthis case, e.g. an LED in the banknote that is turned on or turned offfor an invalid banknote already suffices. Preferentially, e.g.correspondingly-adjusted checking devices that are e.g. integrated intothe register or mounted externally to it may refuse the acceptance ofsuch documents of value during the payment process of goods that areexcluded as per the display.

EXAMPLE 232

Preferentially, an apparatus will be provided that serves to processsuch sheet-shaped documents of value, wherein a writable memory such asan EPROM, EEPROM, and a display device is integrated, which displays aninformational content optically and/or acoustically, with the apparatusbeing provided with a writing device for the writing of data to thememory in order to be able to alter a display condition of the displaydevice e.g. in the aforementioned way by changing a data content of thememory.

The high-quality inventory check, authenticity check, and/or value checkconducted by way of the communication with the banknote chip can, e.g.in the aforementioned cases, take place offline and/or online. Thismeans that the evaluation device for the evaluation of the measurementdata of the checking unit(s) is either integrated in the register itselfor present outside of it and connected to the register via a signalline. The signal line can be wireless and/or wire-bound. In an externalevaluation, the checking unit of the register will preferentially beconnected with a central evaluation device by means of a networkconnection, such as an intranet connection, internet connection, fixednetwork connection or mobile radiotelephone connection, which evaluatesand checks the data from several registers.

EXAMPLE 233

The data can e.g. be used to automatically capture the inventory of theindividual registers so that before, when a prescribed minimum number ofnotes of a certain denomination is reached or fallen short of, suchbanknotes can be delivered in a timely fashion to the respectiveregister.

EXAMPLE 234

In addition, the readout of the chip data from a banknote stored and/orplaced in a register can be used e.g. for a capture of its serialnumbers. Thus by way of example, the appearance of previously registeredbanknotes, e.g. that stem from an extortion for ransom money, canquickly be determined. Again, the evaluation takes place either“offline” in the register system itself, or “online” via a connection toan external database. In the latter case, the system is also suited forthe determination of general data about the circulation of cash such asdistribution speed, dwell time, etc..

EXAMPLE 235

If non-identifiable or, as the case may be, defective banknote chipsappear during the payment procedures, the banknotes on which are presentfurther e.g. visually discernible or tactilely palpable securityfeatures will thus be checked manually by register personnel or with thehelp of separate checking devices and/or ones that are also integratedin the register or at least connected to it. In case the registerholdings are automatically monitored, the necessary data, such as thequantity of banknotes with a defective chip placed in a slot and/ortheir denomination, can be inputted by means of an input unit andtransmitted to the evaluation device of the register. In this context,the banknotes with a defective chip are preferentially also stored inthe register separately from the banknotes with an operable chip so thatthey are sorted out more readily and not dispensed to the customersagain.

EXAMPLE 236

The chip 3 of a banknote 1 will typically contain information on thedenomination of the banknote 1. In this context, a further idea of thepresent invention consists in providing such banknotes 1 with analterable denomination. In this context, this alterable denomination cane.g. be displayed by means of optical or acoustic display deviceslikewise described within the scope of this invention.

In this context, the denomination that is stored in encrypted form inchip 3 should only be able to be altered by correspondingly authorizedpersons or, as the case may be, institutions with the aid of specialreading devices, or as the case may be, writing devices that recognizethe encryption code. This can e.g. be used to transfer the denominationof a banknote or a portion thereof from one banknote to another by meansof an associated reading-writing device. Further, this can e.g. be usedto the end that the equivalent value of banknote 1 or a portion thereofis transferred and credited to an account. It is likewise conceivablethat the equivalent value of banknotes 1 with chip 3 contained in acontainer, such as a cassette or a vault of an automatic teller, istransferred to an account while the banknotes are stored in thecontainer. By way of example, not until or shortly before issuance, arethe banknotes then again equipped with the respectively appropriatedenomination. In this way, the insurance premium necessary in principleor, as the case may be, interest can be avoided. So as to be able tostill produce information about the momentary denomination of a certainbanknote, even during a chip failure, the associated data, that is dataon the denomination in conjunction with a unique feature, e.g. theserial number of the banknote, should be stored in an external database,such as a database that is central for a certain region.

EXAMPLE 237

It is likewise conceivable that the checking device according to FIG. 37is integrated in a cash register and, in fact, preferentially in severalor all deposit slots. The light source, such as a laser diode for theactivation of an outermost banknote in the stack will againpreferentially be integrated in the base of the respective deposit slotsto illuminate the bottommost banknote in the deposit slot from belowe.g. after closing of the register drawer. Here there can be anautomatic switch that is coupled to the closing process of the drawerand activates the laser diodes. To achieve a better contacting betweenthe individual banknotes in the stack, provision can be made for theseto be pressed together with a clamp in the deposit slot.

Preferentially, the banknote illuminated first, i.e. bottommost in thestack, will now send its information to the checking unit of the depositslot. After checking or, as the case may be, registration, the nextsuccessive banknote lying above is supplied with energy as described, inturn sends information to the checking unit in the drawer, etc.. At theend, the status of the banknotes situated in the register drawer canthus be readily evaluated e.g. by serial numbers, denomination,quantity, total value, etc. and e.g. displayed on a register display.

Consumer

Since the chip of the banknote is only readable by machine, a personusing cash can only then obtain increased security against forgeries if(s)he uses a suitable checking device. Advantageously, this devicecommunicates with the chip of the banknote in order to e.g. check thevalue and/or the authenticity of the banknotes. As in the registersystems, an additional brief visual or tactile check by the personremains unaffected by this as a rule.

A check of just a few features can already be sufficient since, in thisapplication, as in the application in registers, a visual check of thebanknotes to be examined is additionally carried out by the operatingstaff.

EXAMPLE 238

By way of example, this can be merely a check for the presence of thefeatures described in greater detail in the above that aid theauthenticity check, and/or it can merely be a check of the chip data bycommunication with the chip to provide a reliable, but cost-effectivechecking device.

EXAMPLE 239

Such checking devices are preferentially designed as portable manualchecking devices. These can be carried along by the user as a compact,separate device or instead also be integrated e.g. in a key ring,glasses case, pocketknife, mobile telephone, cigarette case or a lighteretc..

This has the advantage that the consumer can also take the device withhim when shopping, for example. In this context, aside from denominationand/or authenticity, e.g. the aforementioned information on intended usecan be checked exclusively or particularly by means of the communicationwith the banknote chip as well.

EXAMPLE 240

In addition, such a device for the consumer can also be integrated in achange purse that serves to receive cash. The necessary energy supply ofthe checking unit is preferentially achieved by a compact battery, suchas a button cell or a thin layer battery or a thin layer accumulator, orinstead by a photovoltaic element that is attached to the outer side ofthe change purse. Energy supply by a piezo transducer is alsoconceivable, however. The checking unit can, at typically lesserdimensions, be designed like the checking units of the manual checkingdevices and/or the registers. I.e. preferentially, e.g. each removal oraddition of banknotes from or, as the case may be, to the change pursecan also be monitored and/or its banknote content monitored.

EXAMPLE 241

The aforementioned display devices can also be present in the checkingdevices themselves or the devices connected to them. Thus, the intendeduse e.g., an advertisement or the validity of the banknotes can bedetermined through the readout of chip data by the checking device andthen displayed on the checking device. This is e.g. is of advantage forthe variation wherein the checking the unit is integrated in a mobiletelephone and thus the display of the mobile telephone is used for thedisplay e.g. of the aforementioned data.

EXAMPLE 242

A particular need also exists for checking devices for the blind. Thesecan e.g. be integrated in a manual device or, as the case may be, achange purse as was described in the preceding examples.

By way of example, if the banknote here is introduced to the checkingthe unit, then a signal output occurs which is different for differentdenominations. In this context, the reality of a signal output canalready be viewed as a simpler demonstration of authenticity for theblind. The signal output occurs either as a clearly audible acousticalsignal, such as a buzz tone, or else over a vibration generator thatvibrates and whose signals can be clearly perceived tactilely.Preferentially, no signal output occurs while the banknotes are locatedin the coin purse, which e.g. can be controlled through software orrealized in that the geometry of the checking unit is so designed thatit does not react to banknotes in the interior of the coin purse.

If necessary, it is, however, also feasible to display the entirecontents of the coin purse. By way of example, this stack reading can betriggered via an affixed pressure switch, with the signal output beingcoded or, as the case may be, modulated in a suitable manner or takingplace directly via a speech module.

As a further alternative, it is conceivable to separate the acousticalsignal output from the checking unit. Thus e.g. an earpiece can beconnected with the checking unit via a cable.

However, it is also possible to only make the necessary energy andtrigger available via the checking the unit. If the banknotes e.g. areequipped with a piezoelectrical foil element (e.g. PVDF) coupled to thetransponder of the banknote, the banknote to be checked can itself emita suitable acoustical signal. This an also then apply correspondingly ifthe banknotes e.g. are equipped with a magnetostrictive foil element, sothat the banknote to be checked can itself emit a suitable vibratorysignal.

The Handling of Banknotes with a Defective Chip

For all areas of the handling of banknotes wherein banknotes withdefective or missing electrical circuits can appear, the question arisesas to how the banknotes without such operable electrical circuit,hereinafter referred to as banknote circuit for short, can be processedalong with the other bank notes in a consistent work process. In thiscontext, possible areas of the aforementioned handling of banknotes thate.g. come into question include: the production of banknotes, banknoteprocessing, the acceptance of banknotes at money depositing machines ofcommercial banks or of commerce, the acceptance of banknotes at registersystems, the transport of such accepted banknotes or the destruction ofsuch banknotes.

To be able to process the banknotes without operable banknote circuitsin all of these processes in the same style and manner as the banknoteswith operable banknote circuits, it is possible to subsequently providethese banknotes with an operable circuit, termed additional circuit forshort.

In this context, it is fundamentally possible to use an electricaladditional circuit that is identical to the banknote circuit employed inthe banknotes. However, this approach holds problems, since thepossibility of subsequently attaching such additional circuits tobanknotes also offers points of attack for potential forgeries.

Therefore, the banknotes are preferentially provided with additionalcircuits that are different than the banknote circuits that are usuallyused. In this context, the additional circuit will in factpreferentially have a communication interface identical to that used inthe banknote circuits of the banknotes, so as to ensure that theseadditional circuits, too, can react to interrogations of a readingdevice in the desired manner. In any event, they will, however, differfrom the banknote circuits to such an extent, e.g. through theirresponse signals to the interrogation for data of the circuit and/orover the functions implemented in the additional circuit, that confusionis ruled out.

A simple differentiation consists e.g. in the return of the serialnumber “0” and/or the return message of the banknote value of null uponinterrogation by an external reading device. Such a banknote willimmediately be able to be recognized as subsequently provided with anadditional circuit by an appropriate reading device and only beaddressed with the functions implemented on it.

On the other hand, such a banknote without an operable banknote circuitcan, however, also place other demands on an additional circuit that thenormal banknote circuit cannot meet. Since e.g. forgeries also often donot have a correctly functioning banknote circuit, the additionalcircuit can e.g. have a larger memory area than the banknote circuit,with additional data, which e.g. could be helpful to a technicalcriminal investigation, being able to be recorded in the additionalcircuit.

One obvious possibility of mounting such an additional circuit on thebanknote consists in the use of suitable auxiliary carriers that containthe additional circuit and are connected with the banknote, or enclosesame. Such auxiliary carriers could e.g. be the bands likewise describedwithin the scope of the present invention, but it could also be pocketsinto which the banknotes are inserted.

A preferred embodiment of the above described auxiliary carrier consistsin the use of adhesives that are attached to the banknotes, for whichreason only the adhesives will be dealt with by way of example in thefollowing. The adhesives can either be inseparably associated with thebanknote, or instead, again detached and reused after the steps ofhandling have taken place.

Even if the use of the adhesives with an electrical additional circuitonly appears to cause unnecessary costs at first, in this way, theentire handling process for the banknotes can, however, becomesignificantly cheaper. Various possibilities of use will now beexplained.

In banknote processing, many of the advantages described further abovefor the banknote with a circuit according to the invention are presentto a significantly greater extent if the assumption can be made that allof the processed banknotes have an operable circuit. Thus e.g. anintelligent light barrier can only then reliably recognize the transportof overlapping banknotes or, instead, a mix-up in the order of banknotesif all banknotes exhibit an operable circuit.

Accordingly, to increase the reliability of processing, the adhesive canbe attached at banknote processing machines with individual processingor those with combined individual processing and stack processing, e.g.during or immediately after singling, after an attempt at communicationin the singler itself has failed, and the banknote is then processedindividually or in groups with the same process reliability. Exclusivestack processing of such banknotes, as well, remains possible in thosecases where the adhesives were attached to the banknote in previousprocess steps affecting the banknote e.g. by the depositor.

In order to e.g. be able to perform here the marking of banknotessuspect of having been counterfeited described further above, provisioncan be preferentially made to attach an above-described adhesive labelto the banknotes without circuit, which [banknotes] can in principle beconsidered suspect of forgery, in order to write the data about theforgery suspicion into the memory of the circuit. With this, the reportto be generated on the register contents described below can in somecircumstances be avoided.

Even the variation of attaching adhesives with electrical circuits tothe banknotes prior to destruction can have substantial advantages inrelation to the tamperproofness of the destruction process. If all ofthe banknotes to be destroyed have circuits, i.e. of banknote circuitsand/or additional circuits, the light barriers will thus be able toreliably uncover manipulations to the banknote flow prior to themechanical destruction. In particular, such a procedure presents itselffor the destruction of print-fresh reject banknotes, where only a smallnumber of defective circuits is to be expected.

1. An apparatus for processing sheet material, in particular banknotes,that has at least one electrical circuit, characterized by a checkingdevice for the transfer of energy and/or data to the electrical circuitof the sheet material and/or for the reception of energy and/or datafrom the electrical circuit of the sheet material, with at least part ofthe transferred energy and/or data being used for the processing.
 2. Anapparatus according to claim 1, characterized in that the checkingdevice is designed to record and/or determine and/or check one or moreproperties, such as the authenticity and/or the denomination and/or theaggregate value and/or the serial number and/or other individual dataand/or the life history of the sheet material from the transferred data.3. An apparatus according to at least one of the prior claims,characterized in that the checking device is equipped with the followingtransfer methods either alone or in combination: A contact-typecoupling, a noncontacting coupling, an inductive coupling, a capacitivecoupling, a galvanic coupling via contacts, a coupling by means of anelectrical field, a coupling by a magnetic field, an optical coupling byelectromagnetic waves, a coupling by deformation, such as piezoelectricelements, a coupling by electromechanical elements, a coupling by soundand/or a coupling by heat.
 4. An apparatus according to at least one ofthe prior claims, characterized in that the checking device has at leastone coupling unit, such as an electrode to the capacitive coupling, amagnet for producing a magnetic field, a coil for inductive coupling, alight source for optical coupling, in particular for illuminating aphoto cell and/or a photodiode of the sheets, and/or a sound source, inparticular an ultrasonic source, in order to irradiate an electricelement of the sheet material that reacts to sound, such as apiezoelectrical element, with the coupling unit preferentially beingprovided in a base surface on which the sheets are provided stacked fora measurement and/or integrated in another component of the processingapparatus, such as a singler and/or a transport path and/or a sensorpath and/or a stacker and/or a temporary memory and/or a deposit means.5. An apparatus according to at least one of the prior claims,characterized in that a plurality of different transfer methods isavailable to the checking device in each case for the reception ofenergy and/or data of the sheet circuit and/or for the transfer ofenergy and/or data to the sheet circuit.
 6. An apparatus according to atleast one of the prior claims, characterized in that selection of one ormore of the different transfer methods is dependent on a control signalthat is preferentially transferred to the circuit of the sheet materialfrom the processing apparatus or to the processing apparatus of thecircuit from the sheet material.
 7. An apparatus according to at leastone of the prior claims, characterized in that the checking device forthe reception of energy and/or data of the sheet circuit has a receivingunit that can use the same and/or another transfer method such as forthe transfer of energy and/or data to the sheet circuit.
 8. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the prior claims, characterized in that thechecking device for the reception of energy and/or data from the sheetcircuit has a receiving unit that is situated in the same and/or anotherprocessing section of the processing apparatus as a transmitting unitfor the transfer of energy and/or data to the sheet circuit.
 9. Anapparatus according to at least one of the prior claims, characterizedin that the checking device for the reception of energy from the sheetcircuit and/or for the transfer of energy to the sheet circuit can usethe same and/or another transfer method as for the reception of datafrom the sheet circuit and/or for the transfer of data to the sheetcircuit.
 10. An apparatus according to at least one of the prior claims,characterized in that the checking device for the reception of energyand/or data from the sheet circuit can use an optical coupling and thatit can use an inductive and/or capacitive coupling for the transfer ofenergy and/or data to the sheet circuit.
 11. An apparatus according toat least one of the prior claims, characterized in that the checkingdevice can measure the properties of a plurality of sheets with astationary stack of sheets and/or with a moving stack of sheets and/orthe properties of individual sheets with stationary and/or movingindividual sheets.
 12. An apparatus according to at least one of theprior claims, characterized in that the sheets of the sheet material canbe transported and/or processed, in particular tested, both individuallyand in a stack in the apparatus.
 13. An apparatus according to at leastone of the prior claims, characterized in that the checking device cansuccessively measure the properties of individual sheets and/orsimultaneously measure the properties of several sheets, in particularall sheets.
 14. An apparatus according to at least one of the priorclaims, characterized in that the checking device can address, e.g.activate, several circuits of different sheets simultaneously and/or inserial succession, and/or that several circuits of different banknotesthat are addressed can simultaneously and/or in serial succession sendresponse signals back to the processing apparatus.
 15. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the prior claims, characterized in that thechecking device can not activate a circuit of one of the sheets until acircuit of another of the sheets to be processed has already sent out aresponse signal.
 16. An apparatus according to at least one of the priorclaims, characterized in that, in particular when an optical and/orinductive coupling is used to transfer energy and/or data to the sheetcircuit, the position of the coupling field of the processing apparatusis moved, in particular in the stacking direction of the stack beingchecked so that the different sheets in a stack can be addressedsuccessively.
 17. An apparatus according to at least one of the priorclaims, characterized in that, in particular when an inductive couplingis used to transfer energy and/or data from the processing apparatus tothe sheet circuit, the strength of the coupling field of the processingapparatus can be increased selectively during the checking operation sothat the different sheets in a stack can be addressed successively. 18.An apparatus according to at least one of the prior claims,characterized in that the transfer of data can be effected viasingle-stage and/or multi-stage modulation of the transferred signal, inparticular when optical coupling is used, and/or via load modulation,e.g. of the transferring energy, and/or via changing coefficients ofoptical transmission, reflection and/or absorption.
 19. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the prior claims, characterized in thatwhen optical coupling is used, the spectral composition and/or timebehavior, in particular the duration, level, intervals and/or sequenceof pulse of the light signals emitted by or, as the case may be,received from the sheet material depends on the data to be transferred.20. An apparatus according to at least one of the prior claims,characterized by a light source to irradiate an individual photodiode ofa sheet or several photodiodes of several sheets of a stack.
 21. Anapparatus according to at least one of the prior claims, characterizedin that the checking device can initially determine individual data,such as a serial number of one or more sheets, such as via the receptionof data from the sheet circuits, in order to then be able to selectivelyaddress individual sheet circuits or a subset of all of the sheetcircuits in a further step.
 22. An apparatus according to at least oneof the prior claims, characterized in that the checking device cantransfer data on the life history of the sheets to the sheets.
 23. Anapparatus according to at least one of the prior claims, characterizedin that the checking device can transfer an authentication signal to thesheet circuit to obtain authorization for carrying out certainprocessing operations such as reading and/or modifying the contents of amemory of the circuit.
 24. An apparatus according to at least one of theprior claims, characterized by a singler for separating sheet material,which can remove one sheet at a time from a stack of sheet material,with the checking device designed such that the transfer of energyand/or data between the circuit situated on a sheet that is to be pulledoff and the device takes place before and/or as the sheet is beingpulled from the stack.
 25. An apparatus according to at least one of theprior claims, characterized in that means for securing transfer of thedata, such as encryption or a digital signature of the transferred dataare provided.
 26. An apparatus according to at least one of the priorclaims, characterized in that the checking device can communicate withthe circuit of the sheet material via both or only one of the twofrequencies when sheet material with several coupling elements ofdifferent coupling frequencies is used.
 27. An apparatus according to atleast one of the prior claims, characterized in that the checking devicecan only communicate with the circuit of the sheet material via theother frequency if and only if a communication at one of the twocoupling frequencies of the coupling elements fails.
 28. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the prior claims, characterized in that thechecking device can alter the circuit at a certain point in timefollowing application to or, as the case may be, incorporation in thesheet material such that the writing of data is prevented in all or partof the memory areas of the circuit.
 29. An apparatus according to atleast one of the prior claims, characterized in that the checking devicecan deactivate the circuit of a checked sheet and/or at least interruptone of possibly several connecting lines that are connected with thecircuit during or after a checking operation, preferentially dependenton the result of the check.
 30. An apparatus according to at least oneof the prior claims, characterized in that the checking device canirradiate an oscillating circuit of the sheet material with analternating field and that signals produced by the oscillating circuitand received by the checking device can be evaluated so as to check thesheet material, for e.g. authenticity.
 31. An apparatus according to atleast one of the prior claims, characterized in that the checking devicecan check the presence and/or the form and/or a surface structure, e.g.a surface pattern, and/or the position and/or the distribution withseveral circuits in or, as the case may be, on the sheet material as anauthenticity feature.
 32. An apparatus according to at least one of theprior claims, characterized in that the checking device can measure andevaluate the temperature, such as the heat distribution of the sheetmaterial, or another quantity derived from same, when the sheet materialis checked.
 33. An apparatus according to at least one of the priorclaims, characterized in that, in order to examine the contents of acontainer, the checking device can compare data about the contents ofthe container, which are stored in a memory of the container, with dataabout the contents of the container, which are stored in a memory of thesheet material circuit of at least one of or all of the sheets in thecontainer.
 34. An apparatus according to at least one of the priorclaims, characterized in that, in a processing operation, the checkingdevice can transmit data to a container, which are intended for writinginto the sheets in the container, so that these data will be storedtemporarily in a memory of the container in order to write the data tothe corresponding memory of at least one of the sheets only at a laterpoint in time after completion of the processing operation, e.g. duringremoval of the sheets contained therein.
 35. An apparatus according toat least one of the prior claims, characterized in that a circuit can beapplied to or, as the case may be, incorporated into a band alreadyduring production of the band or only during or after a bandingoperation during which a stack of sheets is provided with a band.
 36. Anapparatus according to at least one of the prior claims, characterizedin that the checking device has a device for generating an alternatingmagnetic field that can penetrate a stack of banknotes to be checked,preferentially in the stacking direction and/or perpendicular to thestacking direction.
 37. An apparatus according to at least one of theprior claims, characterized in that the frequency of an alternatingmagnetic field generated by the device corresponds to a mechanicalresonance frequency of a magnetostrictive element of the sheet materialor to a mechanical resonance frequency of a compound material of thesheet material with the magnetostrictive element.
 38. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the prior claims, characterized in that thechecking device can perform an anticollision detection procedure in theprocessing apparatus and/or in the sheet material circuit during achecking operation.
 39. An apparatus according to at least one of theprior claims, characterized in that the apparatus further has a pressingdevice, which can compress the sheets for a stack measurement and/or theapparatus further has an aligning device, which can align the sheetssuch that they are flush with reference to one or two edges disposedperpendicularly to one another.
 40. An apparatus according to at leastone of the prior claims, characterized in that the checking device has asonic sensor for detecting sound waves that are radiated from a sonicsource connected with the sheet material circuit, such as a reciprocalpiezoelectric element of the sheet material.
 41. An apparatus accordingto at least one of the prior claims, characterized in that there is/areone or more keys and/or sets of keys, which can be used alternatively,for encryption of data to be stored and/or transferred and/or forforming of a digital signature of data to be stored and/or transferred.42. An apparatus according to at least one of the prior claims,characterized in that the checking device can include individual data,such as a serial number of the sheet material, in an encrypted or, asthe case may be, signed set of data of other data of the sheet materialor, as the case may be, for the sheet material.
 43. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the prior claims, characterized in that thechecking device can forward data of the circuit of the sheet material tobe checked to a spatially removed evaluation unit for checking purposes,which can evaluate the data and send a check result back to theprocessing apparatus.
 44. An apparatus according to at least one of theprior claims, characterized in that the checking device can, in onecheck, preferentially, in every check of sheet circuits, transfer tosuch sheet circuits a new identification number for storage in a memoryarea of the sheet circuit provided for this purpose, with theidentification number preferentially also being able to be stored in anexternal data base situated outside the sheet material together withindividual data, such as the serial number of the respective sheet. 45.An apparatus according to at least one of the prior claims,characterized in that the checking device can compare the identificationnumber and the individual data from the memory of the sheet materialwith associated data in the external data base in a checking operation.46. An apparatus according to at least one of the prior claims,characterized in that the checking device or the external data base canregenerate and/or select the identification number from a set ofpredetermined identification numbers at the time of the checkingoperation.
 47. An apparatus according to at least one of the priorclaims, characterized in that, in addition to the identification number,the checking device can also transfer to the sheet circuit a time stampand/or a location stamp of the current checking operation and/or of oneor more preceding checking operations for storage in a memory area ofthe sheet circuit provided for this purpose and/or to store same in amemory of the checking device.
 48. An apparatus according to at leastone of the previous claims, characterized in that the newly generatedidentification number and/or the newly generated time stamp and/orlocation stamp depends on the current or a previous identificationnumber and/or on the current or a previous time stamp and/or locationstamp.
 49. An apparatus according to at least one of the previousclaims, characterized in that there are several external databases, andthat the checking device can select one of the external databases for asubsequent check evaluation by means of a predetermined selectioncriterion which depends e.g. on the identification number and/or thetime stamp and/or the location stamp.
 50. An apparatus according to atleast one of the previous claims, characterized in that the checkingdevice can evaluate data obtained by a data transmission between theprocessing apparatus and the sheet material circuit, in dependence ondata which stems from other checking operations that were performedindependently of the sheet material circuit.
 51. An apparatus accordingto at least one of the previous claims, characterized in that thechecking device can compare data from the memory of the sheet materialcircuit with data, which are specific to the respective paper of thesheet material and/or feature substances contained therein.
 52. Anapparatus according to at least one of the previous claims,characterized in that the checking device can refer to data obtained bya data transmission between the processing apparatus and the sheetmaterial circuit for adjusting checking parameters of other checkingoperations performed independently of the sheet material circuit.
 53. Anapparatus according to at least one of the previous claims,characterized in that, in a checking operation, preferentially in everychecking operation, wherein sheet material is rated or classified asstill fit for circulation, the checking device can transmit data to thesheet material circuit, which cause an irreversible, local change of thesheet material, whereby the data about the change can preferentially bestored in a memory of the circuit of the sheet material, and/or thechecking device itself can perform such an irreversible, local change ofthe sheet material.
 54. An apparatus according to at least one of theprevious claims, characterized in that the checking device is formedsuch that a transmission of data and/or energy from the processingapparatus to the sheet material circuit and/or from the sheet materialcircuit to the processing apparatus is always possible independently ofthe orientation of the checking device of the sheet material and/or thetransport direction (T1, T2) of the sheet material with reference to thechecking device, i.e., e.g. both in longitudinal transport and intransverse transport of the sheet material.
 55. An apparatus accordingto at least one of the previous claims, characterized in that thechecking device has several segments which can alternatively beelectrically interconnected, and/or the checking device of theprocessing apparatus is formed by a singler, for example by a separatingroll, and/or the checking device of the processing apparatus has adevice which produces a rotating and/or traveling electrical and/ormagnetic field.
 56. An apparatus according to at least one of theprevious claims, characterized in that, during transport of sheets inthe processing apparatus, the checking device can determine the positionof the sheets in the processing apparatus in dependence on data, inparticular on individual data, which are transmitted to the processingapparatus from the sheet material circuit.
 57. An apparatus according toat least one of the previous claims, characterized in that the checkingdevice can use data which are transmitted to the processing apparatusfrom the sheet material circuit for detecting several picks and/or thestate of the sheets.
 58. An apparatus according to at least one of theprevious claims, characterized in that, during or after a checkingoperation, the checking device can transmit data to the sheet materialcircuit for storage in a memory of the sheet material circuit, wherebythe data relate to the checking operation.
 59. An apparatus according toat least one of the previous claims, characterized in that, in achecking operation, the checking device can compare paper data withcircuit data of the sheet material.
 60. An apparatus according to atleast one of the previous claims, characterized in that the processingapparatus has a singler, a sensor and a stacker, and sheet material canbe transported directly from the singler to the stacker without aseparate sensor path.
 61. An apparatus according to at least one of theprevious claims, characterized in that a stack of sheets is clamped onone side by means of a clamping device, and that on the other side, amechanism can single the sheets clamped on one side, and the sheetmaterial circuits can be addressed by the checking device during thesingled state.
 62. An apparatus according to at least one of theprevious claims, characterized by a sensor, such as a limpness sensor orhole sensor, wherein the sheet material to be checked is deformed formeasurement of paper properties, whereby the bending additionally servesthe purpose of supplying energy to the sheet material circuit and/or oftransmitting data of the sheet material circuit to the processingapparatus.
 63. An apparatus according to at least one of the previousclaims, characterized in that the processing apparatus has separatetransport paths for single sheet processing and for stack processing.64. An apparatus according to at least one of the previous claims,characterized in that containers for transporting sheet material withinthe processing apparatus can be transported.
 65. An apparatus accordingto at least one of the previous claims, characterized in that aprocessing apparatus with combined individual and stack processing hasone or more output stations from which containers with sheet materialdeposited therein can be outputted from the apparatus for removal of thecontainers and/or the sheets contained therein, whereby the outputstations each have assigned thereto one or more filling stations,wherein the containers are filled with sheet material before they aretransported to the associated output station.
 66. An apparatus accordingto at least one of the previous claims, characterized in that, in partof the or all the individual processing parts of the processingapparatus, such as the singler, the sensor path, the stacker or theinterjacent transport paths, which are preferentially realized asmodular units, only at most one deposit and/or one stack of sheetmaterial can always be contained at the same time.
 67. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the previous claims, characterized in that,in the apparatus, a physical separation is given by spatial spacing ofdifferent deposits during the processing of several deposits in theprocessing apparatus.
 68. An apparatus according to at least one of theprevious claims, characterized in that there is a separating means forseparating a number of sheets into two subsets, whereby the separatingmeans is equipped with an electrical circuit which has the samecommunication interface as the sheet material.
 69. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the previous claims, characterized in thatseparating means can prevent communication of the checking device withthe sheet material circuits of one of the two subsets.
 70. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the previous claims, characterized in thata sensor for checking properties of the sheet material circuit ismounted in the same and/or a spatially spaced different area, such as inthe same or, as the case may be, different module cases or processingparts, in comparison with a sensor for checking paper properties of thesheet material.
 71. An apparatus according to at least one of theprevious claims, characterized in that a unit for reading data from amemory of the sheet material circuit is disposed in the same and/or aspatially spaced different area as a unit for writing data to the memoryof the sheet material circuit.
 72. An apparatus according to at leastone of the previous claims, characterized in that the writing unit isdownstream of the reading unit and/or the writing unit is downstream ofa sensor device, which can measure properties of the circuit and/or ofthe paper of the sheet material.
 73. An apparatus according to at leastone of the previous claims, characterized in that, in a processingoperation, the checking device can only write data and/or transmit datato the sheet material circuit for writing to a part of the basicallyfunctioning memories of the sheet material circuits, which e.g. are tobe checked once again and/or have been checked as false or suspicious.74. An apparatus according to at least one of the previous claims,characterized in that, in the processing apparatus, there are aplurality of reading units for reading individual data from the sheetmaterial circuits in the transport path of the sheet material so thatthe position and identity of transported sheets can be clearly traced.75. An apparatus according to at least one of the previous claims,characterized in that the checking device can perform at least one orall checks of the sheet material, such as a check of the authenticity ofthe sheet material, only in dependence on data transmitted from thesheet material circuit to the processing apparatus.
 76. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the previous claims, characterized in thata correlation of transaction data upon a deposit and/or disbursement ofsheet material with measurement data for checking the associated sheetmaterial can be performed, and that the correlation data canpreferentially be stored in a memory of the sheet material circuit of atleast one of the sheets of the sheet material and/or in a memory of theprocessing apparatus and/or in an external database.
 77. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the previous claims, characterized in that,independently of an evaluation of signals for transmitting data and/orenergy to the sheet material circuit, the checking device can determinewhether a sheet material circuit is present at a predetermined positionand/or in a predetermined form and/or at a predetermined location on or,as the case may be, in the sheet material paper.
 78. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the previous claims, characterized in that,in a processing operation, the checking device can perform differentchecking operations at different speeds on a sheet material and/orperform different checking operations at separate times.
 79. Anapparatus according to at least one of the previous claims,characterized in that the checking device can perform checkingoperations prior to an intermediate storage of the checked sheetmaterial at a higher speed than checking operations after theintermediate storage.
 80. An apparatus according to at least one of theprevious claims, characterized by an input means for input of a stack ofsheet material by an operator, and a final stacker, such as a cassette,from which inputted sheet material can no longer be removed by theoperator, whereby the inputted sheets can be checked by a checking unitconnected to the checking device and transported directly from the inputmeans to the final stacker, in particular in the stacked state.
 81. Anapparatus according to at least one of the previous claims,characterized in that, in a processing apparatus having a sheet materialoutput function, a checking unit, which can determine the serial numberor other individual data of the sheets transported from the sheetmaterial pocket to the output pocket, is interposed between a sheetpocket and an output pocket.
 82. An apparatus according to at least oneof the previous claims, characterized in that the banknote processingapparatus is part of a cash register, a tabletop unit, a manual checkingdevice, a purse and/or a pocket checking device.
 83. An apparatusaccording to at least one of the previous claims, characterized by oneor more stacker, such as storage pockets and/or cassettes, whereby thechecking device is designed for automatically checking the stock ofsheet material having a sheet material circuit in all of or some of thestacker.
 84. An apparatus according to at least one of the previousclaims, characterized in that the checking device can register allsheets having an operable sheet material circuit in the stacker and/orcan register each removal and/or input of such sheets having an operablesheet material circuit into the stacker or, as the case may be, out ofthe stacker.
 85. An apparatus according to at least one of the previousclaims, characterized in that the checking device can ascertain whethersheets of only one kind, such as banknotes of only one denomination, arepresent in the stacker.
 86. An apparatus according to at least one ofthe previous claims, characterized in that the processing apparatus is aseparate and preferentially portable cash register unit, which can bothdetect goods to be bought in a purchase transaction and check banknotesfor authenticity at least.
 87. An apparatus according to at least one ofthe previous claims, characterized in that the memory of the sheetmaterial circuit can store data about the intended use of the sheetmaterial.
 88. An apparatus according to at least one of the previousclaims, characterized in that, in a processing operation, the sheetmaterial can subsequently be provided with an additional electricalcircuit.
 89. An apparatus according to at least one of the previousclaims, characterized in that the additional circuit has differentproperties from the sheet material circuit, whereby the communicationinterfaces are preferentially identical.
 90. A method for processingsheet material, in particular banknotes, which has at least oneelectrical circuit, having a processing apparatus, characterized in thatenergy and/or data are transmitted from the apparatus to the electricalcircuit and/or from the electrical circuit to the apparatus, whereby atleast part of the transmitted data is used for processing.
 91. A methodaccording to claim 90, characterized in that one or more properties,such as of the authenticity and/or the denomination and/or the totalvalue and/or the serial number or other individual data and/or the lifehistory of the sheet material, are determined from the transmitted dataand/or checked.
 92. A method according to at least one of claims 90 to91, characterized in that the properties of several sheets are measuredwith the stack at rest and/or with the stack moving, and/or theproperties of singled sheets are measured with the sheets at rest and/ormoving, and/or the properties of single sheets are measured successivelyand/or the properties of several, in particular all, sheets are measuredsimultaneously, and/or several circuits of different sheets areaddressed, such as activated, by the processing apparatus simultaneouslyand/or serially one after the other, and/or several circuits ofdifferent addressed sheets send back response signals to the processingapparatus simultaneously and/or serially one after the other.
 93. Amethod according to at least one of claims 90 to 91, characterized inthat a circuit of one of the sheets is only activated when a circuit ofanother of the sheets has already emitted a response signal, and/or thecircuit of a first sheet can receive data and/or energy which is emittedby the circuit of a second, in particular an adjacent, sheet in a stack,and the circuit of the first sheet is preferentially activated independence on the received signal of the second sheet.
 94. A methodaccording to at least one of claims 90 to 93, characterized in that thesheets of the sheet material are transported and/or processed, inparticular checked, in the apparatus both singly and in stacked form.95. A method according to at least one of claims 90 to 94, characterizedin that, for transmitting energy and/or data from the sheet materialcircuit to the processing apparatus and/or from the processing apparatusto the sheet material circuit, contact-type or contactless coupling,inductive coupling, capacitive coupling, galvanic coupling via contacts,coupling by an electrical field, coupling by a magnetic field, opticalcoupling by electromagnetic waves, coupling by deformation, such aspiezoelectric elements, coupling by electromechanical elements, couplingby sound and/or coupling by heat are used alone or in combination.
 96. Amethod according to at least one of claims 90 to 95, characterized inthat the same and/or a different transmission method is used fortransmitting energy and/or data from the sheet material circuit to theprocessing apparatus as that used for transmitting energy and/or datafrom the processing apparatus to the sheet material circuit, and/or thesame and/or a different transmission method is used for transmittingenergy from the sheet material circuit to the processing apparatusand/or from the processing apparatus to the sheet material circuit asthat used for transmitting data from the sheet material circuit to theprocessing apparatus and/or from the processing apparatus to the sheetmaterial circuit.
 97. A method according to at least one of claims 90 to96, characterized in that several different transmission methods areavailable for transmitting energy and/or data from the sheet materialcircuit to the processing apparatus and/or for transmitting energyand/or data from the processing apparatus to the sheet material circuit.98. A method according to at least one of claims 90 to 97, characterizedin that the selection of one or more of the available differenttransmission methods is effected in dependence on a control signal whichis preferentially transmitted to the circuit of the sheet material fromthe processing apparatus or to the processing apparatus from the circuitof the sheet material.
 99. A method according to at least one of claims90 to 98, characterized in that, in particular in the case of opticaland/or inductive coupling for transmitting energy and/or data from theprocessing apparatus to the sheet material circuit, the position of thecoupling field of the processing apparatus is moved, in particular inthe stacking direction of the stack to be checked, to permit differentsheets in a stack to be addressed successively.
 100. A method accordingto at least one of claims 90 to 99, characterized in that, in particularin the case of inductive coupling for transmitting energy and/or datafrom the processing apparatus to the sheet material circuit, thestrength of the coupling field of the processing apparatus is increasedspecifically during the checking operation to permit different sheets ina stack to be addressed successively.
 101. A method according to atleast one of claims 90 to 100, characterized in that individual data,such as the serial number, of one or more sheets are first determined,e.g. by a data transmission from the sheet material circuit to theprocessing apparatus, so that, in a further step, single sheet materialcircuits or a subset of all sheet material circuits can be addressedspecifically by the processing apparatus.
 102. A method according to atleast one of claims 90 to 101, characterized in that data about the lifehistory of the sheet material are stored in a memory of the circuit ofthe sheet material.
 103. A method according to at least one of claims 90to 102, characterized in that an authentication signal is transmitted tothe circuit by the processing apparatus to receive from the circuit aright to perform certain processing operations, such as to read and/orchange the memory contents of a memory of the circuit.
 104. A methodaccording to at least one of claims 90 to 103, characterized in thatduring or after a checking operation, preferentially in dependence onthe result of the check, the circuit of a checked sheet is deactivatedand/or at least one of optionally several connecting leads connected tothe circuit is interrupted.
 105. A method according to at least one ofclaims 90 to 104, characterized in that, in the case of sheet materialhaving several coupling elements with different coupling frequencies,the apparatus communicates with the circuit of the sheet material onboth or only one of the two frequencies, and preferentially communicateswith the circuit of the sheet material on the other frequency only whencommunication on one of the two frequencies of the coupling elementsfails.
 106. A method according to at least one of claims 90 to 105,characterized in that, at a certain point in time after application toor incorporation into the sheet material, the circuit is changed so asto prevent data from being written into all or some of the memory areasof the circuit.
 107. A method according to at least one of claims 90 to106, characterized in that an oscillating circuit of the sheet materialis exposed to an alternating field, and signals produced by theoscillating circuit are evaluated for checking the sheet material, e.g.for authenticity.
 108. A method according to at least one of claims 90to 107, characterized in that, for checking the contents of a container,data about the contents of the container, which are stored in a memoryof the container, are compared with data about the contents of thecontainer, which are stored in a memory of at least one of or all of thesheets in the container.
 109. A method according to at least one ofclaims 90 to 108, characterized in that, in a processing operation, dataintended to be written in the sheets of a container are transmitted tothe container and stored intermediately in the memory thereof, so thatthe data are not written into the corresponding sheets until a laterpoint in time after completion of the processing operation, e.g. uponremoval of the sheets contained therein.
 110. A method according to atleast one of claims 90 to 109, characterized in that a circuit isalready applied to or incorporated into a band during production of theband or only after a banding operation wherein a stack of sheets isprovided with a band.
 111. A method according to at least one of claims90 to 110, characterized in that, in a checking operation, a method ofanticollision detection is performed in the processing apparatus and/orin the sheet material circuit.
 112. A method according to at least oneof claims 90 to 111, characterized in that, for a stack measurement, thebanknotes are pressed together and/or aligned flush according to one ortwo mutually perpendicular edges.
 113. A method according to at leastone of claims 90 to 112, characterized in that data intended fortransmission and/or for writing to a memory of the sheet material and/orof the processing apparatus are encrypted and/or digitally signed,whereby there are preferentially one or more keys and/or sets of keys,which are alternatively used, for encrypting data to be stored and/ortransmitted and/or for forming a digital signature of data to be storedand/or transmitted, and/or preferentially individual data, such as aserial number of the sheet material, are included in an encrypted or, asthe case may be, signed data set of other data.
 114. A method accordingto at least one of claims 90 to 113, characterized in that a checkingoperation is evaluated by the processing apparatus passing on data ofthe circuit of the sheet material for checking purposes to a spatiallyremote evaluation unit, which evaluates the data and sends back a checkresult to the processing apparatus.
 115. A method according to at leastone of claims 90 to 114, characterized in that, in a check,preferentially in every check, of sheet material circuits, a newidentification number is stored in a specially provided memory area ofthe sheet material circuit, with the identification numberpreferentially also being stored together with individual data, such asthe serial number of the respective sheet, in an external databaselocated outside the sheet material.
 116. A method according to at leastone of claims 90 to 115, characterized in that, in a checking operation,the identification number and the individual data from the memory of thesheet material are compared with associated data in the externaldatabase, with the check being performed completely or partly, either inthe sheet material circuit and/or in the processing apparatus and/or inthe external database.
 117. A method according to at least one of claims90 to 116, characterized in that, at the time of the checking operation,the identification number is newly generated and/or selected from a setof predetermined identification numbers and/or that, in addition to theidentification number, a time stamp and/or a location stamp of themomentary checking operation and/or of previous checking operations arestored, which are preferentially stored in the memory of the sheetmaterial and/or in the external database.
 118. A method according to atleast one of claims 90 to 117, characterized in that there are severalexternal databases, and one of the external databases is selected for asubsequent check evaluation by means of a predetermined selectioncriterion which depends e.g. on the identification number and/or thetime stamp and/or the location stamp.
 119. A method according to atleast one of claims 90 to 118, characterized in that data obtained by adata transmission between processing apparatus and sheet materialcircuit are evaluated in dependence on data which stems from otherchecking operations performed independently of the sheet materialcircuit, and/or data obtained by a data transmission between theprocessing apparatus and the sheet material circuit are used foradjusting checking parameters of other checking operations performedindependently of the sheet material circuit.
 120. A method according toat least one of claims 90 to 119, characterized in that data from thememory of the sheet material circuit are compared with data which arespecific to the respective paper of the sheet material and/or featuresubstances contained therein.
 121. A method according to at least one ofclaims 90 to 120, characterized in that, in a checking operation,preferentially in every checking operation, wherein the sheet materialis rated or classified as still fit for circulation, the sheet materialis subjected to an irreversible, local change of the sheet material,with the data about the change preferentially being stored in a memoryof the circuit of the sheet material.
 122. A method according to atleast one of claims 90 to 121, characterized in that, during a transportof sheets in the processing apparatus, the position of the sheets in theprocessing apparatus is determined in dependence on data, in particularindividual data, which are transmitted to the processing apparatus fromthe sheet material circuit, and/or data about the checking operation arewritten into a memory of the sheet material circuit during or after achecking operation, and/or paper data are compared with circuit data ofa sheet during a checking operation.
 123. A method according to at leastone of claims 90 to 122, characterized in that a transmission device ofthe sheet material circuit is supplied, by deformation of the sheetduring singling of the sheets clamped on one side, with energy whichcomes from a transmission device of the processing apparatus and/or fromthe sheet material circuit itself, such as an associated piezoelectricelement.
 124. A method according to at least one of claims 90 to 123,characterized in that a physical separation is performed by spatialspacing of different deposits during the processing of several depositsin the processing apparatus.
 125. A method according to at least one ofclaims 90 to 124, characterized in that separating means are equippedwith electrical circuits which have the same communication interfaceand/or communication interfaces as the sheet material, and/or separatingmeans for separating sheets into two subsets are used, which can preventcommunication of the processing apparatus with the sheet materialcircuits of one of the two subsets.
 126. A method according to at leastone of claims 90 to 125, characterized in that, in a processingoperation, data which e.g. are to be checked once again and/or have beenchecked as false or suspect of forgery, are written only into a part ofthe basically operating memories of the sheet material circuits.
 127. Amethod according to at least one of claims 90 to 126, characterized inthat a correlation of transaction data is performed upon a depositand/or a disbursement of sheet material with measurement data forchecking the associated sheet material and the correlation datapreferentially being stored in a memory of the sheet material circuit ofat least one of the sheets of the sheet material and/or in a memory ofthe processing apparatus and/or of an external database.
 128. A methodaccording to at least one of claims 90 to 127, characterized in that, ina processing operation on a sheet material, different checkingoperations are performed at different speeds and/or different checkingoperations are performed at separate times, in particular, checkingoperations before an intermediate storage of the checked sheet materialtake place at higher speeds than checking operations after intermediatestorage.
 129. A method according to at least one of claims 90 to 128,characterized in that data about the intended use of the sheet materialare stored in the memory of the sheet material circuit, and/or there aredifferent access rights for reading from and/or writing to the memory,in particular different memory areas, of the circuit of the sheetmaterial for different users or, as the case may be, user groups.
 130. Amethod according to at least one of claims 90 to 129, characterized inthat the sheet material is subsequently provided with an additionalelectrical circuit in a processing operation.
 131. A container, such asa safe or a cassette or a band for storing and/or transporting sheetmaterial, comprising at least one electrical circuit and a transmissiondevice for transmitting energy and/or data from the circuit of thecontainer to an apparatus, which is formed for processing the container,and/or for receiving energy and/or data from such an apparatus.
 132. Acontainer according to claim 131, characterized in that the containerhas a processing apparatus or at least one component of a processingapparatus according to at least one of claims 1 to [?].
 133. A containeraccording to at least one of claims 131 to 132, characterized in thatthe container is used in a processing apparatus according to at leastone of claims 1 to [?] for receiving processed sheet material and/oroutputting contained sheet material from the container.
 134. A containeraccording to at least one of claims 131 to 133, characterized in thatthe circuits of the sheet material in the container can communicatedirectly with an external processing apparatus according to at least oneof claims 1 to [?].
 135. A container according to at least one of claims131 to 134, characterized in that the contents of the container, such asthe number, denomination and/or total value of the contained sheets, canbe registered and optionally checked by the container itself.
 136. Acontainer according to at least one of claims 131 to 135, characterizedin that data, such as about the contents of the container, can be storedin a memory of the container and/or a memory of at least one of or allof the sheets in the container.
 137. A container according to at leastone of claims 131 to 136, characterized in that, following a query froman external processing apparatus, the container can provide data aboutthe sheets contained therein and/or write data into a memory of thecircuit of the sheets contained therein.
 138. A container according toat least one of claims 131 to 137, characterized in that the containeris so formed that, in a processing operation, it can accept dataintended to be written into the sheets, hold them in its memory andwrite the intermediately stored data into the corresponding sheets onlyat a later time after completion of the processing operation, e.g. uponremoval of the sheets contained therein.
 139. A container according toat least one of claims 131 to 138, characterized in that thetransmission device of the container for transmitting energy and/or datato an external processing apparatus is based on the same and/or adifferent transmission method compared to a transmission device forcommunication with the sheet material circuits in the container. 140.Sheet material having at least one electrical circuit, comprising adevice for transmitting and/or receiving energy and/or data to or, asthe case may be, from an apparatus for processing the sheet material,with at least part of the transmitted energy or data being used forprocessing.
 141. Sheet material according to claim 140, characterized inthat there is a unit for transmitting energy and/or data from the sheetmaterial circuit to the processing apparatus and another unit forreceiving energy and/or data from the processing apparatus.
 142. Sheetmaterial according to at least one of claims 140 to 141, characterizedin that the unit for transmitting energy and/or data from the sheetmaterial circuit to the processing apparatus works according to the sameor a different transmission method compared to the receiving unit,and/or there are different transmission units which make availabledifferent alternatively selectable transmission methods.
 143. Sheetmaterial according to at least one of claims 140 to 142, characterizedin that the circuit has at least one memory, with the memorypreferentially having several memory areas that are separate from oneanother and can be written to and/or read from only once and/or manytimes.
 144. Sheet material according to at least one of claims 140 to143, characterized in that an authentication system is provided whichhas data about different access authorizations for different users or,as the case may be, user groups for reading and/or changing memorycontents of a memory of the circuit, with the authentication systempreferentially being connected to a maloperation counter.
 145. Sheetmaterial according to at least one of claims 140 to 144, characterizedin that there are one or more keys and/or sets of keys for encryptingdata to be stored and/or transmitted and/or for forming a digitalsignature of data to be stored and/or transmitted.
 146. Sheet materialaccording to at least one of claims 140 to 145, characterized in thatthe circuit has one or more logical switches, and preferentially datarelated to a switching process can be stored, assigned to the respectiveswitch.
 147. Sheet material according to at least one of claims 140 to146, characterized in that one or more different individual data whichare characteristic of the particular banknote are stored and/or can bestored in the memory.
 148. Sheet material according to at least one ofclaims 140 to 147, characterized in that a memory of the sheet materialcircuit contains paper data specific to the particular sheet, and/orcircuit data about the circuit are incorporated in the paper and/orapplied to, e.g. printed on, the paper as information, and/or the memoryof the sheet material circuit stores data specific to the particularbanknote, the paper data and circuit data of the particular banknotecorrelate, and/or these correlated data are incorporated into the paperand/or applied to, e.g. printed on, the paper as information.
 149. Sheetmaterial according to at least one of claims 140 to 148, characterizedin that the sheet material circuit has a detection device, such as adevice for evaluating an input voltage of the circuit, to permitdetection of a data transmission from other sheets in a stack to aprocessing apparatus.
 150. Sheet material according to at least one ofclaims 140 to 149, characterized in that at least one transmissiondevice for optically transmitting energy and/or data is provided, whichhas an optical transmitter, such as a light-emitting diode, and/or atleast one photodiode for sending and/or receiving light, and/or thesheet material has a photocell and a light source, the photocellpreferentially being located on one side of the sheet material and thelight source on the other side thereof.
 151. Sheet material according toat least one of claims 140 to 150, characterized in that the photodiodeis applied to a luminescent element, such as a single-layer ormultilayer LISA element, which is optionally provided with a reflectivecoating, and/or the photodiode is applied to a light source, inparticular a luminous surface, and/or the spectral composition and/orthe time behavior, in particular the duration, height, spacing and/orsequence of pulse, depends on emitted light signals from the data to betransmitted.
 152. Sheet material according to at least one of claims 140to 151, characterized in that the sheet material has incorporatedtherein or applied thereto elements with a “shape memory” effect and/orpiezoelectric effect and/or magnetostrictive effect, such as a compositematerial out of magnetostrictive and piezoelectric substances, and/orone or more capacitive coupling surfaces.
 153. Sheet material accordingto at least one of claims 140 to 152, characterized in that thecapacitive coupling surface has connected thereto an inductance Lp ofdefined value, which can preferentially be alternatively switched on oroff, and/or the voltage occurring on an element with a piezoelectriceffect is used for voltage supply to the circuit, and/or the frequencyof the voltage occurring on the element with a piezoelectric effect isused as the reference frequency for producing a clock frequency of thecircuit.
 154. Sheet material according to at least one of claims 140 to153, characterized in that the paper of the sheet material has amagnetic substance having a magnetic permeability significantly greaterthan the relative permeability of paper without said magnetic substance,and the magnetic substance is preferentially incorporated into and/orapplied to the paper, such that the inductance of a coil as a couplingelement of the circuit is increased and/or the substance exhibits amagnetic behavior that is direction-dependent.
 155. Sheet materialaccording to at least one of claims 140 to 154, characterized in thatthe sheet material has receivers for light and/or ultrasound forsupplying the circuit with energy by irradiation of light or ultrasound,and/or one or more sensors for measuring environmental influences areincorporated in or applied to the sheet material
 156. Sheet materialaccording to at least one of claims 140 to 155, characterized in thatthe position of the circuit varies in the case of several sheets, e.g.in the case of banknotes of one currency and/or of the same or differentdenominations, and/or the circuit has an area of from 5 to 95% of thesheet material, preferentially from 50 to 90% or, as the case may be, 70to 90%, and/or the circuit is located below an optically variableelement.
 157. Sheet material according to at least one of claims 140 to156, characterized in that the sheet material has several couplingelements, such as a first antenna coupled directly with the circuit anda second antenna coupled with the first antenna for coupling to theprocessing apparatus, the several coupling elements preferentiallyhaving different coupling frequencies, which are preferentially selectedspecifically to the currency and/or denomination.
 158. Sheet materialaccording to at least one of claims 140 to 157, characterized in thatthe circuit has an integrated circuit and/or a memory and/or anelectrical oscillating circuit, and/or the circuit is connectedconductively via at least one line to at least one conductive capacitivecoupling surface as an electrode, and/or the sheet material has one ormore galvanic contact surfaces on one or both sides in each case, and/orthe sheet material is provided with one or more integratedelectro-optical and/or acoustic display devices, and/or the sheetmaterial has electrical resistors for defined production of heat, and/orthe circuit has a device for producing a load modulation and/or a devicefor voltage regulation and/or a device for anticollision detection. 159.Sheet material according to at least one of claims 140 to 158,characterized in that upon and/or after emission of a signal which thecircuit emits following an external query from the processing apparatus,said circuit changes to an operating state in which it no longer reactsto the query from the processing apparatus.
 160. Sheet materialaccording to at least one of claims 140 to 159, characterized in thatthe sheet material has a variable denomination which is stored in amemory of the sheet material circuit.
 161. A method for producing sheetmaterial or an intermediate product for use in the production of sheetmaterial, characterized in that the sheet material is sheet materialaccording to at least one of claims 140 to 160 or an intermediateproduct, in particular according to at least one of claims 181 to 183.162. A method according to claim 161, characterized in that a part orthe total circuit is incorporated into the paper and/or applied theretoin the course of papermaking and/or subsequently, before and/or in thecourse of the printing of the paper, e.g. by mixing the circuit into aprinting ink, and/or after completion of the printing of the paper. 163.A method according to at least one of claims 161 to 162, characterizedin that the sheet material circuit is prepared on or in a transferelement which is applied to or incorporated into the sheet material e.g.by gluing, and the transfer element either remains there afterapplication of the circuit in or to the sheet material as a component ofthe sheet material or is removed again.
 164. A method according to atleast one of claims 161 to 163, characterized in that the transferelement, e.g. in the form of a carrier foil, is provided preferentiallybefore mounting of the circuits, with a metallization which isoptionally connected electroconductively with the circuit.
 165. A methodaccording to at least one of claims 161 to 164, characterized in thatthe circuit is produced completely or partly by printing technology,such as by means of conducting or conductive polymers or on the basis ofthin amorphous or polycrystalline silicon layers (α-Si, p-Si), on abase, such as the sheet material or the transfer element.
 166. A methodaccording to at least one of claims 161 to 165, characterized in thatthe circuit is produced on the basis of a combination of methods ofsemiconductor technology and polymer electronics, with components thatare operated in the high-frequency range preferentially being producedfrom semiconductor technology, and components that are operated in a lowfrequency range from polymer electronics.
 167. A method according to atleast one of claims 161 to 166, characterized in that, when the circuitis produced on a base by printing technology, the base has areas made ofdifferent materials which have different affinities to printing inks.168. A method according to at least one of claims 161 to 167,characterized in that, when the circuit is produced by printingtechnology on a base, such as the sheet material paper itself or thetransfer element, this is smoothed e.g. by means of calendering, bycoating or providing a primer coating, before application orincorporation of the circuit, and/or the base of the circuit is embossede.g. by steel gravure printing.
 169. A method according to at least oneof claims 161 to 168, characterized in that, after papermaking and/orprinting, one or more different individual data, which arecharacteristic of the particular sheet, are stored in a memory of thecircuit.
 170. A method according to at least one of claims 161 to 169,characterized in that all single copies of a printed sheet are providedwith the circuits one after the other or in one overall step.
 171. Amethod according to at least one of claims 161 to 170, characterized inthat the circuits are incorporated into a depression for printing ink ona printing plate by being incorporated into the depression e.g. throughan opening of the printing plate.
 172. A method according to at leastone of claims 161 to 171, characterized in that the circuits are appliedto the printed sheets with the help of rolls, such as insertion rolls orpress rolls, which are provided from the outside and/or inside with thecircuits to be inserted.
 173. A method according to at least one ofclaims 161 to 172, characterized in that the sheet material or thetransfer element has one or more depressions into which the circuitsand/or their contact surfaces are washed, and/or the circuits and/ortheir contact surfaces are incorporated into the depressions by theaction of vibration.
 174. A method according to at least one of claims161 to 173, characterized in that a magnetic substance having a magneticpermeability, which is significantly greater than the relativepermeability of the paper without this magnetic substance is added tothe paper during or after papermaking, with the magnetic substancepreferentially being incorporated in and/or applied to the paper suchthat the inductance of a coil as a coupling element of the circuit isincreased, and/or the magnetic substance is present in the form of asemifinished product, which is optionally fastened to a transfer elementand is provided on the paper or incorporated into the paper, e.g. adepression or a through hole in the paper, either during or afterpapermaking.
 175. A method according to at least one of claims 161 to174, characterized in that a papermaking screen for producing a paperweb from paper pulp or a transport path for transporting a paper web hasone or more magnets, which bind an applied magnetic substance in locallylimited areas of the paper web.
 176. A method according to at least oneof claims 161 to 175, characterized in that several coupling elementsfor the circuit with different coupling frequencies are incorporatedinto or applied to the paper and/or, when a first antenna coupleddirectly with the circuit and a second antenna coupled with the firstantenna for coupling to an external processing apparatus areincorporated into or applied to the paper, the coupling frequency of thesecond antenna is selected specifically to the currency and/ordenomination.
 177. A method according to at least one of claims 161 to176, characterized in that at least one property, such as a resonantfrequency of the circuit of the sheet material, is specifically detunedduring papermaking, before, during and/or after printing.
 178. A methodaccording to at least one of claims 161 to 177, characterized in that,during production, paper data are coupled with circuit data, and theresulting data are written to a memory of the circuit and/or associatedinformation applied to and/or incorporated into the paper, e.g. printed,and/or paper data written to the memory of the circuit and/orinformation associated with circuit data applied to and/or incorporatedinto the paper, e.g. printed.
 179. An apparatus for use in theproduction of sheet material or for use in production of an intermediateproduct for use in the production of sheet material, characterized inthat the apparatus is designed for carrying out the method according toany of claims 161 to
 178. 180. An apparatus according to claim 179,characterized by a printer unit having a depression for incorporatingprinting ink, with said depression preferentially having an opening.181. An intermediate product, such as a transfer element, for use inproduction of sheet material according to any of claims 140 to 160,having an electrical circuit on or in the intermediate product, which isto be applied to or incorporated into the sheet material.
 182. Anintermediate product according to claim 181, characterized in that theintermediate product has one or more depressions for incorporation ofthe circuit and/or of its contact surfaces, and/or the intermediateproduct has further visually visible and/or machine detectable securityelements.
 183. An intermediate product according to claim 181 and/orclaim 182, characterized in that the intermediate product, e.g. in theform of a carrier foil, is provided with metallization which isoptionally connected electroconductively to the circuit.